2007 gmc acadia owner manual m - gm extended warranty the

Seats and Restraint Systems ........................ 7Front Seats .............................................. 9Rear Seats ............................................. 18Safety Belts ............................................ 24Child Restraints ...................................... 48Airbag System ........................................ 76Restraint System Check ......................... 92

Features and Controls ................................. 95Keys ....................................................... 97Doors and Locks .................................. 106Windows ............................................... 114Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 118Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 123Mirrors .................................................. 140OnStar® System ................................... 145Universal Home Remote System .......... 149Storage Areas ...................................... 161Sunroof ................................................ 164

Instrument Panel ........................................ 167Instrument Panel Overview ................... 170Climate Controls ................................... 199Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ... 214Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 232Audio System(s) ................................... 264

Driving Your Vehicle .................................. 329Your Driving, the Road, and

Your Vehicle ..................................... 330Towing ................................................. 367

Service and Appearance Care ................... 383Service ................................................. 385Fuel ...................................................... 387Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 394All-Wheel Drive ..................................... 430Headlamp Aiming ................................. 431Bulb Replacement ................................ 432Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ... 434

2007 GMC Acadia Owner Manual M

1

Tires ..................................................... 435Appearance Care .................................. 478Vehicle Identification ............................. 488Electrical System .................................. 489Capacities and Specifications ................ 497

Maintenance Schedule ............................... 499Maintenance Schedule .......................... 500

Customer Assistance Information ............. 517Customer Assistance and Information .... 518Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 533Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ..... 536

Index ........................................................... 539

2

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,GMC, and the GMC Emblem, are registeredtrademarks, and the name ACADIA is a trademarkof General Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at thetime it was printed. We reserve the right tomake changes after that time without furthernotice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitutethe name “General Motors of Canada Limited”for GMC whenever it appears in this manual.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may nothave all of them. For example, more than oneentertainment system may be offered or yourvehicle may have been ordered without a frontpassenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be thereif it is needed while you are on the road. If thevehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your dealer/retailer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15861570 A First Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive their newvehicle. If this is done, it can help you learnabout the features and controls for the vehicle.Pictures and words work together in theowner manual to explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you were toignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid orreduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. Ifyou do not, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find acircle with a slashthrough it in this book.This safety symbolmeans “Do Not,” “DoNot do this” or “Do Notlet this happen.”

4

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do to helpavoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle. Theyuse the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specific component,control, message, gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage, or indicator, reference thefollowing topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6

Front Seats ..................................................... 9Manual Seats ................................................ 9Driver Seat Height Adjuster ......................... 10Power Seats ............................................... 10Manual Lumbar ........................................... 11Power Lumbar ............................................. 12Heated Seats .............................................. 12Memory Seat and Mirrors ............................ 13Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 15Head Restraints .......................................... 17

Rear Seats .................................................... 18Rear Seat Operation ................................... 18Third Row Seats ......................................... 21

Safety Belts .................................................. 24Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 24Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................. 28How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 29

Driver Position ............................................. 30Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 38Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 39Right Front Passenger Position ................... 39Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 40Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 43Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 47Safety Belt Extender ................................... 47

Child Restraints ............................................ 48Older Children ............................................. 48Infants and Young Children ......................... 51Child Restraint Systems .............................. 55Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 60Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) .................................... 61Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear

Seat Position ........................................... 69Securing a Child Restraint in the Right

Front Seat Position .................................. 72

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

7

Airbag System .............................................. 76Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 79When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 81What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 83How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 83What Will You See After an Airbag

Inflates? ................................................... 84Passenger Sensing System ......................... 85

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 90Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 91Restraint System Check ............................... 92

Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 92Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ........................................... 93

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

8

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

A. Manual Seat Adjustment Bar.B. Driver Seat Height Adjuster. See Driver Seat

Height Adjuster on page 10.C. Manual Reclining Seatback Lever. See

Reclining Seatbacks on page 15.

If your vehicle has a manual bucket seat you canadjust the seat forward or rearward with thebar located under the front of the seat cushion.

Lift the bar to unlock the seat. Slide the seatto where you want it and release the bar. Try tomove the seat with your body to be sure the seat islocked in place.

9

Driver Seat Height AdjusterIf your vehicle has a manual driver seat heightadjuster, it is located on the outboard side of theseat. See Manual Seats on page 9 for moreinformation. To raise the seat, move the leverupward repeatedly until the seat is at the desiredheight. To lower the seat, move the leverdownward repeatedly until the seat is at thedesired height.

Power Seats

A. Power Seat Adjustment Control.B. Power Reclining Seatback Control.

See Reclining Seatbacks on page 15.C. Power Lumbar Control. See Power Lumbar on

page 12.

If the vehicle has power seats, the controls usedto operate them are located on the outboardside of the seats.

Driver’s Seat with Power Seat Control, PowerRecline, and Power Lumbar shown

10

Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding thecontrol forward or rearward.

Your vehicle may have additional features toadjust your vehicle’s power seat:

• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving theentire control up or down.

• Raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion by moving the front of the control upor down.

• Raise or lower the rear part of the seatcushion by moving the rear of the control upor down.

Your vehicle may have a memory function whichallows seat settings to be saved and recalled.See Memory Seat and Mirrors on page 13 for moreinformation.

Manual Lumbar

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the handle islocated on the inboardside of the seatback.See Manual Seatson page 9 for moreinformation.

Turn the handle rearward to decrease lumbarsupport. Turn the handle forward to increaselumbar support.

Keep in mind that as your seating positionchanges, as it may during long trips, so should theposition of your lumbar support. Adjust the seatas needed.

11

Power LumbarIf the seats have power lumbar, the controls usedto operate this feature are located on theoutboard side of the seats. See Power Seats onpage 10 for more information.

• To increase lumbar support, press and holdthe front of the control.

• To decrease lumbar support, press and holdthe rear of the control.

• To raise the height of the lumbar support,press and hold the top of the control.

• To lower the height of the lumbar support,press and hold the bottom of the control.

Release the control when the lower seatbackreaches the desired level of lumbar support.

Keep in mind that as your seating positionchanges, as it may during long trips, so should theposition of your lumbar support. Adjust the seatas needed.

Heated SeatsOn vehicles with heated front seats the controlsare located on the center console near the climatecontrols. To operate the heated seats theignition must be on.

I (Heated Seatback): Press this button to turnon the heated seatback.

The light on the button will come on to indicatethat the feature is working. Press the buttonto cycle through the temperature settings of high,medium, and low and to turn the heat to theseatback off. Indicator lights below the button showthe level of heat selected: three for high, two formedium, and one for low.

J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press thisbutton to turn on the heated seat and seatback.

The light on the button will come on to indicate thatthe feature is working. Press the button to cyclethrough the temperature settings of high, medium,and low and to turn the heat to the seat off.Indicator lights above the button will show the levelof heat selected: three for high, two for medium,and one for low.

12

The heated seats will turn off ten seconds afterthe ignition is turned off. If you want to usethe heated seat feature after you restart yourvehicle, you will need to press the heated seator seatback button again.

If your vehicle has remote vehicle start and isstarted using the remote keyless entry transmitter,the front heated seats will be turned on to thehigh setting if it is cold outside. See “RemoteVehicle Start” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 100. When the key isinserted into the ignition and the ignition is turnedon, the heated seat feature will turn off. To turnthe heated seat feature back on, press thedesired button.

Memory Seat and MirrorsYour vehicle may have the memory package.

The controls for this feature are located on thedriver’s door panel, and are used to program andrecall memory settings for the driver’s seat andoutside mirrors.

To save your positions in memory, do thefollowing:

1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatbackrecliner and lumbar and both outside mirrorsto a comfortable position.See Outside Power Mirrors on page 142 formore information.Not all mirrors will have the ability to save andrecall the mirror positions.

2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps letyou know that the position has been stored.

13

A second seating and mirror position can beprogrammed by repeating the above steps andpressing button 2.

To recall the memory positions, the vehicle mustbe in PARK (P). Press and release either button 1or button 2 corresponding to the desired drivingposition. The seat and outside mirrors will move tothe position previously stored. You will hear asingle beep.

If you use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter to enter your vehicle and the remoterecall memory feature is on, automatic seatand mirror movement will occur. See “MEMORYSEAT RECALL” under DIC Vehicle Customization(With DIC Buttons) on page 255 for moreinformation.

To stop recall movement of the memory feature atany time, press one of the power seat controls,memory buttons, or power mirror buttons.

If something has blocked the driver’s seat whilerecalling a memory position, the driver’s seat recallmay stop working. If this happens, press theappropriate control for the area that is not recallingfor two seconds, after the obstruction is removed.

Then try recalling the memory position again bypressing the appropriate memory button. Ifthe memory position is still not being recalled, seeyour dealer/retailer for service.

Easy Exit SeatThe control for this feature is located on thedriver’s door panel between buttons 1 and 2.

With the vehicle in PARK (P), the exit position canbe recalled by pressing the exit button. You willhear a single beep. The driver’s seat willmove back.

If the easy exit seat feature is on in the DriverInformation Center (DIC), automatic seatmovement will occur when the key is removedfrom the ignition. See “EASY EXIT SEAT” underDIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons)on page 255 for more information.

Further programming for the memory seat featurecan be done using the DIC. You can select orcancel the following:

• The automatic easy exit seat feature.

• The remote memory seat recall feature.

For programming information, see DIC VehicleCustomization (With DIC Buttons) on page 255.

14

Reclining Seatbacks

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

In vehicles with seats that have manual recliningseatbacks, the lever used to operate them islocated on the outboard side of the seat.

To recline the seatback, do the following:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desired position,then release the lever to lock the seatbackin place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

To return the seatback to an upright position, dothe following:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure tothe seatback and the seatback will return tothe upright position.


15

Power Reclining SeatbacksIn vehicles with seats that have power recliningseatbacks, the control used to recline themis located on the outboard side of the seat behindthe power seat control. See Power Seats onpage 10 for more information.

• To recline the seatback, tilt the top of thecontrol rearward.

• To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top ofthe control forward.

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.

The shoulder belt cannot do its jobbecause it will not be against your body.Instead, it will be in front of you. In acrash, you could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries.

The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash, the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit well back in the seat and wearyour safety belt properly.

16

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicleis moving.

Head Restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as the top ofthe occupant’s head. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraintup to raise it. To lowerthe head restraint,press the releasebutton, located on thetop of the seatback,while you push the headrestraint down.

17

Rear Seats

Rear Seat Operation

A. Seat Adjustment Handle.B. Reclining Seatback Strap.C. Sliding Seat Lever.

Entering and Exiting the Third Row

{CAUTION:

Using the third row seating position whilethe second row is folded, or folded andtumbled, could cause injury in a suddenstop or crash. Be sure to return the seatto the passenger seating position. Pushand pull on the seat to make sure it islocked into place.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

18

To access the third row:

1. Make sure there are no objects on the floor infront of or on the second row seat, or in theseat tracks on the floor.

2. On seats with folding armrests, make sure thearmrest is in the upright position.

3. Make sure the safety belt is unfastened and inthe stowed position.

4. Turn the sliding seat lever (C) forward andpush the seatback forward. The seat cushionwill automatically fold, and the entire seatwill slide forward.

Returning the Seat to the SeatingPositionTo return the second row seat to its normalseating position:

1. Make sure there are no objects on the floorbehind the second row seat, or in the seattracks on the floor.

2. Pull the seatback rearward until it is locked inplace.

3. Slide the seat rearward by pushing on theseatback until it is locked in place.

4. Push down on the rear of the seat cushionuntil it is locked in place.

5. Push and pull on the seatback and seatcushion to make sure they are locked in place

6. Make sure the safety belt is not under the seatcushion.

19

Reclining the SeatbacksTo recline the seatback:

1. Leaning forward in the seat, pull the recliningseatback strap (B).

2. Move the seatback to the desired position,then release the lever to lock the seatbackin place.


Folding the Rear SeatTo fold the second row seats:

1. Make sure there is nothing on or underthe seat.

2. Make sure the armrest is in the uprightposition, and the safety belt is unfastened.

3. Pull forward on the reclining seatbackstrap (B) and push down on the seatback.

4. If the headrest hits the front seat, slide thesecond row seat rearward.

To return the seatback to the seating position, liftthe upper corner of the seatback and push itrearward until it locks into place. Push and pull onthe seatback to make sure it is locked.

Adjusting the SeatsTo adjust the second row seats, pull outward onthe seat adjustment handle (A). Slide the seatforward or rearward to the desired position.Release the handle and push and pull on the seatto make sure it is locked.

20

Third Row Seats

{CAUTION:

Using the third row seating position whilethe second row is folded, or pushedforward in the entry position, could causeinjury in a sudden stop or crash. Be sureto return the seat to the passengerseating position. Push and pull on theseat to make sure it is locked into place.

The third row seats can be folded forward orremoved.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

To fold the seatback:


2. Disconnect the rear safety belt mini-latch,using a key in the slot on the mini-buckle,let the belt retract into the headliner. Stowthe mini-latch in the holder located inthe headliner.

21

3. Pull up on therelease lever locatedon the back of theseat. The headrestmoves forwardautomatically.

4. Push the seatback forward to lay flat.

To return the seatback to the seating position:

1. Raise the seatback into place by usingthe pullstrap from the rear of the vehicle, or bypushing it into place from inside the vehicle.

2. Make sure the headrest is locked into placebefore sitting in the seat.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked in place.

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed, notproperly attached, or twisted will notprovide the protection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising the rearseatback, always check to be sure that thesafety belts are properly routed andattached, and are not twisted.

22

4. Make sure the safety belt is not twisted, andreconnect the center safety belt mini-latch tothe mini-buckle.

5. Pull on the safety belt to be sure the mini-latchis secure.

Removing the Third Row Seats1. Remove the cargo management system, if it is

in the vehicle. See Cargo Management Systemon page 164.


Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety beltsstill fastened may cause damage to the seat orthe safety belts. Always unbuckle the safetybelts and return them to their normal stowedposition before folding a rear seat.3. Fold the seatback down. See Folding the

Seatback earlier in this section.4. Remove the rear bolts located on the floor on

each side of the seat.5. Remove the seat by tilting it slightly upward,

and then pulling it out of the rear of the vehiclein one motion.

6. Put the bolts back into the holes on the floor sothe nuts do not get misplaced.

Installing the Third row Seats1. Make sure the seatback is folded forward

before installing the seat. See Folding theSeatback earlier in this section.The seats must be placed in the properlocations for the legs to attach correctly. Thewider seat must be installed on the driverside and the narrower seat on the passengerside. Make sure to remove the bolts fromthe holes in the floor before installingthe seats.

2. Place the seat on the vehicle floor so that thefront seat hooks are on the vehicle bars.

3. Reinstall the bolts, and torque to 55 Y(41 lb ft). Pull up on the seat to make sureit is locked in place.

4. Raise the seatback to its upright position.Push and pull on the seatback to makesure it is locked into place.

5. Push the headrest up into position. Push andpull on the headrest to make sure it is lockedinto place.

23

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecannot wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that your passengers’belts are fastened properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has indicators to remind you andyour passengers to buckle your safety belts. SeeSafety Belt Reminder Light on page 216 andPassenger Safety Belt Reminder Light onpage 217.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces,the law says to wear safety belts. Here iswhy: They work.

24

You never know if you will be in a crash. If youdo have a crash, you do not know if it will be abad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes canbe so serious that even buckled up, a personwould not survive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, people who buckle upcan survive and sometimes walk away. Withoutbelts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.

25

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. Therider does not stop.

26

The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

or the instrument panel...

27

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down. Andyour chance of being conscious during andafter an accident, so you can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should Ihave to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; sothey work with safety belts — not instead ofthem. Every airbag system ever offeredfor sale has required the use of safety belts.Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and othercollisions.

28

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safetybelts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect youfrom things beyond your control, such as baddrivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deaths occur at speeds ofless than 40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And thereare different rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, seeOlder Children on page 48 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 51. Follow those rules foreveryone’s protection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

29

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how towear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. Tosee how, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure. If the belt is not long enough,see Safety Belt Extender on page 47.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to theheight that is right for you. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. SeeShoulder Belt Height Adjustment on page 38.

30

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In acrash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.And you would be less likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force atyour abdomen. This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take belt restraining forces.The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stopor crash.

31

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

32


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap beltis too loose. In a crash, you could slideunder the lap belt and apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries. The lap belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

33


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

34


A: The belt is over an armrest.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your beltgoes over an armrest like this. The beltwould be much too high. In a crash, youcan slide under the belt. The belt forcewould then be applied at the abdomen,not at the pelvic bones, and that couldcause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure thebelt goes under the armrests.

35


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. Itshould be worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.

36


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have thefull width of the belt to spread impactforces. If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask yourdealer/retailer to fix it.

37

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way. Whenthe safety belt is not in use, slide the latch plate upthe safety belt webbing. The latch plate shouldrest on the stitching on the safety belt, nearthe guide loop on the side wall.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjustmentBefore you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltheight adjuster to the height that is right for you.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion ofthe belt is centered on your shoulder. Thebelt should be away from your face and neck, butnot falling off your shoulder. Incorrect positioningof the shoulder belt can reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt.

To move it down, pushdown on the button (A)and move the heightadjuster to the desiredposition. You canmove the heightadjuster up by pushingup on the shoulderbelt guide.

After you move the height adjuster to where youwant it, try to move it down without pushingthe button down to make sure it has locked intoposition.

38

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as lowas possible, below the rounding, throughoutthe pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, itis more likely that the fetus will not be hurtin a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making safety belts effective is wearingthem properly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Position onpage 30.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — exceptfor one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portionof the belt out all the way, you will engage thechild restraint locking feature. If this happens, letthe belt go back all the way and start again.

39

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety beltedcan be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. Andthey can strike others in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts.If you are using the center third row seatingposition and the safety belt is not attached, seeThird Row Seats on page 21 for instructionon reconnecting the lap belt to the shoulder belt.

Here is how to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks. Pull up on the latch plate to makesure it is secure.When the shoulder belt is pulled out all theway, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all theway and start again.

40

If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 47.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder part.It may be necessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best ableto take belt restraining forces.

41

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop ora crash.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.For outboard seating positions, when the safetybelt is not in use, slide the latch plate up the safetybelt webbing. The latch plate should rest on thestitching on the safety belt, near the guide loop onthe side wall.

42

Rear Safety Belt Comfort GuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guides may provideadded safety belt comfort for older childrenwho have outgrown booster seats and for someadults. When installed on a shoulder belt, thecomfort guide positions the belt away fromthe neck and head.

There is a guide for each outboard passengerpositions in the second row seat and all passengerpositions in the third row.

Here is how to install a comfort guide to thesafety belt:

1. For the outboard positions, remove the guidefrom its storage clip on the interior body.

Outboard Positions

43

For the third row centerposition, locate thecomfort guide which islocated in a storagepocket, at the top of theseat, under theheadrest on the driver’sside of the vehicle.

To access the comfort guide, you will firstneed to move the headrest forward by pullingon the handle behind the seatback. Thecomfort guide will now be accessible. Pull thecomfort guide out of its storage locationand then return the headrest to its uprightposition.The elastic cord on the comfort guide isadjustable. You can make it longer or shorterby squeezing the both ends of the plasticadjuster.Third Row Center

Position

44

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. Theelastic cord must be under the belt. Then,place the guide over the belt, and insert thetwo edges of the belt into the slots of theguide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it liesflat. The elastic cord must be under the beltand the guide on top.

45

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly worn maynot provide the protection needed in acrash. The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. The shoulder beltshould go over the shoulder and acrossthe chest. These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety beltas described in Rear Seat Passengers onpage 40. Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guide, squeezethe belt edges together so that you can takethem out of the guide. Slide the guide intoits storage location or on its storage clip.

46

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are part of the safety beltassembly. They help tighten the safety belts duringthe early stages of a moderate to severe frontal,near frontal or side crash or a rollover if thethreshold conditions for pretensioner activationare met.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in acrash, you will need to get new ones, andprobably other new parts for your safety beltsystem. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 93.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, yourdealer/retailer will order you an extender. Whenyou go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you willwear, so the extender will be long enough foryou. To help avoid personal injury, do notlet someone else use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extender has beendesigned for adults. Never use it for securing childseats. To wear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see the instructionsheet that comes with the extender.

47

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safetybelts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder beltand get the additional restraint a shoulder beltcan provide. The shoulder belt should notcross the face or neck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. It should never be worn overthe abdomen, which could cause severe oreven fatal internal injuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

48

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt cannot properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to awindow, move the child toward the center ofthe vehicle. Also see Rear Safety BeltComfort Guides on page 43. If the child issitting in the center rear seat passengerposition, move the child toward the safety beltbuckle. In either case, be sure that theshoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, sothat in a crash the child’s upper body wouldhave the restraint that belts provide.

49

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears thebelt in this way, in a crash the child mightslide under the belt. The belt’s forcewould then be applied right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

50

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every statein the United States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children shouldnot use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,unless there is no other choice. Instead, they needto use a child restraint.

51

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A babydoes not weigh much — until a crash.During a crash a baby will become soheavy it is not possible to hold it. Forexample, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. A baby should besecured in an appropriate restraint.

52

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not foryoung children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

53

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions thatcome with the restraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particular child restraint.In addition, there are many kinds of restraintsavailable for children with special needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so the crashforces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, theback and shoulders. Infants alwaysshould be secured in appropriate infantrestraints.

54

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed. Ayoung child’s hip bones are still so smallthat the vehicle’s regular safety belt maynot remain low on the hip bones, as itshould. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. Thisalone could cause serious or fatal injuries.Young children always should be securedin appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.

55

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint withthe seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infant inplace and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.

56

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat can alsohelp a child to see out the window.

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, orposition children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint system is aportable one, which is purchased by thevehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, anadd-on child restraint must be secured inthe vehicle. With built-in or add-on childrestraints, the child has to be secured withinthe child restraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint, besure the child restraint is designed to beused in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards. Then follow the instructionsfor the restraint. You may find theseinstructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both.

57

Securing an Add-on Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle. Make surethe child restraint is properly installed inthe vehicle using the vehicle’s safety beltor LATCH system, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be secured in vehicle seatsby lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) onpage 61 for more information. A child canbe endangered in a crash if the child restraint isnot properly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer tothe instructions that come with the restraintwhich may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

58

Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraintThere are several systems for securing the childwithin the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, anda crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hipstraps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps thatare attached to a flat pad which rests low againstthe child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield hasstraps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shieldthat swings up or to the side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child is not properlysecured in the child restraint. Make surethe child is properly secured, followingthe instructions that came with thatrestraint.

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crash ifthe child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

59

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat.We recommend that children be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a child riding in aforward-facing child seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.A label on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s airbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing child restraintwould be very close to the inflating airbag.

CAUTION: (Continued)


Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off theright front passenger’s frontal andseat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped) if the system detects arear-facing child restraint, no system isfail-safe, and no one can guarantee thatan airbag will not deploy under someunusual circumstance, even though it isturned off. We recommend that rear-facingchild restraints be secured in a rear seat,even if the airbag(s) are off.

If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.

60

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint duringdriving or in a crash. This system is designedto make installation of a child restraint easier. TheLATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle andattachments on the child restraint that are made foruse with the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraintis properly installed using the anchors, or usethe vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint with a toptether, you must also use either the lower anchorsor the safety belts to properly secure the childrestraint. A child restraint must never be attachedusing only the top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraint manufacturer willprovide you with instructions on how to usethe child restraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach a child restraintwith these attachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraintshave lower anchors and attachments or toptether anchors and attachments.

61

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into thevehicle. There are two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will accommodate achild restraint with lower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)on the child restraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forwardmovement and rotation of the child restraintduring driving or in a crash.

62

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)or a dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether tothe anchor.

Some child restraints with top tethers are designedfor use with or without the top tether beingattached. Others require the top tether always tobe attached. In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints have a top tether,and that the tether be attached. In the UnitedStates, some child restraints also have atop tether. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for your child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for manychild restraints. Ask the child restraintmanufacturer whether or not a kit is available.

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

Second Row — Bucket

63


j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.


To assist you in locatingthe lower anchors, eachsecond row anchorposition has a label,near the creasebetween the seatbackand the seat cushion.

To assist you in locatingthe top tether anchors,the top tether anchorsymbol is located on thetrim cover or near theanchor.

Second Row — 60/40Bench

Third Row

64

The top tether anchors are located at the bottomrear of the seatback for each seating positionin the second row. Open the trim cover to accessthe anchors. Be sure to use an anchor locatedon the same side of the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraint will be placed.

The third row has one top tether anchor located atthe bottom rear of the center seatback. Thisanchor should be used for the center seatingposition only. Never install two top tethers usingthe same top tether anchor.

Do not secure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger position or the third row outboardseating positions, if a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or if theinstructions that come with the child restraint saythat the top tether must be attached. There isno place to attach the top tether in these positions.

Second Row — Bucket Shown, Bench Similar Third Row Seat

65

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 60for additional information.

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injuredor killed. Make sure that a LATCH-typechild restraint is properly installed usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchorin the vehicle is designed to hold only onechild restraint. Attaching more than onechild restraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachment to comeloose or even break during a crash. Achild or others could be injured if thishappens. To help prevent injury to peopleand damage to your vehicle, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.

66

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Secure any unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pull theshoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehicle hasone, after the child restraint has beeninstalled. Be sure to follow the instructionsof the child restraint manufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly may cause damage tothese parts. Make sure when securing unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint thatthere is no contact between the child restraintor the LATCH attachment parts and thevehicle’s safety belt assembly.

Folding an empty rear seat with the safetybelts secured may cause damage to the safetybelt or the seat. When removing the childrestraint, always remember to return the safetybelts to their normal, stowed position beforefolding the rear seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments tothe lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Recline the seatback to the full reclinedposition.Make sure the second row benchseatbacks are aligned at the sameangle before placing the child restrainton the seat. Make sure the thirdrow bench seatbacks are both uprightbefore placing the child restraint onthe seat.

67

1.3. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.4. Attach and tighten the lower

attachments on the child restraint to thelower anchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,if the vehicle has one. Refer to the childrestraint instructions and the following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. If the anchor is covered, flip open the

trim cover to expose the anchor.

2.3. Route, attach and tighten the top tetheraccording to your child restraintinstructions and the followinginstructions:

If the position you areusing does not have ahead rest/restraintand you are using asingle tether, route thetether over theseatback.

If the position you areusing does not have ahead rest/restraintand you are using adual tether, routethe tether over theseatback.

68

If the position you areusing has a fixed headrest/restraint andyou are using a dualtether, route thetether around the headrest/restraint.

If the position you areusing has a fixed headrest/restraint andyou are using a singletether, route thetether over the headrest/restraint.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

Securing a Child Restraint in a RearSeat PositionIf your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 61.

There are no top tether anchors in the third rowoutboard seating positions. Do not secure achild restraint in these positions if a national orlocal law requires that a top tether be anchored orif the instructions that come with the restraintsay that the top tether must be anchored.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions that came with thechild restraint. Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.

1. Recline the seatback to the full reclinedposition to prevent the child seat fromcontacting the head restraint. See Recliningthe Seatbacks under Rear Seat Operation onpage 18.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

69

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

70

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.

7. If your child restraint has a top tether, and theposition that you are using has a top tetheranchor, attach and tighten the top tether to thetop tether anchor. Refer to the instructionsthat came with the child restraint and to LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)on page 61.


To remove the child restraint, unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and beready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

When the safety belt is not in use, slide the latchplate up the safety belt webbing. The latchplate should rest on the stitching on the safetybelt, near the guide loop on the side wall.

71

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has a right front passenger airbag.A rear seat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. See Where to Putthe Restraint on page 60.

In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem. The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbagwhen an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or asmall child in a forward-facing child restraintor booster seat is detected. See PassengerSensing System on page 85 and Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 218 for more informationon this, including important safety information.

A label on your sun visor says, “Never puta rear-facing child seat in the front.” This isbecause the risk to the rear-facing child is sogreat, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal andseat-mounted side impact airbag if thesystem detects a rear-facing childrestraint, no system is fail-safe, and noone can guarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusual circumstance,even though it is turned off. Werecommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbags are off.


72



If your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 61.

There is no top tether anchor at the right frontseating position. Do not secure a child seat in thisposition if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored or if the instructionsthat come with the child restraint say that the toptether must be anchored. See Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 61 ifthe child restraint has a top tether.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontalairbag. See Passenger Sensing System onpage 85. We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in a rear seat, even ifthe airbags are off.

1. Move the seat as far back as it will go beforesecuring the forward-facing child restraint.See Manual Seats on page 9 or Power Seatson page 10.When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag and seat-mounted side impactairbag, the off indicator on the passengerairbag status indicator should light and stay litwhen you start the vehicle. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 218.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

73

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

74

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt. You should not be ableto pull more of the belt from the retractoronce the lock has been set.


If the airbag is off, the off indicator will be lit andstay lit when you start the vehicle.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. Ifthis happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in thevehicle and check with your dealer/retailer.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and beready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger. When the safety belt is not in use,slide the latch plate up the safety belt webbing.The latch plate should rest on the stitching on thesafety belt, near the upper anchor on the side wall.

75

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has the following airbags:

• A frontal airbag for the driver.

• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.

• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for thedriver.

• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for theright front passenger.

• A roof-rail airbag for the driver, passengerdirectly behind the driver, and the thirdrow outboard passenger position.

• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger,passenger directly behind the right frontpassenger, and the third row outboardpassenger position.

All of the airbags in your vehicle will have theword AIRBAG embossed in the trim or onan attached label near the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG willappear on the middle part of the steering wheelfor the driver and on the instrument panel forthe right front passenger.

With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatbackclosest to the door.

With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG willappear along the headliner or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’sairbags are also designed to help reduce the riskof injury from the force of an inflating bag, allairbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt — even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.


76


Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts, but do notreplace them.

{CAUTION:

Frontal airbags are designed to deploy inmoderate to severe frontal and nearfrontal crashes. They are not designed toinflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in manyside crashes.

Seat-mounted side impact airbags aredesigned to inflate in moderate to severecrashes where something hits the side ofyour vehicle. They are not designed toinflate in frontal, in rollover, or in rear



crashes. Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to inflate in moderate tosevere crashes where something hits theside of your vehicle, during a vehiclerollover, or in a severe frontal impact.They are not designed to inflate in rearcrashes.

Everyone in your vehicle should wear asafety belt properly — whether or notthere is an airbag for that person.

77

{CAUTION:

Airbags inflate with great force, fasterthan the blink of an eye. Anyone who isup against, or very close to, any airbagwhen it inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Do not sit unnecessarily close tothe airbag, as you would be if you weresitting on the edge of your seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keep you inposition before and during a crash.Always wear your safety belt, even withairbags. The driver should sit as far backas possible while still maintaining controlof the vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on or sleepagainst the door or side windows inseating positions with seat-mounted sideimpact airbags and/or roof-rail airbags.

{CAUTION:

Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer thebest protection for adults, but not foryoung children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.Always secure children properly in yourvehicle. To read how, see Older Childrenon page 48 or Infants and Young Childrenon page 51.

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows theairbag symbol.

78

The system checks the airbag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 217 for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

79

The seat-mounted side impact airbags for thedriver and right front passenger are in the side ofthe seatbacks closest to the door.

The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right frontpassenger, passengers behind the driver and rightfront passenger, and the third row outboardpassengers are in the ceiling above the sidewindows.

Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar

80

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant andan airbag, the airbag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbag mustbe kept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and an airbag, anddo not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories that blockthe inflation path of a seat-mounted sideimpact airbag.

If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags, neversecure anything to the roof of yourvehicle by routing the rope or tie downthrough any door or window opening. Ifyou do, the path of an inflating roof-railairbag will be blocked.

When Should an Airbag Inflate?Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderateto severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severe injuries mainlyto the driver’s or right front passenger’s head andchest. However, they are only designed toinflate if the impact exceeds a predetermineddeployment threshold. Deployment thresholds areused to predict how severe a crash is likely tobe in time for the airbags to inflate and helprestrain the occupants.

Whether your frontal airbags will or should deployis not based on how fast your vehicle is traveling.It depends largely on what you hit, the directionof the impact, and how quickly your vehicleslows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

81

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight intothe object.

Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicledesign.

Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate duringvehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or in manyside impacts.In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontalairbags. Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraintaccording to crash severity. Your vehicle haselectronic frontal sensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between a moderate frontalimpact and a more severe frontal impact. Formoderate frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags inflateat a level less than full deployment. For moresevere frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.

Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags areintended to inflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes. In addition, these roof-rail airbags

are intended to inflate during a rollover or in asevere frontal impact. Seat-mounted side impactand roof-rail airbags will inflate if the crash severityis above the system’s designed threshold level.The threshold level can vary with specific vehicledesign.Seat-mounted side impact airbags are notintended to inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontalimpacts, rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-railairbags are not intended to inflate in rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbag is intendedto deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.Both roof-rail airbags will deploy when eitherside of the vehicle is struck, or if the sensingsystem predicts that the vehicle is about toroll over, or in a severe frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply becauseof the damage to a vehicle or because of what therepair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits, the angleof the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slowsdown. For seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags, deployment is determined by thelocation and severity of the side impact. In arollover event, roof-rail airbag deploymentis determined by the direction of the roll.

82

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In a deployment event, the sensing system sendsan electrical signal triggering a release of gasfrom the inflator. Gas from the inflator fillsthe airbag causing the bag to break out of thecover and deploy. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part of the airbagmodule.

Frontal airbag modules are located inside thesteering wheel and instrument panel. For vehicleswith seat-mounted side impact airbags, thereare airbag modules in the side of the frontseatbacks closest to the door. For vehicles withroof-rail airbags, there are airbag modules inthe ceiling of the vehicle, near the side windowsthat have occupant seating positions.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contact thesteering wheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protection provided bysafety belts.

Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impactmore evenly over the occupant’s upper body,stopping the occupant more gradually.Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbagsdistribute the force of the impact more evenly overthe occupant’s upper body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed tohelp contain the head and chest of occupantsin the outboard seating positions in the first,second, and third rows. The rollover capableroof-rail airbags are designed to help reduce therisk of full or partial ejection in rollover events,although no system can prevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in many types ofcollisions, primarily because the occupant’s motionis not toward those airbags. See When Shouldan Airbag Inflate? on page 81 for more information.

Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts.

83

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted sideimpact airbags inflate, they quickly deflate,so quickly that some people may not even realizean airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still beat least partially inflated for some time afterthey deploy. Some components of the airbagmodule may be hot for several minutes. Forlocation of the airbag modules, see What Makesan Airbag Inflate? on page 83.

The parts of the airbag that come into contact withyou may be warm, but not too hot to touch.There may be some smoke and dust coming fromthe vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflationdoes not prevent the driver from seeing out of thewindshield or being able to steer the vehicle,nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, andturn the hazard warning flashers on when theairbags inflate. You can lock the doors, turn theinterior lamps off, and turn the hazard warningflashers off by using the controls for those features.

84

In many crashes severe enough to inflate theairbag, windshields are broken by vehicledeformation. Additional windshield breakagemay also occur from the right front passengerairbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.After an airbag inflates, you will needsome new parts for the airbag system. If youdo not get them, the airbag system willnot be there to help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will include airbagmodules and possibly other parts. The servicemanual for your vehicle covers the need toreplace other parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy on page 536 and Event DataRecorders on page 537.

• Let only qualified technicians work on theairbag systems. Improper service canmean that an airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer/retailer for service.

Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing systemfor the right front passenger’s position. Thepassenger airbag status indicator will be visiblewhen you start your vehicle in the instrumentpanel.

The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on andoff, will be visible during the system check. Ifyou are using remote start to start your vehiclefrom a distance, if equipped, you may not see thesystem check. When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON or the word OFF, orthe symbol for on or the symbol for off, will bevisible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator onpage 218.

United States Canada

85

The passenger sensing system will turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag under certainconditions. The driver’s airbags are not part of thepassenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system works withsensors that are part of the right front passenger’sseat. The sensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly-seated occupant anddetermine if the right front passenger’s frontalairbag and seat-mounted side impact airbagshould be enabled (may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than thefront seat.

We recommend that children be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a child riding in aforward-facing child seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal andseat-mounted side impact airbag if thesystem detects a rear-facing childrestraint, no system is fail-safe, and noone can guarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusual circumstance,even though it is turned off. Werecommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbags are off.


86



The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied bya smaller person, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impact airbag, the offindicator will light and stay lit to remind you thatthe airbags are off. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 218.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint following the child restraintmanufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing aChild Restraint in the Right Front Seat Positionon page 72.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. Ifthis happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.

87

Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraintson page 17.

Remove any additional material from the seatcushion before reinstalling or securing thechild restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle,and check with your dealer/retailer.

The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbaganytime the system senses that a person ofadult size is sitting properly in the right frontpassenger’s seat. When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbags to be enabled, theon indicator will light and stay lit to remind youthat the airbags are active.

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag, dependingupon the person’s seating posture and body build.Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrownchild restraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is an airbag forthat person.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, itcould be because that person is not sitting properlyin the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle offand ask the person to place the seatback inthe fully upright position, then sit upright in theseat, centered on the seat cushion, with theperson’s legs comfortably extended. Restart thevehicle and have the person remain in this positionfor two to three minutes. This will allow thesystem to detect that person and then enable theright front passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag.

88

Safety belts help keep the passenger in positionon the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking,which helps the passenger sensing systemmaintain the passenger airbag status. See “SafetyBelts” and “Child Restraints” in the Index foradditional information about the importance ofproper restraint use.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that somethingmay be wrong with the airbag system. Ifthis ever happens, have the vehicleserviced promptly, because an adult-sizeperson sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat may not have theprotection of the airbag(s). See AirbagReadiness Light on page 217 for more onthis, including important safetyinformation.

A thick layer of additional material, such as ablanket or cushion, or aftermarket equipment suchas seat covers, seat heaters, and seat massagerscan affect how well the passenger sensingsystem operates.

89

You may want to consider not using seat coversor other aftermarket equipment. See AddingEquipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 91 for more information about modificationsthat can affect how the system operates.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger’sseat or between the passenger’s seatcushion and seatback may interfere withthe proper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should beserviced. There are parts of the airbag system inseveral places around your vehicle. You donot want the system to inflate while someone isworking on your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer

and the service manual have information aboutservicing your vehicle and the airbag system.To purchase a service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 535.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition isturned off and the battery is disconnected,an airbag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you areclose to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably partof the airbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, and make surethe person performing work for you isqualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

90

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to theexterior of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,front end or side sheet metal, they may keepthe airbag system from working properly.Also, the airbag system may not work properlyif you relocate any of the airbag sensors. Ifyou have any questions about this, you shouldcontact Customer Assistance before youmodify your vehicle. The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure.

If your vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags,see Different Size Tires and Wheels onpage 452 for additional important information.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of thefront seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, roof-rail airbag modules,ceiling headliner, and pillar garnish trim, sideimpact sensors, rollover sensor module,or airbag wiring can affect the operation of theairbag system. If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. The phone numbersand addresses for Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 518.

Your dealer/retailer and the service manual haveinformation about the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnostic module andairbag wiring.

91

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint Systems

Safety BeltsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors, and anchorages are working properly.See Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 216for more information.

Look for any other loose or damaged safety beltsystem parts. If you see anything that might keep asafety belt system from doing its job, have itrepaired. Keep safety belts clean and dry. SeeCare of Safety Belts on page 482 for moreinformation.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Airbag SystemThe airbag system does not need regularlyscheduled maintenance or replacement. Makesure the airbag readiness light is working.See Airbag Readiness Light on page 217 for moreinformation.

Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged,opened, or broken, the airbag may not workproperly. Do not open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are any opened or brokenairbag covers, have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For the location ofthe airbag modules, see What Makes an AirbagInflate? on page 83. See your dealer/retailerfor service.

92

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help make sureyour restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have them inspectedand any necessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system parts?After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash,then you need new parts.If the LATCH system was being used during amore severe crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.Collision damage also may mean you will need tohave LATCH system, safety belt or seat partsrepaired or replaced. New parts and repairs maybe necessary even if the belt or LATCH systemwas not being used at the time of the collision.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag systemearlier in this section.

If any airbag inflates, you will also need to replacethe driver and front passenger’s safety beltretractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then thenew retractor assembly will be there to help protectyou in a collision.

After a crash you may need to replace the driverand front passenger’s safety belt retractorassemblies, even if the frontal airbags have notdeployed. The driver and front passenger’s safetybelt retractor assemblies contain the safety beltpretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensionerschecked if your vehicle has been in a collision,or if your airbag readiness light stays on after youstart your vehicle or while you are driving. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 217.

93

✍ NOTES

94

Keys .............................................................. 97Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 98Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System

Operation ............................................... 100Doors and Locks ........................................ 106

Door Locks ................................................ 106Power Door Locks ..................................... 107Delayed Locking ........................................ 107Programmable Automatic Door Locks ........ 107Rear Door Security Locks ......................... 108Lockout Protection ..................................... 108Liftgate ...................................................... 109Power Liftgate ........................................... 110

Windows ...................................................... 114Power Windows ........................................ 115Sun Visors ................................................ 117

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 118Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 118PASS-Key® III+ ......................................... 120PASS-Key® III+ Operation ......................... 121

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 123New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 123Ignition Positions ....................................... 124Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 125Starting the Engine .................................... 126Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 127Automatic Transmission Operation ............. 129Tow/Haul Mode ......................................... 133Parking Brake ........................................... 134Shifting Into Park (P) ................................. 135Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 137Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 137Engine Exhaust ......................................... 138Running the Engine While Parked ............. 139

Section 2 Features and Controls

95

Mirrors ......................................................... 140Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ....... 140Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with

OnStar® and Compass ........................... 140Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 142Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors ............... 143Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 144Outside Heated Mirrors ............................. 145

OnStar® System .......................................... 145Universal Home Remote System ................ 149

System Identification .................................. 149Universal Home Remote System ............... 150Universal Home Remote System

Operation (With One Triangular LED) ..... 150Universal Home Remote System

Operation (With Three Round LED) ....... 154

Storage Areas ............................................. 161Glove Box ................................................. 161Cupholder(s) .............................................. 161Instrument Panel Storage Area .................. 161Center Console Storage Area .................... 161Floor Mats ................................................. 162Luggage Carrier ........................................ 162Rear Seat Armrest .................................... 163Convenience Net ....................................... 163Cargo Cover ............................................. 163Cargo Tie Downs ...................................... 163Cargo Management System ...................... 164

Sunroof ....................................................... 164

Section 2 Features and Controls

96

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others could be badlyinjured or even killed. They could operatethe power windows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move. Thewindows will function with the keys in theignition and they could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

97

Your vehicle has onedouble-sided key for theignition and all doorlocks.

If you ever lose your keys, your dealer/retailer willbe able to assist you with obtaining replacements.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in yourvehicle, you may have to damage the vehicleto get in. Be sure you have spare keys.

If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, callthe GM Roadside Assistance Center. SeeRoadside Assistance Program on page 524.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)SystemIf the vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)system, it operates on a radio frequency subjectto Federal Communications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

98

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

At times you may notice a decrease in range. Thisis normal for any RKE system. If the transmitterdoes not work or if you have to stand closerto your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too farfrom your vehicle. You may need to standcloser during rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 100.

• If you are still having trouble, see yourdealer/retailer or a qualified technicianfor service.

99

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitterfunctions will work up to 195 feet (60 m) away.However, the operating range may be less whilethe vehicle is running.

There are other conditions which can affect theperformance of the transmitter. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System on page 98.

The following functions may be available if yourvehicle has the RKE system:

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle hasthis feature, it may be started from outsidethe vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See“Remote Vehicle Start” following for more detailedinformation.

Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock all thedoors. If enabled through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), the parking lamps will flash once toindicate locking has occurred. If enabled throughthe DIC, the horn will chirp when the lock button ispressed again within five seconds of the previouspress of the lock button. See DIC VehicleCustomization (With DIC Buttons) on page 255 foradditional information. Pressing the lock buttonmay arm the content theft-deterrent system.See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 118.

With Remote Start andLiftgate (Without

Remote Start or LiftgateSimilar)

100

" (Unlock): Press the unlock button to unlock thedriver’s door. If the button is pressed again withinfive seconds, all remaining doors will unlock. Theinterior lamps will come on and stay on for20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on. Ifenabled through the DIC, the parking lamps willflash once to indicate unlocking has occurred. SeeDIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) onpage 255. Pressing the unlock button on the RKEtransmitter will disarm the content theft-deterrentsystem. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 118.

& (Power Liftgate): Press and hold this buttonon the RKE transmitter to open and close theliftgate. The taillamps will flash and a chime willsound to indicate when the liftgate is opening andclosing.

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press andrelease this button to locate your vehicle. The turnsignal lamps will flash and the horn will soundthree times. Press and hold this button for morethan two seconds to activate the panic alarm. Theturn signal lamps will flash and the horn will soundrepeatedly for 30 seconds. The alarm will turn offwhen the ignition is moved to ON or the alarmbutton is pressed again. The ignition must be inOFF for the panic alarm to work.

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach RKE transmitter is coded to prevent anothertransmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can bepurchased through your dealer/retailer. Rememberto bring any additional transmitters so they can alsobe re-coded to match the new transmitter. Onceyour dealer/retailer has coded the new transmitter,the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Thevehicle can have a maximum of eight transmittersmatched to it. See “Relearn Remote Key” underDIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) onpage 233 or DIC Operation and Displays (WithoutDIC Buttons) on page 239 for instructions on how tomatch RKE transmitters to your vehicle.

101

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in the RKEtransmitter should last about four years.

The battery is weak if the transmitter will not workat the normal range in any location. If you haveto get close to your vehicle before the transmitterworks, it is probably time to change the battery.

The REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage in the vehicle’s DIC will display if theRKE transmitter battery is low. See “REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC Warningsand Messages on page 244 for additionalinformation.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use carenot to touch any of the circuitry. Staticfrom your body transferred to these surfacesmay damage the transmitter.

To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter dothe following:

1. Insert a flat object with a thin edge into thenotch on the side of the transmitter andseparate the bottom half from the top half.

2. Remove the old battery, but do not use ametal object to do this.

3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter withthe positive side of the battery facing down.Use a type CR2032 battery, or equivalenttype. Make sure the cover is on tightly,so water will not get in.

102

4. Snap the front and the back of the transmittertogether.

5. Test the operation of the transmitter with thevehicle.

Remote Vehicle StartYour vehicle may have a remote starting feature.This feature allows you to start the enginefrom outside of the vehicle. It may also start upthe vehicle’s heating or air conditioning systemsand rear window defogger. Normal operation of thesystem will return after the key is turned to theON position.

If your vehicle has an automatic climate controlsystem, during remote start, the climate controlsystem will default to a heating mode during colderoutside temperatures and a cooling mode duringwarmer outside temperatures. If your vehicledoes not have an automatic climate controlsystem, during remote start, the climate controlsystem will turn on at the setting the vehicle wasset to when the vehicle was last turned off.

During a remote start, if your vehicle has anautomatic climate control system and heatedseats, the heated seats will turn on during colderoutside temperatures and will shut off whenthe key is turned to RUN. If your vehicle does nothave an automatic climate control system,during remote start, you will need to manually turnthe heated seats on and off. See Heated Seatsfor additional information

Laws in some communities may restrict the use ofremote starters. For example, some laws mayrequire a person using the remote start to have thevehicle in view when doing so. Check localregulations for any requirements on remote startingof vehicles.

The RKE transmitter with the remote start button,provides an increased range of operation. However,the range may be less while the vehicle is running.As a result, you may need to be closer to yourvehicle to turn it off, than you were to turn it on.

There are other conditions which can affect theperformance of the transmitter, see RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System on page 98 foradditional information.

103

/ (Remote Start): This button will be on theRKE transmitter if you have remote start.

To start the vehicle using the remote start feature,do the following:

1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.

2. Press and release the transmitter’s lockbutton, then immediately press and holdthe transmitter’s remote start button until theturn signal lights flash. If you cannot seethe vehicle’s lights, press and hold the remotestart button for at least four seconds. Thevehicle’s doors will lock. Pressing the remotestart button again, after the vehicle hasstarted, will turn off the ignition.When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps willturn on and remain on while the vehicle isrunning.

3. If it is the first remote start since the vehiclehas been driven, repeat these steps while theengine is still running, to extend the timeby 10 minutes for the engine to continue torun. Remote start can be extended one time.

After entering the vehicle during a remote start,insert and turn the key to the ON position to drivethe vehicle.

If the vehicle is left running it will automaticallyshut off after 10 minutes unless a time extensionhas been done.

To manually shut off a remote start, do any of thefollowing:

• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle andpress the remote start button until theparking lamps turn off.

• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

• Turn the ignition switch on and then off.

The vehicle can be remote started two separatetimes between driving sequences. The engine willrun for 10 minutes after each remote start.

Or, you can extend the engine run time by another10 minutes within the first 10 minute remotestart time frame, and before the engine stops.

For example, if the lock button and then the remotestart buttons are pressed again after the vehicle hasbeen running for five minutes, 10 minutes areadded, allowing the engine to run for 15 minutes.

The additional 10 minutes are considered asecond remote vehicle start.

104

Once two remote starts, or a single remote startwith one time extension has been done, thevehicle must be started with the key.

After the key is removed from the ignition, thevehicle can be remote started again.

The vehicle cannot be remote started if the key isin the ignition, the hood is not closed, or ifthere is an emission control system malfunction.

Also, the engine will turn off during a remotevehicle start if the coolant temperature gets toohigh or if the oil pressure gets low.

Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start featureare shipped from the factory with the remotevehicle start system enabled. The system may beenabled or disabled through the DIC if yourvehicle has DIC buttons. See “REMOTE START”under DIC Vehicle Customization (With DICButtons) on page 255 for additional information. Ifyour vehicle does not have DIC buttons, seeyour dealer/retailer to enable or disable the remotevehicle start system.

Remote Start ReadyIf your vehicle does not have the remote vehiclestart feature, it will have the remote start readyfeature. This feature allows your dealer/retailer toadd the manufacturer’s remote vehicle startfeature.

See your dealer/retailer if you would like to addthe manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature toyour vehicle.

105

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crash ifthe doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.



• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out. Achild can be overcome by extremeheat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent this fromhappening.

The vehicle’s doors can be manually locked orunlocked in the following ways:

• From the outside, use the key in thedriver’s door.

• From the inside, use the lock control onthe door.

106

Power Door LocksThe power door lock switches are located on thearmrest on the front doors.

K (Unlock): Press the side of the switch withthe unlock symbol to unlock the doors.

Q (Lock): Press the side of the switch with thelock symbol to lock the doors.

Delayed LockingWhen locking the doors with the power lock switchor the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitterand a door or the liftgate is open, the doors willlock five seconds after the last door is closed. Youwill hear three chimes to signal that the delayedlocking feature is in use.

Pressing the power lock switch or the lock buttonon the RKE transmitter twice will override thedelayed locking feature and immediately lock allthe doors.

This feature will not operate if the key is in theignition.

You can program this feature using the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See DELAY DOORLOCK under DIC Vehicle Customization (With DICButtons) on page 255.

Programmable Automatic DoorLocksVehicles with an automatic lock/unlock featureenable you to program the vehicle’s powerdoor locks. You can program this feature throughthe Driver Information Center (DIC). See DICVehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons)on page 255 for more information on DICprogramming.

107

Rear Door Security LocksYour vehicle has rear door security locks. Theseprevent passengers from opening the reardoors from the inside.

The rear door securitylocks are located on theinside edge of each reardoor. You must open therear doors to accessthem. The label showinglock and unlockpositions is locatednear the lock.

To set the locks, do the following:

1. Insert the key into the security lock slot andturn it so the slot is in the horizontal position.

2. Close the door.

When you want to open a rear door when thesecurity lock is on, do the following:1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry

transmitter, if the vehicle has one, the powerdoor lock switch, or by lifting the rear doormanual lock.

2. Open the door from the outside.To cancel the rear door security lock, do thefollowing:1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and

turn it so the slot is in the vertical position.

Lockout ProtectionThis feature protects you from locking the key in thevehicle when the key is in the ignition and a frontdoor is open.

If the driver’s side power door lock switch ispressed when the driver’s door is open and the keyis in the ignition, all of the doors will lock and thenthe driver’s door will unlock.If the passenger’s side power door lock switch ispressed when the front passenger’s door is openand the key is in the ignition, all of the doors willlock and then the front passenger’s door will unlock.

Lock Label shown

108

Liftgate

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with theliftgate open because carbon monoxide(CO) gas can come into your vehicle. Youcannot see or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If you must drive with the liftgate open, orif electrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the liftgate:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or

cooling system to its highest speedwith the recirculation mode off. Thatwill force outside air into your vehicle.See Climate Control System onpage 199.



• If you have air outlets on or underthe instrument panel, open them allthe way.

• If your vehicle has a power liftgate,disable the power liftgate function.

See Power Liftgate on page 110.

If your vehicle has a power liftgate, see PowerLiftgate on page 110.

To unlock the liftgate, use the power door lockswitch or press the door unlock button onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter twice.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 100.

To open the liftgate, press the touchpad on theunderside of the liftgate handle. The vehicle mustbe in PARK (P) to open the liftgate. To closethe liftgate, use the pull cup or pull strap as an aid.

109

The liftgate has an electric latch. If the battery isdisconnected or has low voltage, the liftgatewill not open. The liftgate will resume operationwhen the battery is reconnected and charged.

If the battery is properly connected and hasadequate voltage, and the liftgate still will notfunction, your vehicle should be taken to adealership for service.

Power Liftgate

Power Liftgate Operation

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with theliftgate open because carbon monoxide(CO) gas can come into your vehicle. Youcannot see or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.



If you must drive with the liftgate open, orif electrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the liftgate:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or

cooling system to its highest speedwith the recirculation mode off. Thatwill force outside air into your vehicle.See Climate Control System onpage 199.

• If you have air outlets on or underthe instrument panel, open them allthe way.

• If your vehicle has a power liftgate,disable the power liftgate function.

See Power Liftgate on page 110.

Your vehicle may have a power liftgate. Thevehicle must be in PARK (P) to use the powerfeature.

110

The taillamps will flash and a chime will soundwhen the power liftgate is used.

{CAUTION:

You or others could be injured if caught inthe path of the power liftgate. Make surethere is no one in the way of the liftgateas it is opening and closing.

Notice: If you open the liftgate withoutchecking for overhead obstructions such as agarage door, you could damage the liftgateor the liftgate glass. Always check to makesure the area above and behind the liftgate isclear before opening it.

The power liftgate can be power opened andclosed in the following ways:• Press and hold the power liftgate button on the

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter untilthe liftgate starts moving. Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation on page 100 formore information.

• Pressing the liftgate button on the centerconsole.

• Pressing the touchpad switch on the outsideliftgate handle.

Pressing the buttons, or touchpad switch asecond time while the liftgate is moving reversesthe direction.

Power Liftgate Buttonon Center Console

111

The liftgate can also be closed by pressing thepower liftgate button next to the liftgate latch. Pressthe button a second time during liftgate operation toreverse that operation.

The power liftgate may be temporarily disabledunder extreme temperatures, or under low batteryconditions. If this occurs, the liftgate can still beoperated manually.If you shift the transmission out of PARK (P) whilethe power function is in progress, the liftgate powerfunction will continue to completion. If you shift thetransmission out of PARK (P) and accelerate before

the power liftgate latches closed, the liftgate mayreverse to the open position. Cargo could fall out ofthe vehicle. Always make sure the power liftgate isclosed and latched before you drive away.If you power open the liftgate and the liftgatesupport struts have lost pressure, the lights willflash and a chime will sound. The liftgate will stayopen temporarily, then slowly close. See yourdealer/retailer for service before using the liftgate.

Obstacle Detection FeaturesIf the liftgate encounters an obstacle during a poweropen or close cycle, a warning chime will sound andthe liftgate will automatically reverse direction to thefull closed or open position. After removing theobstruction, the power liftgate operation can beused again. If the liftgate encounters multipleobstacles on the same power cycle, the powerfunction will deactivate, and you must manuallyopen or close the liftgate. The LIFTGATE OPENwarning message in the Driver Information Center(DIC) will indicate that the liftgate is open. Afterremoving the obstructions, manually open theliftgate to the full open position or close the liftgateto the fully closed and latched position. The liftgatewill now resume normal power operation.

Power Liftgate Button Near Liftgate Latch

112

Your vehicle has pinch sensors located on theside edges of the liftgate. If an object is caughtbetween the liftgate and the body and pressesagainst this sensor, the liftgate will reversedirection and open fully. The liftgate will remainopen until it is activated again or closed manually.Do not force the liftgate open or closed duringa power cycle.

Manual Operation of Power Liftgate

To change the liftgate tomanual operation,toggle the switch on thecenter console to thedisable positionindicated by a circle.

With the power liftgate disabled and all of thedoors unlocked, the liftgate can be manuallyopened and closed.

To open the liftgate, press the touchpad on thehandle on the outside of the liftgate, and liftthe gate open. To close the liftgate, use the pullcup or pull strap to lower the liftgate and close.The liftgate latch will power close. Always close theliftgate before driving.

If the RKE button or the power close button on theliftgate is pressed while power operation isdisabled, the lights will flash three times, but theliftgate will not move.

It is not recommended that you drive with theliftgate open, however, if you must drive with theliftgate open, the liftgate should be set to manualoperation — the center console switch set to thedisable position.

The liftgate has an electric latch. If the battery isdisconnected or has low voltage, the liftgatewill not open. The liftgate will resume operationwhen the battery is reconnected and charged.

If the battery is properly connected with adequatevoltage, the switch is not disabled, and the liftgatestill will not function, your vehicle should be taken toa dealer/retailer for service.

113

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome by theextreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.

114

Power Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome fromextreme heat in warm or hot weather andsuffer permanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others could be badlyinjured or even killed. They could operatethe power windows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move. The



windows will function with the keys in theignition and they could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leave keys in avehicle with children.

When there are children in the rear seatuse the window lockout button to preventunintentional operation of the windows.

115

The power windowcontrols are located oneach of the side doors.

The driver’s door also has switches that controlthe passenger and rear windows. The powerwindows work when the ignition has been turnedto ACCESSORY or ON or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) on page 125.

Press the switch to lower the window.

Pull up on the front edge of the switch to raise thewindow.

Express-Down WindowsWindows that have the express-down featureallow the windows to be lowered without holdingthe switch. Press the window switch fully andrelease it to activate the express-down feature.The express mode can be cancelled at any time bybriefly pressing, or pulling the switch.

Express-Up WindowWindows that have the express-up feature allowthe windows to be raised all the way withoutholding the switch up. Pull the switch up fully andrelease it to activate the express-up feature.The express-up mode can be canceled at any timeby briefly pressing, or pulling the switch.

Driver’s Side shown

116

Programming the Power WindowsIf the battery one your vehicle has been recharged,disconnected, or replaced, windows with theexpress-up feature need to be reprogrammed forthis feature to work. To program the window:1. With the ignition in the ACCESSORY or RUN

positions, or when Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active, close all doors. SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP) onpage 125.

2. Press and continue to hold the window switchuntil the window is fully open.

3. Pull up and hold the window switch to close thewindow. Continue to hold it briefly after thewindow is fully closed.

4. Repeat for each window that has the expressup feature.

Anti-Pinch FeatureThe anti-pinch feature is on windows with theexpress-up feature. If an object is in the way of thewindow as it is express-closing, or in certainweather conditions like severe icing, the window willstop and open to a factory preset position. Thewindow functions normally once the obstruction isremoved.

Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): The window lockoutswitch is located with the power window switcheson the driver’s door armrest. This featureprevents the rear passenger windows fromoperating, except from the driver’s position. Pressthe switch to turn the lockout feature on or off.An indicator light will come on to show the lockoutfeature is on.

Sun VisorsPull the sun visor down to block glare. Detach thesun visor from the center mount and slide italong the rod from side-to-side to cover the driveror passenger side of the front window. Swingthe sun visor to the side to cover the side window.It can be moved along the rod from side-to-sidein this position also.

Lighted Visor Vanity MirrorYour vehicle has lighted visor vanity mirrors onboth the driver’s and passenger’s sun visors. Pullthe sun visor down and lift the mirror cover toturn the lamps on.

117

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothing weput on it can make it impossible to steal.

Content Theft-DeterrentYour vehicle may have a content theft-deterrentalarm system.

To activate the theft-deterrent system, do one ofthe following:

• Press the lock button on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter when any door is open.The security light should come on and flash.When the door is closed, the security light willstop flashing and stay on solid and then go offafter approximately 30 seconds. The contenttheft deterrent alarm is not armed until thesecurity light goes off.If the delayed locking feature is active, thealarm will not be activated until all doors areclosed and the security light goes off.

• Press the lock button on the RKE transmitterwhen the driver door is closed.The security light will come on solid forapproximately 30 seconds and then go off. Thecontent theft deterrent alarm is not armed untilthe security light goes off.

118

If a door is opened without using the key in thedriver’s door cylinder or the RKE transmitter, aten second pre-alarm will occur. The horn will chirpand the lights will flash. If the key is not placed inthe ignition and turned to START or the door is notunlocked by pressing the unlock button on the RKEtransmitter during the ten second pre-alarm, thealarm will go off. Your vehicle’s headlamps will flashand the horn will sound for about two minutes, thenwill turn off to save the battery power.

The theft-deterrent system will not activate if youlock the doors with a key or the manual doorlock. It activates only if you use the RKEtransmitter or the power door lock switch from anopen door. You should also remember thatyou can start your vehicle with the correct ignitionkey if the alarm has been set off.

Here is how to avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:

• If you do not want to activate thetheft-deterrent system, the vehicle should belocked with the door key after the doorsare closed.

• Always unlock a door with the RKE transmitter.Unlocking a door any other way will set off thealarm if the system has been armed.

If you set off the alarm by accident, turn off thealarm by pressing unlock on the RKE transmitter orby placing the key in the ignition and turning itto START.

119

Testing the AlarmTo test the alarm:

1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’swindow and open the driver’s door.

2. Activate the system by locking the doors withthe RKE transmitter.

3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and waitfor the security light to go out.

4. Then reach in through the window, unlock thedoor with the manual door lock and open thedoor. This should set off the alarm.

If the alarm does not sound when it should, but thevehicle’s headlamps flash, check to see if the hornworks. The horn fuse may be blown. To replace thefuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 490.If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle’sheadlamps do not flash, see your dealer/retailer forservice.

PASS-Key® III+The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with IndustryCanada.


1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.




120

Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequencytransponder in the key that matches a decoder inyour vehicle.

PASS-Key® III+ OperationYour vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (PersonalizedAutomotive Security System) theft-deterrentsystem. PASS-Key® III+ is a passivetheft-deterrent system. This means you do nothave to do anything special to arm or disarm thesystem. It works when you transition the keyto ON, ACCESSORY or START from the OFFposition.

When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses thatsomeone is using the wrong key, it prevents thevehicle from starting. Anyone using atrial-and-error method to start the vehicle will bediscouraged because of the high number ofelectrical key codes.

If the engine does not start and the security lighton the instrument panel comes on when tryingto start the vehicle, the key may have a damagedtransponder. Turn the ignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, and the keyappears to be undamaged, try another ignitionkey. At this time, you may also want to check thefuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 490. If the engine still does not start with theother key, your vehicle needs service. If yourvehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. Seeyour dealer/retailer who can service thePASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made. In anemergency, contact Roadside Assistance.

It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder tolearn the transponder value of a new orreplacement key. Up to nine additional keys may beprogrammed for the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programming additional keys only.If all the currently programmed keys are lost or donot operate, you must see your dealer/retailer or alocksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to havekeys made and programmed to the system.

121

See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who canservice PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank thatis cut exactly as the ignition key that operatesthe system.

To program the new additional key do thefollowing:

1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stampedon it.

2. Insert the original, already programmed, keyin the ignition and start the engine. If theengine will not start, see your dealer/retailerfor service.

3. After the engine has started, turn the key toOFF, and remove the key.

4. Insert the new key to be programmed andturn it to the ON position within five secondsof removing the original key.

5. The security light will turn off once the keyhas been programmed.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keysare to be programmed.

If you are driving and the security light comes onand stays on, you may be able to restart yourengine. Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however,may not be working properly and must be servicedby your dealer/retailer.

If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,see your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who canservice PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.

The SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEMmessage displays on the Driver Information Center(DIC) when there is a problem with thetheft-deterrent system. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 244 for additional information.

Do not leave the key or device that disarms ordeactivates the theft deterrent system in thevehicle.

122

Starting and Operating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-In

Notice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelines:• If you have all-wheel drive, keep your

speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less forthe first 500 miles (805 km).

• Do not drive at any one constant speed,fast or slow, for the first 500 miles(805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts.Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow,the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During this timethe new brake linings are not yet brokenin. Hard stops with new linings canmean premature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow this breaking-inguideline every time you get new brakelinings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. SeeTowing a Trailer on page 371 for thetrailer towing capabilities of your vehicleand more information.

Following break-in, engine speed and load canbe gradually increased.

123

Ignition PositionsWith the key in the ignition, you can turn it to fourdifferent positions.

A (OFF): This is the only position in which youcan remove the key. This position locks the ignitionand transmission.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key from theignition switch could cause damage orbreak the key. Use the correct key and turn thekey only with your hand. Make sure the keyis all the way in. If none of this works,then your vehicle needs service.

B (ACCESSORY): This position allows you to usethings like the radio and the windshield wiperswhile the engine is off. This position will also allowyou to turn off the engine. Use ACCESSORY ifyou must have your vehicle in motion whilethe engine is off, for example, if your vehicle isbeing pushed or towed.

C (ON): This is the position that the switchreturns to after you start your engine and releasethe key. The switch stays in ON when theengine is running. But even when the engine isnot running, you can use ON to operate yourelectrical power accessories, and to display someinstrument panel warning lights.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ACCESSORY or ON position with theengine off. You may not be able to start yourvehicle if the battery is allowed to drain foran extended period of time.

D (START): This position starts the engine. Whenthe engine starts, release the key. The ignitionswitch will return to ON for normal driving.

124

Key In the IgnitionNever leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as itis an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If youleave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,a chime will sound when you open the driver’sdoor. Always remember to remove your key fromthe ignition and take it with you. This will lockyour ignition and transmission. Also, alwaysremember to lock the doors.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ignition while your vehicle is parked.You may not be able to start your vehicle after ithas been parked for an extended period of time.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)These vehicle accessories can be used for up to10 minutes after the ignition key is turned off:

• Audio System

• Power Windows

• Sunroof (if equipped)

Power to the windows and sunroof will work up to10 minutes or until a door is opened.

The radio continues to work for 10 minutes or untilthe driver’s door is opened.

For an additional 10 minutes of operation, close allthe doors and turn the key to ON and then backto OFF.

All these features will work when the key is in theON or ACCESSORY positions.

125

Starting the EnginePlace the transmission in the proper gear.

Move your shift lever to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not startin any other position – this is a safety feature.To restart when you are already moving, useNEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if yourvehicle is moving. If you do, you coulddamage the transmission. Shift to PARK (P)only when your vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn

the ignition key to START. When the enginestarts, let go of the key. The idle speed will godown as your engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediately after starting it.Operate the engine and transmission gently toallow the oil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.

Your vehicle has a Computer-ControlledCranking System. This feature assistsin starting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition key is turned to theSTART position, and then released whenthe engine begins cranking, the enginewill continue cranking for a few seconds oruntil the vehicle starts. If the engine does notstart and the key is held in START formany seconds, cranking will be stopped after15 seconds to prevent cranking motordamage. To prevent gear damage, this systemalso prevents cranking if the engine isalready running. Engine cranking can bestopped by turning the ignition switch to theACCESSORY or OFF position.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periodsof time, by returning the key to the STARTposition immediately after cranking has ended,can overheat and damage the crankingmotor, and drain the battery. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allowthe cranking motor to cool down.

126

2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or−18°C), it could be flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedal allthe way to the floor and holding it there asyou hold the key in START for up to amaximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key and accelerator. Ifthe vehicle starts briefly but then stops again,do the same thing. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do not race theengine immediately after starting it. Operatethe engine and transmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates all moving parts.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check withyour dealer/retailer. If you do not, your enginemight not perform properly. Any resultingdamage would not be covered by yourvehicle’s warranty.

Engine Coolant HeaterYour vehicle may have an engine coolant heater.

In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder,the engine coolant heater can help. You will geteasier starting and better fuel economy duringengine warm-up.

Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in aminimum of four hours prior to starting yourvehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use ofthe coolant heater is not required. Your vehiclemay also have an internal thermostat in theplug end of the cord. This will prevent operation ofthe engine coolant heater when the temperatureis at or above 0°F (−18°C) as noted on the cord.

127

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electricalcord. The cord is located on the driver’sside of the engine compartment, it is routedaround the windshield washer fluid reservoir.

3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-voltAC outlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plug the cordinto a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will notreach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you donot, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil you have, andsome other things. Instead of trying to listeverything here, we ask that you contact yourdealer/retailer in the area where you will be parkingyour vehicle. The dealer/retailer can give youthe best advice for that particular area.

128

Automatic Transmission OperationYour vehicle has an electronic shift positionindicator within the instrument panel cluster.

When using the Electronic Range Select Mode anumber will display next to the L, indicatingthe current gear that has been selected.

See Electronic Range Select mode in this sectionfor more information.

Your automatic transmission has a shift leverlocated on the console between the seats.

PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. Itis the best position to use when you start yourengine because your vehicle cannot move easily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brakeand move the shift lever to PARK (P). SeeShifting Into Park (P) on page 135. If youare pulling a trailer, see Towing a Traileron page 371.

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)before starting the engine. Your vehicle has anautomatic transmission shift lock control system.

129

You must fully apply your regular brake first andthen press the shift lever button before youcan shift from PARK (P) when the ignition key is inON. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), easepressure on the shift lever, then push theshift lever all the way into PARK (P) as youmaintain brake application. Then press the shiftlever button and move the shift lever into anothergear. See Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 137.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damage thetransmission. The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) onlyafter your vehicle is stopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out ofsnow, ice or sand without damaging yourtransmission, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 360.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle isbeing towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while yourengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe brake pedal, your vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is running athigh speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) with the engine running at highspeed may damage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Be sure the engine is not running at highspeed when shifting your vehicle.

130

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. Itprovides the best fuel economy for your vehicle. Ifyou need more power for passing, and you are:

• Going less than 35 mph (56 km/h), pushyour accelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, pushthe accelerator all the way down.

Notice: If your vehicle seems to accelerateslowly or not shift gears when you go faster,and you continue to drive your vehicle thatway, you could damage the transmission. Haveyour vehicle serviced right away. You candrive in LOW (L) when you are driving less than35 mph (56 km/h) and DRIVE (D) for higherspeeds until then.

LOW (L): This position gives you access to gearranges. This provides more engine braking butlower fuel economy than DRIVE (D). You can useit on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.

Electronic Range Select ModeElectronic Range Selector (ERS) mode allows youto choose the top-gear limit of the vehicle’stransmission and the vehicle’s speed while drivingdown hill or towing a trailer.

To use this feature, do the following:

1. Move the shift lever to LOW (L).2. Press the plus/minus

button located on theshift lever, toincrease or decreasethe gear rangeavailable basedupon your currentdriving conditionsand needs.

131

When you shift from DRIVE (D) to LOW (L), thetransmission will shift to a pre-determinedlower gear range. The highest gear available forthis pre-determined range is displayed next tothe L in the DIC. See Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 232 and DIC Operation andDisplays (With DIC Buttons) on page 233 or DICOperation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons)on page 239 for more information. The numberdisplayed in the DIC is the highest gear thatthe transmission will be allowed to operate in.However, your vehicle can automatically shift tolower gears as required by various drivingconditions. This means that all gears below thatnumber are available. For example, whenFOURTH (4) is shown next to the L, FIRST (1)through FOURTH (4) gears are automaticallyshifted by the vehicle. You cannot shift intoFIFTH (5) until the plus (+) button is used or youshift back into DRIVE (D) mode.

While in LOW (L), the transmission will preventshifting to a lower gear range if the engine speedis too high for the gear range you are trying toselect. You have a brief period of time to slow thevehicle speed. If vehicle speed is not reducedwithin the timeframe allowed, the lower gear rangeattempted will not be available. The highestpossible gear that is allowed for that engine speedwill display next to the L in the DIC. Try againto slow the vehicle speed and press the minus (−)button to the desired lower gear range.

Automatic Engine Grade braking is not availablewhen the ERS is active. It is available inDRIVE (D) for both normal and Tow/Haul mode.While using the ERS, cruise control and thetow/haul mode can be used. See Tow/Haul Modeon page 133 for more information.

132

Tow/Haul ModeYour vehicle may have a Tow/Haul mode.

The button to turn it onor off is located oninstrument panel underthe climate controls.

Push the button to turn it on, push it again todeactivate the system. You can use this feature toassist when towing or hauling a heavy load.

When Tow/Haul is activated the Tow/Haul symbolwill come on the instrument panel cluster. SeeTow/Haul Mode under Towing a Trailer onpage 371 for more information.

Automatic Engine Grade BrakingAutomatic Engine Grade Braking assists whendriving on a downhill grade. It maintains thevehicle’s speed by automatically implementing ashift schedule that uses the engine and thetransmission to slow the vehicle. This reduceswear on the brakes system and increases controlof the vehicle. The system constantly monitorsthe vehicle’s speed, acceleration, throttle position,and whether the brake pedal is being pressed,and determines when to keep the current vehiclespeed or to slow down. The system will thenautomatically command downshifts that reducesthe vehicle’s speed, until the brake pedal isno longer being pressed. This indicates the desiredvehicle speed has been reached.

While in the Electronic Range Select (ERS) mode,grade braking is deactivated, allowing the driverto select a range and limiting the highest gearavailable. Grade braking is available for normaldriving and in Tow/Haul mode.

See Automatic Transmission Operation onpage 129.

133

Parking Brake

To set the parkingbrake, push down theparking brake pedaldown with your left foot.

If the ignition is on, the brake system warning lightwill come on. See Brake System Warning Lighton page 222.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Verify that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light isoff before driving.

To release the parking brake, hold the regularbrake pedal down with your right foot. Push downmomentarily on the parking brake pedal withyour left foot until you feel the pedal release, thenslowly pull your foot up off the park brakepedal. If the parking brake is not released whenyou begin to drive, the brake system warning lightwill be on and a chime will sound warning youthat the parking brake is still on.

If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill,see Towing a Trailer on page 371.

134

Shifting Into Park (P)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,use the steps that follow. If you arepulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 371.

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right footand set the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holdingin the button on the shift lever and pushingthe shift lever all the way toward the frontof the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If youcan leave your vehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

135

Leaving Your Vehicle With the EngineRunning

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehicle couldmove suddenly if the shift lever is not fullyin PARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. And, if you leave the vehicle with theengine running, it could overheat and evencatch fire. You or others could be injured.Do not leave your vehicle with the enginerunning.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) andyour parking brake is firmly set before you leave it.After you have moved the shift lever into PARK (P),hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if youcan move the shift lever away from PARK (P)without first pushing the button.

If you can, it means that the shift lever was notfully locked in PARK (P).

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you do not shift yourtransmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight ofthe vehicle may put too much force on the parkingpawl in the transmission. You may find it difficult topull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called“torque lock.” To prevent torque lock, set theparking brake and then shift into PARK (P) properlybefore you leave the driver’s seat. To find out how,see Shifting Into Park (P) on page 135.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift leverout of PARK (P) before you release the parkingbrake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to haveanother vehicle push your vehicle a little uphillto take some of the pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission, then you will be able to pullthe shift lever out of PARK (P).

136

Shifting Out of Park (P)Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shiftlock control system. You have to apply yourregular brake first and then press the shift leverbutton before you can shift from PARK (P).See Automatic Transmission Operation onpage 129.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressureon the shift lever and push the shift lever all theway into PARK (P) as you maintain brakeapplication. Then press the shift lever button andmove the shift lever into the gear you wish.

Parking Over Things That Burn

{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.

137

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• The exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.



• Your vehicle was damaged whendriving over high points on the roador over road debris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or the exhaust system

has been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

138

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 138.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan is atthe highest setting. One place this canhappen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER park ina garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 356.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leaveyour vehicle when the engine is runningunless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake and movethe shift lever to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 135.

If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 371.

139

Mirrors

Manual Rearview Mirror withOnStar®

When you are sitting in a comfortable drivingposition, adjust the mirror so you can see clearlybehind your vehicle. Hold the mirror in thecenter to move it up or down and side to side. Theday/night adjustment allows you to adjust themirror to avoid glare from the lamps behind you.Move the lever to the right for nighttime use and tothe left for daytime use.

There may also be three OnStar® buttons locatedat the bottom of the mirror face. See OnStar®

System on page 145 for more information.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar® and CompassYour vehicle may have an automatic-dimmingrearview mirror with a compass.

There may be three additional buttons for theOnStar® system. See your dealer/retailer for moreinformation on the system and how to subscribeto OnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 145 formore information about the services OnStar®

provides.

O (On/Off): This is the on/off button.

Automatic Dimming Mirror OperationThe automatic dimming mirror comes on each timethe ignition is turned to start. To turn theautomatic dimming feature off or back on, pressthe on/off button. The indicator light on the mirror islit when the automatic dimming feature is on.

Compass OperationPress the on/off button once to turn the compasson or off.

There is a compass display in the window in theupper right corner of the mirror face.

Compass CalibrationPress and hold the on/off button to activate thecompass calibration mode. CAL will be displayedin the compass window on the mirror.

140

The compass can be calibrated by driving thevehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until thedisplay reads a direction.

If after a few seconds the display does not show acompass direction, (N for North for example),there may be a strong magnetic field interferingwith the compass. Such interference may becaused by a magnetic antenna mount, note padholder, or similar object. If the letter C or CALappears in the compass window, the compass mayneed to be reset or calibrated.

Compass VarianceCompass variance is the difference betweenearth’s magnetic north and true geographic north.The mirror is set to zone eight upon leavingthe factory. It will be necessary to adjust thecompass to compensate for compass variance ifyou live outside zone eight. Under certaincircumstances, such as during a long distancecross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust forcompass variance. If not adjusted to accountfor compass variance, your compass could givefalse readings.

To adjust for compass variance:

1. Find your current location and variance zonenumber on the following zone map.

2. Press and hold the on/off button until the zonenumber is displayed. The number shown isthe current zone number.

141

3. Scroll through the zone numbers that appearin the window on the mirror by pressing theon/off button. Once you find your zonenumber, release the button. After aboutfour seconds, the mirror will return to thecompass display, and the new zone numberwill be set. If C or CAL appears in thecompass window, the compass may needcalibration. See “Compass Calibration” listedpreviously.

Outside Power Mirrors

If your vehicle isequipped with outsidepower mirrors, thecontrols are located onthe driver’s doorarmrest.

Press (A) to select the driver’s side mirror or (B) toselect the passenger’s side mirror. Press either (A)or (B) again to deselect the mirror.

To adjust each mirror, press one of the fourarrows located on the control pad to move themirror in the direction you want it to go. Adjusteach outside mirror so that you can see a little ofyour vehicle, and the area behind your vehicle.See Memory Seat and Mirrors on page 13 for moreinformation.

The mirrors can be manually folded inward toprevent damage when going through an automaticcar wash. To fold, push the mirror toward thevehicle. To return the mirror to its original position,push outward. Be sure to return both mirrors totheir original unfolded position before driving.

The use of hood-mounted air deflectors andadd-on convex mirror attachments may adverselyaffect mirror performance.

Turn Signal IndicatorYour vehicle may have a turn signal indicator onthe mirror. An arrow on the mirror will flash inthe direction of the turn or lane change.

142

Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors

If your vehicle isequipped with outsidepower foldaway mirrors,the controls arelocated on the driver’sdoor armrest.

• Press (A) to select the driver’s side mirror. Thenpress the arrows located on the four-waycontrol pad to adjust the mirror. Press (A) againto deselect the mirror.

• Press (B) to select the passenger’s side mirror.Then press the arrows located on the four-waycontrol pad to adjust the mirror. Press (B) againto deselect the mirror.

• Press (C), to fold the mirrors out to the drivingposition.

• Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to the foldedposition.

If the mirrors are accidentally folded/unfoldedmanually, they may shake or flutter at normaldriving speeds and may not stay in the unfoldedposition. If this happens, you will need to reset themirrors. See “Resetting the Power FoldawayMirrors” next.

Resetting the Power Foldaway MirrorsYou will need to reset the power foldaway mirrorsif the following occurs:

• The mirrors are accidentally obstructed whilefolding.

• They are accidentally manuallyfolded/unfolded.

• The mirrors will not stay in the unfoldedposition.

• The mirrors shake and flutter at normal drivingspeeds.

To reset the power foldaway mirrors, fold andunfold them one time using the mirror controls.This will reset them to their normal position.

This mirror has the following features.

143

Automatic DimmingThe driver’s outside mirror will adjust for the glareof the headlamps behind you. See AutomaticDimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar® andCompass on page 140.

Curb View AssistIf your vehicle has the memory package, theoutside mirrors are able to perform the curb viewassist mirror function. This feature may beuseful in allowing the driver to view the curb whenparallel parking. This feature will cause thepassenger’s and/or driver’s mirror to tilt to apreselected position when the vehicle is inREVERSE (R).

The passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror will returnto its original position when the vehicle isshifted out of REVERSE (R), or the ignition isturned off or to LOCK.

This feature can be turned on or off through theDriver Information Center (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) on page 232 and MemorySeat and Mirrors on page 13 for more information.

Turn Signal IndicatorYour vehicle may have a turn signal indicator onthe mirror. An arrow on the mirror will flash inthe direction of the turn or lane change.

Outside Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away thanthey really are. If you cut too sharply intothe right lane, you could hit a vehicle onyour right. Check your inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger’s side mirror may have convexglass. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so morecan be seen from the driver’s seat.

144

Outside Heated MirrorsPress the rear window defogger button, located onthe climate control panel, to also turn the outsideheated mirrors on or off. The mirrors will heat tohelp clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror.

See “Rear Window Defogger” under DualAutomatic Climate Control System on page 203for more information.

OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies andlive advisors to provide you with a wide rangeof safety, security, information, and convenienceservices. If your airbags deploy, the system isdesigned to make an automatic call to OnStar®

Emergency advisors who can request emergencyservices be sent to your location. If you lock

your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal tounlock your doors. If you need roadsideassistance, press the OnStar® button and theycan contact Roadside Service for you.

OnStar® service is provided to you subject to theOnStar® Terms and Conditions. You maycancel your OnStar® service at any time bycontacting OnStar® as provided below. A completeOnStar® Owners Guide and the OnStar® Termsand Conditions are included in the vehicle’sOnStar® Subscriber glove box literature. For moreinformation, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca,contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, orpress the OnStar® button to speak with anOnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

Not all OnStar® features are available on allvehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped toprovide the services described below, or for afull description of OnStar® services and systemlimitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in yourglove box or visit onstar.com.

145

OnStar® ServicesFor new vehicles with OnStar®, the Safe & SoundPlan, or the Directions & Connections® Plan isincluded for one year from the date of purchase.You can extend this plan beyond the first year,or upgrade to the Directions & Connections® Plan.For more information, press the OnStar® buttonto speak with an advisor. Some OnStar® services(such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen VehicleLocation Assistance) may not be availableuntil you register with OnStar®.

Available Services with Safe &Sound® Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification(AACN) (If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics

• GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics

• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with30 complimentary minutes

• OnStar® Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)

Available Services included with Directions& Connections® Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered orOnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

146

OnStar® Hands-Free CallingOnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligibleOnStar® subscribers to make and receive callsusing voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fullyintegrated into the vehicle, and can be usedwith OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages.Hands-Free Calling may also be linked to aVerizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a BellMobility service plan in Canada, depending oneligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar®

Owners Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visitwww.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak withan OnStar® advisor by pressing the OnStar®

button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

OnStar® Virtual AdvisorOnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes toaccess location-based weather, local traffic reports,and stock quotes. By pressing the phone buttonand giving a few simple voice commands, you canbrowse through the various topics. See the OnStar®

Owners Guide for more information (Only availablein the continental U.S.).

OnStar® Steering Wheel ControlsYour vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button thatcan be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-FreeCalling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 325 for more information.

On some vehicles, you may have to hold thebutton for a few seconds and give the command“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling feature.

On some vehicles, the mute button can be used todial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dialphone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’sGuide for more information.

147

How OnStar® Service WorksIn order to provide you with OnStar® services, yourvehicle’s OnStar® system has the capability ofrecording and transmitting vehicle information. Thisinformation is automatically sent to an OnStar® CallCenter at the time of an OnStar® button press,Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACNsystem deploys. The vehicle information usuallyincludes your GPS location and, in the event of acrash, additional information regarding the accidentthat your vehicle has been involved in (e.g. thedirection from which your vehicle was hit). Whenyou use the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling, your vehicle also sendsOnStar® your GPS location so that we can provideyou with location-based services.OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicle isin a place where OnStar® has an agreement with awireless service provider for service in that area.OnStar® service also cannot work unless you are ina place where the wireless service providerOnStar® has hired for that area has coverage,network capacity and reception when the service isneeded, and technology that is compatible with the

OnStar® service. Not all services are availableeverywhere, particularly in remote or enclosedareas, or at all times.OnStar® service that involves location informationabout your vehicle cannot work unless GPSsatellite signals are unobstructed and available inthat place as well.Your vehicle must have a working electrical system(including adequate battery power) for the OnStar®

equipment to operate. There are other problemsOnStar® cannot control that may prevent OnStar®

from providing OnStar® service to you at anyparticular time or place. Some examples aredamage to important parts of your vehicle in anaccident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather orwireless phone network congestion.

Your ResponsibilityYou may need to increase the volume of your radioto hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light next to theOnStar® buttons is red, this means that your systemis not functioning properly and should be checkedby your dealer/retailer. If the light appears clear (nolight is appearing), your OnStar® subscription hasexpired. You can always press the OnStar® buttonto confirm that your OnStar® equipment is active.

148

Universal Home RemoteSystem

System IdentificationYour vehicle may have a Universal Home RemoteSystem.

Determine which Universal Home Remote yourvehicle has and then read the pages following forinstructions on programming your specificsystem.

If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode(LED) indicator light above the Universal HomeRemote buttons, follow the instructions underUniversal Home Remote System Operation (WithOne Triangular LED).

If there are three round LED indicator lights abovethe Universal Home Remote buttons, follow theinstructions under Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED).

For help or information on the Universal HomeRemote System, call the customer assistancephone number under Customer Assistance Officeson page 522.

149

Universal Home Remote SystemThe Universal Home Remote System provides away to replace up to three hand-heldRadio-Frequency (RF) transmitters used toactivate devices such as garage door openers,security systems, and home lighting.








Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With One Triangular LED)

If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode(LED) indicator light above the Universal HomeRemote buttons, follow the instructions below.

Do not use the Universal Home Remote with anygarage door opener that does not have the stopand reverse feature. This includes any garage dooropener model manufactured before April 1, 1982. Ifyou have a newer garage door opener with rollingcodes, please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 tocomplete the programming of your Universal HomeRemote Transmitter.

150

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the Universal Home Remote. Becauseof the steps involved, it may be helpful to haveanother person available to assist you in theprogramming steps

Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use inother vehicles as well as for future Universal HomeRemote programming. It is also recommended thatupon the sale of the vehicle, the programmedUniversal Home Remote buttons should be erasedfor security purposes. See “Erasing UniversalHome Remote Buttons” later in section.

When programming a garage door, it is advised topark outside of the garage. Be sure that peopleand objects are clear of the garage door orgate operator you are programming.

It is recommended that a new battery be installedin your hand-held transmitter for quicker andmore accurate transmission of the radio-frequencysignal.

Programming the Universal HomeRemote SystemFollow these steps to program up to threedevices:

1. Press and hold down the two outsideUniversal Home Remote buttons, releasingonly when the Universal Home Remoteindicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold down the buttons forlonger than 30 seconds and do not repeatthis step to program a second and/orthird hand-held transmitter to the remainingtwo Universal Home Remote buttons.

2. Hold the end of your hand-held transmitterabout 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away fromthe Universal Home Remote buttonswhile keeping the indicator light in view.

3. At the same time, press and hold both thedesired Universal Home Remote button andthe hand-held transmitter button. Do notrelease the buttons until Step 4 has beencompleted.

151

Some entry gates and garage door openersmay require you to substitute Step 3 withthe procedure noted in “Gate Operator andCanadian Programming” later in this section.

4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first andthen rapidly after Universal Home Remotesuccessfully receives the frequency signal fromthe hand-held transmitter. Release bothbuttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trained UniversalHome Remote button and observe theindicator light.If the indicator light stays on continuously,programming is complete and your deviceshould activate when the Universal HomeRemote button is pressed and released.To program the remaining two Universal HomeRemote buttons, begin with Step 2 under“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Donot repeat Step 1 as this will erase all ofthe programmed channels.If the indicator light blinks rapidly fortwo seconds and then turns to a constant light,continue with Steps 6 through 8 following tocomplete the programming of a rolling-codedevice, most commonly, a garage door opener.

6. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. This can usually befound where the hanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unit.

7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or“Smart” button. The name and color ofthe button may vary by manufacturer.You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.

8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold theprogrammed Universal Home Remote buttonfor two seconds, then release it. Immediatelypress and hold the same button a second timefor two seconds, then release it. Immediately,press and hold the same button a third time fortwo seconds, then release.The Universal Home Remote should nowactivate the rolling-code device.

To program the remaining two Universal HomeRemote buttons, begin with Step 2 of“Programming Universal Home Remote.” You donot want to repeat Step 1, as this will eraseall previous programming from the Universal HomeRemote buttons.

152

Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require transmittersignals to time out or quit after several secondsof transmission. This may not be long enoughfor Universal Home Remote to pick up the signalduring programming. Similarly, some U.S. gateoperators are manufactured to time out inthe same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you are having difficultyprogramming a gate operator or garage dooropener by using the “Programming UniversalHome Remote” procedures, regardless of whereyou live, replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” with the following:

Continue to press and hold the Universal HomeRemote button while you press and release everytwo seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitterbutton until the frequency signal has beensuccessfully accepted by the Universal HomeRemote. The Universal Home Remote indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.Proceed with Step 4 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” to complete.

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate Universal HomeRemote button for at least half of a second.The indicator light will come on while the signal isbeing transmitted.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsTo erase programming from the three UniversalHome Remote buttons do the following:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttonsuntil the indicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold the two outsidebuttons for longer than 30 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

The Universal Home Remote is now in the training(learning) mode and can be programmed at anytime beginning with Step 2 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” shown earlier inthis section.

Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they canbe reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming aSingle Universal Home Remote Button” followingthis section.

153

Reprogramming a Single UniversalHome Remote ButtonTo program a device to Universal Home Remoteusing a Universal Home Remote buttonpreviously trained, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired Universal HomeRemote button. Do not release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. While still holding the UniversalHome Remote button, proceed with Step2 under “Programming Universal HomeRemote” shown earlier in this section.


Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal HomeRemote System. If there are three round LightEmitting Diode (LED) indicator lights abovethe Universal Home Remote buttons, follow theinstructions below.

This system provides a way to replace up to threeremote control transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home automation devices.

Do not use this system with any garage dooropener that does not have the stop and reversefeature. This includes any garage door openermodel manufactured before April 1, 1982.

154

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the transmitter. Because of the stepsinvolved, it may be helpful to have another personavailable to assist you in programming thetransmitter.

Be sure to keep the original remote controltransmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as, forfuture programming. You only need the originalremote control transmitter for Fixed Codeprogramming. It is also recommended that uponthe sale or lease termination of the vehicle,the programmed buttons should be erased forsecurity purposes. See “Erasing Universal HomeRemote Buttons” later in this section.

When programming a garage door, it is advised topark outside of the garage. Be sure that peopleand objects are clear of the garage door orsecurity device you are programming.

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Rolling CodeMost garage door openers sold after 1996 areRolling Code units.

Programming a garage door opener involvestime-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedurebefore you begin. If you do not follow theseactions, the device will time out and you will haveto repeat the procedure.

Follow these steps to program up to three devices:

1. From inside the vehicle, press the twooutside buttons at the same time for one totwo seconds, and immediately release them.

155

2. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. It can usually be foundwhere the hanging antenna wire is attached tothe motor-head unit and may be a coloredbutton. Press this button. After you press thisbutton, you will have 30 seconds to completethe following steps.

3. Immediately return to your vehicle. Press andhold the universal home remote button thatyou would like to use to control the garagedoor until the garage door moves. Theindicator light, above the selected button,should slowly blink. You may need to hold thebutton from five to 20 seconds.

4. Immediately, within one second, release thebutton when the garage door moves. Theindicator light will blink rapidly untilprogramming is complete.

5. Press and release the same button again.The garage door should move, confirmingthat programming is successful and complete.

To program another Rolling Code device such asan additional garage door opener, a securitydevice, or home automation device, repeatSteps 1-5, choosing a different function button inStep 3 than what you used for the garage dooropener.

If these instructions do not work, you probablyhave a Fixed Code garage door opener. Follow theProgramming instructions below for a FixedCode garage door opener.

156

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Fixed CodeMost garage door openers sold before 1996 areFixed Code units.

Programming a garage door opener involvestime-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedurebefore you begin. If you do not follow theseactions, the device will time out and you will haveto repeat the procedure.

Follow these steps to program up to threedevices:

1. To verify if you have a Fixed Code garagedoor opener, remove the battery cover onyour hand held transmitter supplied bythe manufacturer of your garage door openermotor. If you see a row of dip switchessimilar to the graphic above, you have a FixedCode garage door opener. If you do not seea row of dip switches, return to the previoussection for Programming Universal HomeRemote – Rolling Code.

157

Your panel of switches may not appearexactly as they do in the examples above, butthey should be similar.The switch positions on your hand-heldtransmitter may be labeled, as follows:

• A switch in the up position may be labeledas “Up,” “+,” or “On.”

• A switch in the down position may belabeled as “Down,” “−,” or “Off.”

• A switch in the middle position may belabeled as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”

Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions

158

2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settingsfrom left to right as follows:

• When a switch is in the up position,write “Left.”

• When a switch is in the down position, write“Right.”

• If a switch is set between the up and downposition, write “Middle.”The switch settings that you wrote down inStep 2 will now become the button strokesyou enter into the Universal Home Remote inStep 4. Be sure to enter the switch settingsthat you wrote down in Step 2, in order fromleft to right, into the Universal Home Remote,when completing Step 4.

3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly pressall three buttons at the same time for aboutthree seconds. Release the buttons to putthe Universal Home Remote intoprogramming mode.

4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter eachswitch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle’sUniversal Home Remote. You will have twoand one-half minutes to complete Step 4. Nowpress one button on the Universal HomeRemote for each switch setting as follows:• If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in the

vehicle.• If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in

the vehicle.

• If you wrote “Middle,” press the middlebutton in the vehicle.

159

5. After entering all of the switch positions,again, firmly press and release all threebuttons at the same time. The indicator lightswill turn on.

6. Press and hold the button you would like to useto control the garage door until the garage doormoves. The indicator light above the selectedbutton should slowly blink. You may need tohold the button from five to 55 seconds.

7. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.

8. Press and release the same button again.The garage door should move, confirmingthat programming is successful and complete.

To program another Fixed Code device such as anadditional garage door opener, a security device,or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8,choosing a different button in Step 6 than what youused for the garage door opener.

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate button for at leasthalf of a second. The indicator light will comeon while the signal is being transmitted.

Reprogramming Universal HomeRemote ButtonsYou can reprogram any of the three buttons byrepeating the instructions.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsYou should erase the programmed buttons whenyou sell or terminate your lease.

To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code onthe Universal Home Remote device, do thefollowing:

1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at thesame time for approximately 20 seconds, untilthe indicator lights, located directly abovethe buttons, begin to blink rapidly.

2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink,release both buttons. The codes from allbuttons will be erased.


160

Storage Areas

Glove BoxTo open, lift the handle up. Use the key to lockand unlock.

Cupholder(s)There are two cupholders, with removable liners,located in front of the center console. Thereare cupholders located in the second row seatarmrest. To access, pull the armrest down. Thereare additional cupholders located on each sideof the third row seat and in each door. There arecupholders located behind the center console.To access, pull down on the handle.

Instrument Panel Storage AreaYour vehicle has an instrument panel storage arealocated above the radio. To open the cover,press the button.

Center Console Storage Area

The armrest on the center console can slideforwards and backwards by holding up the leverlocated on the front of it. To open the armreststorage area, press the button located on the frontof the armrest. There is additional storageunder the armrest. Move the armrest all the wayto the rear position. The tray can be removedfor additional storage.

161

Floor MatsThere is a grommet in the driver side floor matthat attaches to a hook on the floor of the vehicle.This allows the mat to remain in position underyour feet and out of reach of the accelerator andbrake pedal. To remove the floor mat, pull themat towards the rear of the vehicle until thegrommet can be removed from the hook.

Make sure that the driver side floor mat is properlyplaced on the floor so that it does not block themovement of the accelerator and brake pedal.

Luggage Carrier

{CAUTION:

If you try to carry something on top ofyour vehicle that is longer or wider thanthe luggage carrier — like paneling,plywood, a mattress and so forth — thewind can catch it as you drive along. Thiscan cause you to lose control. What youare carrying could be violently torn off,and this could cause you or other driversto have a collision, and of course damageyour vehicle. You may be able to carrysomething like this inside. But, nevercarry something longer or wider than theluggage carrier on top of your vehicle.

162

If you have the luggage carrier, you can loadthings on top of your vehicle. Crossrails are notstandard on this vehicle and must be purchased atyour dealer/retailer.

Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrierthat weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg) or hangsover the rear or sides of the vehicle maydamage your vehicle. Load cargo so that it restsas far forward as possible and against the siderails, making sure to fasten it securely.

Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacitywhen loading your vehicle. For more informationon vehicle capacity and loading, see Loading YourVehicle on page 361.

To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you aredriving, check to make sure the cargo is stillsecurely fastened.

Rear Seat ArmrestYour vehicle may have a rear seat armrest thatcontains two cupholders. To access the cupholders,pull the armrest down from the rear seatback.

Convenience NetYour vehicle may have a convenience net. Theconvenience net is designed to help keepsmall loads, like grocery bags, from falling over. Itis not designed to hold larger, heavier loads.To install the convenience net, attach both theupper and lower hooks to the loops on either sideof the liftgate opening.

Cargo CoverYour vehicle may have a cargo cover. It can beused to cover items in the rear of the vehicle.To install the cover, place the loops found on eachcorner of the cover on the four hooks in the rearof the vehicle. When not in use, the cover canbe stored in the cargo management system.

Cargo Tie DownsYour vehicle has eight cargo tie-downs located inthe rear of the vehicle. These are used tosecure small loads.

163

Cargo Management SystemYour vehicle has a cargo management systemlocated in the rear of the vehicle. To open, pull thehandle toward the rear of the vehicle and lift thecover up.

There is an additional storage compartment oneach side of the system. To open, unsnap and liftthe panel up.

To remove the cargo management system:

1. Open the lid.

2. Remove the side panels and place insidethe bin.

3. Loosen the retaining nuts on each side of thesystem by turning them counterclockwise.

4. Close the lid.

5. Pull up on the system by using the built inhandles and remove it from the vehicle.

SunroofThe vehicle may have a sunroof over the frontseats, and a rear sunroof over the secondrow seats. The rear sunroof does not open. Theswitches to operate the front sunroof and rearsunshade are located on the headliner above therearview mirror. The ignition must be in ON orACCESSORY to operate the sunroof. See IgnitionPositions on page 124.

164

Vent: From the closed position, press and holdthe front of the driver’s side switch to ventthe sunroof. Press and hold the rear of the driver’sside switch to close the sunroof.

Express-open/Express-close: From the closedposition, press and release the rear of thedriver’s side switch to express-open the sunroof.Press and release the front of the driver’s sideswitch to express-close the sunroof.

The front sunshade must be opened and closedmanually. Push up on the sunshade handleto open the sunshade.

Notice: The rear sunshade could be damagedif you attempt to open or close it manually.Do not manually open or close the rearsunshade.

To open the rear sunshade, located over thesecond row seats, press and release the rear ofthe passenger’s side switch. Press and release thefront of the switch to close the sunshade.

165

✍ NOTES

166

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 170Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 172Other Warning Devices ............................. 173Horn .......................................................... 173Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel ............ 173Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic

Steering Column .................................... 174Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 174Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 175Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 176Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 176Windshield Wipers ..................................... 176Windshield Washer .................................... 177Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...................... 179Cruise Control ........................................... 180Exterior Lamps .......................................... 183Delayed Headlamps .................................. 184Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/

Automatic Headlamp System .................. 185Fog Lamps ................................................ 186Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 186Courtesy Lamps ........................................ 186

Entry Lighting ............................................ 187Delayed Entry Lighting .............................. 187Delayed Exit Lighting ................................. 188Parade Dimming ........................................ 188Reading Lamps ......................................... 188Electric Power Management ...................... 188Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 189Head-Up Display (HUD) ............................ 190Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ...... 194Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 197Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating

Current .................................................. 198Climate Controls ......................................... 199

Climate Control System ............................. 199Dual Automatic Climate Control System .... 203Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 210Rear Air Conditioning and Heating

System .................................................. 211Rear Air Conditioning and Heating

System and Electronic ClimateControls ................................................. 212

Section 3 Instrument Panel

167

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 214Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 215Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 216Tachometer ............................................... 216Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 216Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 217Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 217Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 218Charging System Light .............................. 220Voltmeter Gage ......................................... 221Brake System Warning Light ..................... 222Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 223StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ......................... 224Engine Coolant Temperature Warning

Light ...................................................... 224Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 225Tire Pressure Light .................................... 225Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 226Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 229Security Light ............................................ 229Fog Lamp Light ......................................... 230

Cruise Control Light .................................. 230Highbeam On Light ................................... 230Tow/Haul Mode Light ................................ 230Fuel Gage ................................................. 231

Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 232DIC Operation and Displays

(With DIC Buttons) ................................. 233DIC Operation and Displays

(Without DIC Buttons) ............................ 239DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 244DIC Vehicle Customization

(With DIC Buttons) ................................. 255Audio System(s) ......................................... 264

Setting the Time ........................................ 266Radio with CD ........................................... 268Radio with CD and DVD ........................... 278Using an MP3 (Radio with CD or

Six-Disc CD Player) ............................... 295Using an MP3 (Radio with CD and

DVD Player) ........................................... 301


168

XM Radio Messages ................................. 309Navigation/Radio System ........................... 311Rear Seat Entertainment System ............... 311Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................. 322Rear Audio Controller (RAC) ..................... 324Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 325

Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 325Radio Reception ........................................ 326Care of Your CDs and DVDs .................... 328Care of the CD and DVD Player ............... 328Multi-Band Antenna ................................... 328


169

Instrument Panel Overview

170

The main components of your instrument panel are listed here:

A. Air Vent. See Outlet Adjustment on page 210.B. Multifunction Lever. See Turn

Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 174.Windshield Wipers. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 174.

C. Instrument Panel Cluster. See InstrumentPanel Cluster on page 215.

D. Head-Up Display (HUD) Buttons. SeeHead-Up Display (HUD) on page 190.

E. Audio System. See Audio System(s)on page 264. Navigation/Radio System(If Equipped). See Navigation/Radio Systemon page 311.

F. Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lampson page 183.

G. Hood Release. See Hood Release onpage 395.

H. Instrument Panel Brightness. See InstrumentPanel Brightness on page 186.

I. Cruise Control Buttons. See Cruise Controlon page 180.

J. Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel. See Tiltand Telescopic Steering Wheel on page 173.Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering(If Equipped). See Power Tilt Wheel andTelescopic Steering Column on page 174.

K. Horn. See Horn on page 173.L. Audio Steering Wheel Control Buttons. See

Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 325.M. Driver Information Center. See Driver

Information Center (DIC) on page 232.N. Dual Automatic Climate Controls. See

Dual Automatic Climate Control Systemon page 203.

O. Center Console Shift Lever (If Equipped).See “Console Shift Lever” under ShiftingInto Park (P) on page 135.

171

P. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 172.

Q. Cupholders. See Cupholder(s) on page 161.R. Accessory Power Outlets. See Accessory

Power Outlet(s) on page 197.S. Traction Control System (TCS) Disable

Button (If Equipped). See StabiliTrak® Systemon page 337. Tow/Haul Selector Button(If Equipped). See Tow/Haul Mode onpage 133. Power Liftgate Button (If Equipped).See Power Liftgate on page 110.

T. Heated Seats Button. See Heated Seatson page 12.

U. Passenger Air Bag status Indicator. SeePassenger Sensing System on page 85.

V. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 161.

Hazard Warning FlashersThe hazard warning flashers let you warn others.They also let police know you have a problem. Thefront and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

The hazard warningflasher button islocated in the center ofthe instrument panel,below the audio system.

The hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition the key is in, and even if the key is notin the ignition.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, the turnsignals will not work.

172

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set themup at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)behind your vehicle.

HornPress near or on the horn symbols on the steeringwheel pad to sound the horn.

Tilt and Telescopic Steering WheelA tilt and telescope wheel lets you adjust thesteering wheel before you drive. The steeringwheel can be raised to the highest level to giveyour legs more room when you enter and exit thevehicle.

The lever that lets you tilt and telescope thesteering wheel is located on the left side of thesteering column.

To tilt and telescope the steering wheel, pull downthe lever. Then move the steering wheel up ordown or backward or forward into a comfortableposition. Pull the lever up to lock the steeringwheel in place.

173

Power Tilt Wheel and TelescopicSteering Column

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the power tiltwheel control is locatedon the left side of thesteering column.

To operate the power tilt feature, push the controlup and the steering wheel will tilt up. Push thecontrol down and the steering wheel will go down.

Push the control forward and the steering wheelmoves toward the front of the vehicle. Pushthe control rearward and the steering wheel movestoward the rear of the vehicle.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

• G Turn and Lane Change Signals. SeeTurn and Lane-Change Signals on page 175.

• 2Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changeron page 176.

• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Passon page 176.

• N Windshield Wipers. See WindshieldWipers on page 176.

174

• LQ Windshield Washer. See WindshieldWasher on page 177.

• 5 Z Rear Wiper/Washer. See Rear WindowWiper/Washer on page 179.

For information on the headlamps, see ExteriorLamps on page 183.

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) andtwo downward (for left) positions. These positionsallow you to signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up ordown. When the turn is finished, the lever willreturn automatically.

An arrow on theinstrument panelcluster will flash inthe direction of theturn or lane change.

To signal a lane change, raise or lower the leveruntil the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until youcomplete your lane change. The lever will returnby itself when you release it. If you momentarilypress and release the lever, the turn signalwill flash three times.

If the arrow flashes faster than normal as yousignal a turn or a lane change, a signal bulb maybe burned out and other drivers will not seeyour turn signal.

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid anaccident. If the arrows do not go on at all whenyou signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs andthen check the fuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 490.

Turn Signal On ChimeIf you leave either one of your turn signals on anddrive more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km), a chime willsound to alert you.

175

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low beam tohigh beam, push the turn signal/multifunctionlever toward the front of the vehicle.

This light on theinstrument panelcluster comes on ifthe high beam lampsare turned on whilethe ignition is on.

To change the headlamps from high beam tolow beam, pull the turn signal lever toward therear of the vehicle.

Flash-to-PassWith the turn signal lever in the low-beam position,pull the lever toward you momentarily to switchto high-beam (to signal that you are going to pass).

If the headlamps are on, they will return tolow-beam when the lever is released.

This feature operates even when the headlampsare off.

Windshield WipersBe sure to clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If they are frozen to thewindshield, gently loosen or thaw them. Damagedwiper blades may not clear the windshield well,making it harder to see and drive safely. If theblades do become damaged, install new blades orblade inserts. For more information, see WindshieldWiper Blade Replacement on page 434.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. Acircuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.

176

The windshield wipers are controlled by turningthe band with the wiper symbol.

8 (Mist): Turn the band to mist for a single wipingcycle. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then letgo. The wipers will stop after one wipe. Hold theband on mist longer, for more wipe cycles.

9 (Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off.

6 (Delay): The wiper speed can be set for a longor short delay between wiping cycles. This can bevery useful in light rain or snow. Turn the band tochoose the delay time. The closer to the top of thelever, the shorter the delay.

6 (Low Speed): Turn the band away fromyou to the first solid band past the delay settings,for steady wiping at low speed.

? (High Speed): Turn the band further, to thesecond solid band past the delay settings, forhigh-speed wiping.

Windshield Washer

J (Washer Fluid): Press and release thispaddle, located at the top of the turn signal/multifunction lever, to spray washer fluid on thewindshield. The wipers clear the windshieldand either stop or return to the preset speed.The ignition key must be in ACCESSORY orON for this to work. See Windshield WasherFluid on page 420 Windshield Washer Fluid.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID is displayedon the Driver Information Center (DIC) whenthe washer fluid is low. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 244.

177

Heated Windshield WasherIf your vehicle has the heated windshield washerfluid system it can be used to help clear ice,snow, tree sap, or bugs from the windshield. Thisfeature only works with the front wiper system,not the rear wiper system.

The button is locatedto the left of thesteering column onthe instrument panel.

Push the heated washer fluid button to activatethe heated windshield washer fluid system.This activation begins four heated wash/wipecycles. The first heated wash/wipe cycle cantake up to 40 seconds to occur, dependingon outside temperature. After the first wash/wipecycle, it can take up to 20 seconds for each ofthe remaining cycles. Press the button againto turn off the heated windshield washer fluidsystem or it will automatically turn off afterfour wipe cycles have been completed.

When the heated windshield washer fluid systemis activated under certain outside temperatureconditions, steam might flow out of the washernozzles for a short period of time before washerfluid is sprayed. This is a normal condition.

WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID is displayedon the DIC when the washer fluid is low. SeeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 244.

178

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

The rear wiper control is located on the turnsignal/multifunction lever.

To turn the rear wiper on, slide the lever to awiper position.

9(Off): Slide the lever to this setting to turnthe wiper off.

5 (Rear Wiper Delay): Slide the lever to thissetting to turn on the rear wiper delay.

Z (Rear Wiper): Slide the lever to this settingto turn on the rear wiper.

= (Rear Wiper Wash): Push the button onthe end of the turn signal/multifunction leverto spray washer fluid on the rear window. Thewipers will clear the rear window and eitherstop or return to your preset speed. For morewasher cycles, press and hold the button.

179

Cruise ControlWith cruise control, you can maintain a speedof about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator. This canreally help on long trips. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).

When you apply your brakes, cruise controlis turned off.

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you couldlose control. Do not use cruise controlon slippery roads.

The cruise controlbuttons are locatedon left side of thesteering wheel.

T (On/Off): Press this button to turn cruisecontrol on and off. The indicator comes on whencruise control is on.

+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press this buttonto make the vehicle accelerate or resume toa previously set speed.

SET–: Press this button to set the speed or makethe vehicle decelerate.

[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancel cruisecontrol.

180

Setting Cruise ControlCruise control will not work if your parking brakeis set, or if the master cylinder brake fluidlevel is low.

The cruise control light on the instrument panelcluster comes on after the cruise control hasbeen set to the desired speed.

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you do notwant to. You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruise control switchoff until you want to use cruise control.

1. Press the cruise control on/off button.

2. Get up to the speed desired.

3. Press and release the SET– button locatedon the steering wheel.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator.

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set your cruise control at a desiredspeed and then you apply the brake. Thisshuts off the cruise control. But you do not needto reset it.

Once you are driving about 25 mph (40 km/h) ormore, press the +RES button on your steeringwheel. The vehicle will go back to the previouslychosen speed and stay there.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise ControlTo increase the cruise speed while using cruisecontrol:

• Press and hold the +RES button on thesteering wheel until you reach the desiredspeed, then release it.

• To increase vehicle speed in small increments,press the +RES button.

181

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise ControlTo reduce your speed while using cruise control:

• Press and hold the SET– button on thesteering wheel until you reach the lower speeddesired, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, pressthe SET– button on the steering wheelbriefly. Each time this is done, the vehicle willgo about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase vehiclespeed. When you take your foot off the pedal,your vehicle will slow down to the previously setcruise speed.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well your cruise control will work on hillsdepends upon the vehicle speed, load, and thesteepness of the hills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on the accelerator pedalto maintain the vehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake or shift to alower gear to keep the vehicle speed down.Of course, applying the brake turns off the cruisecontrol. Many drivers find this to be too muchtrouble and do not use cruise control on steep hills.

Ending Cruise ControlThere are three ways to end cruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal.

• Press the [ (cancel) button on the steeringwheel.

• Press the T (on/off) button on the steeringwheel.

Erasing Speed MemoryThe cruise control set speed memory is erased byturning off the cruise control or the ignition.

182

Exterior Lamps

The exterior lampscontrol is located onthe instrument panelto the left of thesteering wheel.

It controls the following systems:

• Headlamps

• Taillamps

• Parking Lamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

• Fog Lamps

The exterior lamps control has four positions:

O (Off): Briefly turn the control to this positionto turn off the automatic light control. Briefly turnto this position again to turn automatic light controlon again.

AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to thisposition to automatically turn on the headlampsat normal brightness, together with the following:

• Parking Lamps

• Taillamps



; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to thisposition to turn on the parking lamps together withthe following:

• Taillamps



183

2 (Headlamps): Turn the control to this positionto turn on the headlamps together with thefollowing lamps listed below. A warning chime willsound if you open the driver’s door when theignition switch is off and the headlamps are on.

• Parking Lamps

• Taillamps



- (Fog Lamps): Push the fog lamps control into turn on the fog lamps.

See Fog Lamps on page 186.

Delayed HeadlampsThe delayed headlamps feature provides a periodof exterior lighting as you leave the area aroundyour vehicle. The feature is activated whenthe headlamps are on due to the automaticheadlamps control feature described previously inthis section, and when the ignition is turned off.Your headlamps will then remain on until theexterior lamps control is moved to the parkinglamps position or until the pre-selected delayedheadlamp lighting period has ended.

If you turn off the ignition with the headlampsswitch in the parking lamps or headlamps position,the delayed headlamps cycle will not occur.

To disable the delayed headlamps feature orchange the time of delay, see DIC VehicleCustomization (With DIC Buttons) on page 255.

184

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/Automatic Headlamp SystemDaytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle duringthe day. DRL can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, but they can be especiallyhelpful in the short periods after dawn and beforesunset. Fully functional daytime running lampsare required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.

A light sensor on top of the instrument panelmakes the DRL work, so be sure it is not covered.

The DRL system’s automatic headlamp controlwill make the low-beam headlamps come on at areduced brightness when the following conditionsare met:

• The ignition is in the ON position.

• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.

• The engine is running.

When the DRL are on, only the low-beamheadlamps, at a reduced level of brightness, willbe on. The headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker,and other lamps will not be on. The instrumentpanel and cluster will also not be lit.

When it is dark enough outside, the low-beamheadlamps will turn off and the headlampsand parking lamps will turn on. The other lampsthat come on with the headlamps will alsocome on.

When it is bright enough outside, the headlampswill go off and the DRL will come on.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on theregular headlamp system when it is needed.

185

Fog LampsUse the fog lamps for better vision in foggy ormisty conditions.

- (Fog Lamps): The fog lamps button is locatedon the exterior lamps control. The exterior lampscontrol is located on the instrument panel to theleft of the steering column.

The ignition must be on for the fog lamps to work.

Press the exterior lamps button to turn the foglamps on or off. A light will come on in theinstrument panel cluster when the fog lampsare in use.

When the headlamps are changed to high-beam,the fog lamps will turn off. The fog lamps comeback on again when the high-beam headlamps areturned off.

Some localities have laws that require theheadlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

Instrument Panel Brightness

D (Instrument Panel Brightness): The knobwith this symbol on it is located next to the exteriorlamps control. Push the knob in all the way untilit pops out and then turn the knob clockwiseto brighten or counterclockwise to dim the lights.Push the knob back in when finished.

Courtesy LampsWhen a door is opened, the courtesy lampsautomatically come on. They make it easy for youto enter and leave your vehicle. You can alsomanually turn these lamps on by fully turning theinstrument panel brightness control clockwise.

The reading lamps, located on the headliner, canbe turned on or off independent of the automaticcourtesy lamps, when the doors are closed.

186

Entry LightingYour vehicle may have courtesy lamps that willcome on and stay on for a set time wheneverthe unlock symbol is pressed on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter, if the vehiclehas one.

If a door is opened, the lamps will stay on whileit is open and then turn off automatically about25 seconds after the door is closed. If theunlock symbol is pressed and you do notopen a door, the lamps will turn off after about20 seconds.

Entry lighting includes a feature called theaterdimming. With theater dimming, the lamps do notturn off at the end of the delay time. Instead,they slowly dim after the delay time until they goout. The delay time is canceled if you turn theignition key to ON or press the power doorlock switch. The lamps will dim right away.

When the ignition is on, illuminated entry isinactive, which means the courtesy lamps willnot come on unless a door is opened.

Delayed Entry LightingDelayed entry lighting illuminates the interior fora period of time after all the doors have beenclosed.

The ignition must be off for delayed entry lightingto work. Immediately after all the doors havebeen closed, the delayed entry lighting featurewill continue to work until one of the followingoccurs:

• The ignition is in ON.

• The doors are locked.

• An illumination period of 25 secondshas elapsed.

If during the illumination period a door is opened,the timed illumination period will be canceledand the interior lamps will remain on because adoor is open.

187

Delayed Exit LightingThis feature illuminates the interior for a period oftime after the key is removed from the ignition.

The ignition must be off for delayed exit lighting towork. When the key is removed, interior illuminationwill activate and remain on until one of the followingoccurs:

• The ignition is in ON.

• The power door locks are activated.

• An illumination period of 20 secondshas elapsed.

If during the illumination period a door is opened,the timed illumination period will be canceledand the interior lamps will remain on because adoor is open.

Parade DimmingThe instrument panel has an added feature calledparade mode. It automatically prohibits thedimming of the instrument panel displays duringthe daylight while the headlamps are on sothat you will still be able to see the displays.

Reading LampsThe vehicle has reading lamps that also act as thedome lamp. Press the button to turn them on and off.

Electric Power ManagementThe vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM)that estimates the battery’s temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltage for bestperformance and extended life of the battery.

When the battery’s state of charge is low, thevoltage is raised slightly to quickly put the chargeback in. When the state of charge is high, thevoltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging.If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or voltagedisplay on the Driver Information Center (DIC),you may see the voltage move up or down. Thisis normal. If there is a problem, an alert will bedisplayed.

The battery can be discharged at idle if theelectrical loads are very high. This is true for allvehicles. This is because the generator (alternator)may not be spinning fast enough at idle toproduce all the power that is needed for veryhigh electrical loads.

188

A high electrical load occurs when several of thefollowing loads are on: headlamps, high beams,fog lamps, rear window defogger, climatecontrol fan at high speed, heated seats, enginecooling fans, trailer loads, and loads pluggedinto accessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessive discharge ofthe battery. It does this by balancing thegenerator’s output and the vehicle’s electricalneeds. It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, whenever needed.It can temporarily reduce the power demandsof some accessories.

Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels,without being noticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action, this actionmay be noticeable to the driver. If so, a DriverInformation Center (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as Battery Saver Active or ServiceBattery Charging System. If this message isdisplayed, it is recommended that the driverreduce the electrical loads as much as possible.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 244.

Battery Run-Down ProtectionThis vehicle has a feature to help prevent thebattery from being drained, if the interior courtesylamps, reading/map lamps, visor vanity lampsor trunk lamp are accidentally left on. If anyof these lamps are left on, they will automaticallyturn off after 10 minutes, if the ignition is off.The lamps will not come back on again untilone of the following occurs:

• The ignition is turned on.

• The exterior lamps control is turned off,then on again.

The headlamps will timeout after 10 minutes,if they are manually turned on before theignition is off.

189

Head-Up Display (HUD)

{CAUTION:

If the HUD image is too bright or too highin your field of view, it may take you moretime to see things you need to see whenit is dark outside. Be sure to keep theHUD image dim and placed low in yourfield of view.

If the vehicle has the Head-Up Display (HUD),some information concerning the operation of thevehicle is projected onto the windshield. Thisincludes the speedometer reading, RPM reading,transmission position, outside air temperature, thetap shift gear, and a brief display of the currentradio station, including XM information or CD track.

It will also display turn-by-turn navigationinformation if the vehicle has a navigation radio.The images are projected by the HUD lens locatedon the driver’s side of the instrument panel.

The tap shift gear will also appear on the HUD ifthe vehicle has tap shift and it is active.

The HUD information can be displayed in one ofthree languages, English, French, or Spanish.The speedometer reading and other numericalvalues can be displayed in either English ormetric units.

The language selection and the units ofmeasurement are changed through the tripcomputer in the Driver Information Center (DIC).See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons)on page 255.

190

The HUD information appears as an imagefocused out toward the front of the vehicle.

When the ignition key is turned to RUN, the HUDwill display an introductory message for a shorttime, until the HUD is ready.

The following indicator lights come on theinstrument panel when activated and will alsoappear on the HUD:

• Turn Signal Indicators

• High-Beam Indicator Symbol

The HUD will temporarily display CHECK GAGESand ICE POSSIBLE when there are messageson the DIC trip computer.

The HUD will also display the following messageswhen these systems are active:

• TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE

• STABILITRAK ACTIVE

Notice: If you try to use the HUD image as aparking aid, you may misjudge the distanceand damage your vehicle. Do not use theHUD image as a parking aid.

When the HUD is on, the speedometer readingwill continually be displayed. The current radiostation or CD track number will display for a shortperiod of time after the radio or CD track statuschanges. This will happen whenever radioinformation is changed. The speedometer sizewill be reduced when radio, CD information,warnings, or turn-by-turn navigation informationare displayed on the HUD.

191

The HUD control islocated to the right ofthe steering wheel.

To adjust the HUD image so that items areproperly displayed, do the following:

1. Adjust the driver’s seat to a comfortableposition.

2. Start the engine.

3. Adjust the HUD controls.

Use the following settings to adjust the HUD.

9 (Off): To turn HUD off, rotate the dimmingknob fully counterclockwise until the HUD displayturns off.

Brightness: Turn the knob on the HUD controlclockwise to brighten the display andcounterclockwise to dim it.

w (Up): x (Down): Press the up or downarrows to center the HUD image in your view. TheHUD image can only be adjusted up and down,not side to side.

? (Page): Press this button to select the displayformats. Release the page button when theformat number with the desired display is shownon the HUD.

The three formats are as follows:

Format One: This display gives the speedometerreading (in English or metric units), turn signalindication, high beam indication, transmissionpositions, and the outside air temperature.

192

Format Two: This display includes the informationin Format One without the transmission informationand the outside air temperature.

Format Three: This display includes all theinformation in Format One along with a circulartachometer, but without outside air temperature.

All formats will show the turn-by-turn navigationinformation and provide details about the nextdriving maneuver to be made. When you near yourdestination, the HUD will display a distance barthat will fill in the closer you get to your destination.

All navigation information is provided to the HUDby the navigation radio, if the vehicle has one.

The HUD image displayed on the windshield willautomatically dim and brighten to compensatefor outside lighting.

The HUD image can temporarily light updepending on the angle and position of thesunlight on the HUD display. This is normal andwill change when the angle of the sunlight onthe HUD display changes.

Polarized sunglasses could make the HUD imageharder to see.

Care of the HUDClean the inside of the windshield as needed toremove any dirt or film that could reduce thesharpness or clarity of the HUD image.

To clean the HUD lens, use a soft, clean cloththat has household glass cleaner sprayedon it. Wipe the HUD lens gently, then dry it.Do not spray cleaner directly on the lensbecause the cleaner could leak into the unit.

193

If You Cannot See the HUD ImageWhen the Ignition Is On• Is anything covering the HUD lens?

• Is the HUD dimmer setting bright enough?

• Is the HUD image adjusted to the properheight?

• Are you wearing polarized sunglasses?

• Still no HUD image? Check the fuse in theinstrument panel fuse block. See InstrumentPanel Fuse Block on page 490.

If the HUD Image Is Not Clear• Is the HUD image too bright?

• Are the windshield and HUD lens clean?

If the HUD image is not correct, contact yourdealer/retailer.

Keep in mind that the windshield is part of theHUD system.

Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA)If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system it is designed to helpyou park while in Reverse (R). It operates onlyat speeds less than 5 mph (8 km/h). URPAhelps make parking easier and helps you avoidcolliding with objects such as parked vehicles.The URPA system detects objects that are closeto the rear of the vehicle which are at least10 inches (25.4 cm) off the ground and belowhood or trunk level. The system detects objectsup to 8 feet (2.5 m) behind your vehicle. TheURPA sensors determine how close these objectsare from your bumper within this area.

194

{CAUTION:

The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist (URPA)system does not replace driver vision.URPA does not:

• Operate above speeds of5 mph (8 km/h).

• Detect objects more than 8 feet(2.5 meters) behind the vehicle. Thisdistance may be less during warmeror humid weather.

• Detect objects that are below thebumper, underneath the vehicle, orthat are very close to the vehicle.

• Detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

So if you do not use proper care beforebacking up, you could hit a vehicle, child,pedestrian, bicyclist, or pet, resulting invehicle damage, injury, or death. Eventhough the vehicle has the URPA system,always check carefully before backing upby checking behind your vehicle.

The URPA display islocated in the headlinerand can be seen bylooking over your rightshoulder.

The URPA display has three color-coded lights.The lights are used to provide distance and systeminformation, along with beeps that will be heardthrough the speakers.The red light in the URPA display will be lit if thevehicle is in REVERSE (R). If the vehicle has aDriver Information Center (DIC), PARK ASSISTOFF will display on the DIC when the vehicle hasbeen started and shifted out of PARK (P). See DICWarnings and Messages on page 244 for moreinformation.

How the System WorksWhen the shift lever is moved into REVERSE (R),the rear display will briefly come on to let youknow the display is operating correctly. URPAcomes on automatically when the shift leveris moved into REVERSE (R).

195

The system does not work at a reverse speedgreater than 5 mph (8 km/h). To remind you of this,the red light on the rear display will flash.

To disable URPA, see DIC Operation and Displays(With DIC Buttons) on page 233 and DICOperations and Displays (Without DIC Buttons)on page 239.

URPA automatically turns back on each timethe vehicle is started.

How the System Works when BackingIf the shift lever is in REVERSE (R), URPAdetects objects close to the rear bumper. Thefirst time an object is detected a single beep willsound. If an object is detected at a REVERSE (R)speed between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 5 mph(8 km/h), the following describes what will occurbased on your distance to a detected objectlocated behind the vehicle:

• At distances between 40 inches (1 m) and 8 ft(2.5 m), a single amber light will come on.

• At distances between 23 inches (0.6 m) and40 inches (1 m), both amber lights will be on.

• At distances between 12 inches (0.3 m) and23 inches (0.6 m), all three lights (amber/amber/red) will be on.

• At distances less than 12 inches (0.3 m), abeeping sound will repeat for a short time andall three lights (amber/amber/red) will flash.

When the System Does Not Seem toWork ProperlyIf the URPA system will not activate due to atemporary condition, the message PARK ASSISTOFF will display on the DIC screen and a redlight will come on the URPA display when the shiftlever is moved into REVERSE (R). This occursunder the following conditions:

• The parking brake pedal is depressed.

• A trailer was attached to your vehicle, or abicycle or an object was hanging out ofyour trunk during your last drive when youturned off the vehicle. If the attached objectsare removed from your vehicle before the startof your next drive, the system will return tonormal operation unless an object is detectedwhen the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R).

196

If this occurs, URPA assumes the object is stillattached, so you will have to wait until thevehicle is driven forward above 15 mph(25 km/h) before URPA will return to normaloperation.

• The ultrasonic sensors need to be kept clean.So, be sure to keep your vehicle’s rear bumperfree of mud, dirt, snow, ice, and slush. Forcleaning instructions, see Washing YourVehicle on page 482. If the DIC still displays thePARK ASSIST OFF message after cleaning thebumper and driving forward at a speed of atleast 15 mph (25 km/h), see your dealer/retailer.

• Other conditions that may affect systemperformance include vibrations from ajackhammer or the compression of air brakeson a very large truck or other mechanicaldevices that interfere with URPA performance.

As always, drivers should use care when backingup a vehicle. Always look behind you, beingsure to check for other vehicles, obstructionsand blind spots.

If the vehicle bumper is damaged, the URPAsystem may not work properly. Take the vehicleto your dealer/retailer to repair the system.

Accessory Power Outlet(s)The accessory power outlets can be used toconnect electrical equipment such as a cellularphone or CB radio.

Your vehicle may have four accessory poweroutlets. They are located on the instrument panelbelow the climate controls, inside the frontcenter console storage bin, at the rear of thecenter console, and in the rear cargo area.

To use the outlets, remove the cover. When not inuse, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on forextended periods will drain the battery. Alwaysturn off electrical equipment when not inuse and do not plug in equipment that exceedsthe maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.

197

Certain electrical accessories may not becompatible with the accessory power outlets andcould result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.If you experience a problem, see your dealer/retailer for additional information on theaccessory power outlet.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should. Therepairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not use equipment exceedingmaximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.Check with your dealer/retailer before addingelectrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure tofollow the installation instructions included with theequipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug because thepower outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.

Power Outlet 115 Volt AlternatingCurrentYour vehicle may have a power outlet that canbe used to plug in auxiliary electrical equipmentwith a maximum limit of 150 watts. If you try touse equipment that requires more than the limit,a protection circuit will cut the power supply.To reset the outlet, unplug the item and plugit back in or turn the ignition to LOCK orACCESSORY and then back on. The power willautomatically restart when equipment that operateswithin the limit is plugged into the outlet.

The power outlet islocated on the rear ofthe center console.

198

The indicator on the inner outlet face will come onwhen 115 volt AC power is available. The ACpower is available when the ignition is turned toACCESSORY or ON, and electrical equipmentis plugged into the outlet. The AC power isnot available in the outlet when the ignition isturned to OFF.

The power outlet is not designed for the followingelectrical equipment and may not work properlyif these items are plugged into the power outlet:

• Equipment with high initial peak wattagesuch as: compressor-driven refrigeratorsand electric power tools.

• Other equipment requiring an extremelystable power supply such as:microcomputer-controlled electric blankets,touch sensor lamps, etc.

See High Voltage Devices and Wiring onpage 489.

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemWith this system you can control the heating,cooling, defrost, defog, and ventilation ofthe vehicle.

Manual Operation

9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease the fanspeed. Turn the knob all the way counterclockwiseto turn the front system off.

199

Temperature Control: Turn the center knobclockwise or counterclockwise to increaseor decrease the temperature of the air flowingfrom the system.

Airflow Mode Control: Turn the right knobclockwise or counterclockwise to direct the airflowinside of the vehicle.

To change the current mode, select one of thefollowing:

H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs about half ofthe air to the instrument panel outlets andhalf to the floor outlets. A little air is directedtowards the windshield and side window outlets.Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets andwarmer air to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor outlets, with some of the air directedto the windshield, side window outlets, andsecond row floor outlets. In this mode, the systemautomatically selects outside air. Recirculationcannot be selected when in Floor Mode.

The right knob can also be used to select defogor defrost mode. For more information, see“Defogging and Defrosting” later in this section.

By positioning the right knob between two modes,a combination of those two modes is selected.

@ (Recirculation): Press this button to turn therecirculation mode on or off. The indicator lighton the button turns on when this mode is selected.

This mode keeps outside air from entering thevehicle. It can be used to reduce the outside airand odors entering the vehicle. Recirculationmay also help cool the air inside the vehicle morequickly once the temperature inside the vehicleis less than the outside temperature.

The recirculation mode can be turned off in ventand bi-level modes by pressing the buttonagain. Recirculation mode automatically turns offwhen the engine is turned off and must bere-selected when the engine is turned on again.

The recirculation mode cannot be used withfloor, defrost, or defogging modes. If you try toselect recirculation in one of those modes,the indicator flashes three times and turns off.

200

The air conditioning compressor also comes onwhen this mode is activated unless the outsideair temperature is less than 40°F (4°C). While inrecirculation mode the windows may fog whenthe weather is cold and damp. To clear thefog, select either the defog or defrost mode andincrease the fan speed.

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button onthe left knob to turn the air conditioning systemon or off. When A/C is pressed, an indicator lightcomes on to show that the air conditioning hasbeen activated. The air conditioning compressordoes not operate when outside temperaturesfall below 40°F (4°C). The indicator light flashesthree times and turns off when outside conditionsaffect air conditioning operation. This is normal.

For quicker cool down on hot days, do thefollowing:

1. Open the windows to let hot air escape.

2. Select the vent mode.

3. Select the air conditioner.

4. Select the coolest temperature.

5. Select the highest fan speed.

6. Close the windows after the hot air hasescaped.

7. Once the vehicle’s interior temperature isbelow the outside temperature, selectrecirculation mode for better cooling.

This helps to reduce the time it takes for thevehicle to cool down. It also helps the system tooperate more efficiently.

Using recirculation for long periods of time maycause the air inside of the vehicle to becometoo dry. To prevent this from happening, afterthe inside of the vehicle has cooled, turn therecirculation mode off.

The air conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so you might notice a small amountof water dripping underneath the front of centerand right rear of the vehicle while idling orafter turning off the engine. This is normal.

201

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of the windows is a result ofhigh humidity (moisture) condensing on thecool window glass. This can be minimized if theclimate control system is used properly. Thereare two modes to clear fog or frost from thewindshield. Turn the right knob clockwise toselect the defog or defrost mode.

- (Defog): The defog mode is used to clearthe windows of fog or moisture and warmthe passengers. This mode directs air to thewindshield, floor outlets, and side window vents.When you select this mode, the system turnsoff recirculation and runs the air conditioningcompressor unless the outside temperature is lessthan 40°F (4°C). The recirculation mode cannotbe selected while in the defog mode. Do not drivethe vehicle until all the windows are clear.

0 (Defrost): The defrost mode is used toremove fog or frost from the windshield morequickly. This mode directs most of the air to thewindshield and side window vents and someto the floor vents. In this mode, the system willautomatically force outside air into your vehicle.The recirculation mode cannot be selected while inthe defrost mode. The air conditioning compressorwill run automatically in this setting, unless theoutside temperature is less than 40°F (4°C).Do not drive the vehicle until all the windowsare clear.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to turn therear heating and air conditioning on. See Rear AirConditioning and Heating System on page 211or Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System andElectronic Climate Controls on page 212.

202

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming gridto remove fog from the rear window.

< (Rear Window Defogger): Press this buttonon the right knob to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. The rear window defoggerstays on about 10 minutes after the buttonis pressed, before turning off. The defogger canalso be turned off by pressing the button againor by turning off the engine. Do not drive thevehicle until all the windows are clear.

If your vehicle has heated outside rearviewmirrors, the mirrors heat to help clear fog or frostfrom the surface of the mirror when the rearwindow defog button is pressed.

Notice: Do not use anything sharp on theinside of the rear window. If you do, you couldcut or damage the warming grid, and therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not attach a temporary vehicle license,tape, a decal or anything similar to thedefogger grid.

Dual Automatic ClimateControl SystemWith this system, you can control the heating,cooling, and ventilation in your vehicle. Yourvehicle also has a flow-through ventilation systemdescribed later in this section.

You can select different climate controltemperature settings for the driver and passengers.

203

Driver’s Side Temperature ControlThe driver side temperature buttons are used toadjust the temperature of the air coming throughthe system on the driver side. The temperaturecan be adjusted even if the system is turnedoff. This is possible since outside air will alwaysflow through the system as the vehicle is movingforward unless it is set to recirculation mode.See “Recirculation” later in this section.

Press the + or − buttons to increase or decreasethe temperature. The driver side temperaturedisplay will show the temperature settingdecreasing or increasing.

Passenger’s Side Temperature ControlThe passenger’s temperature buttons can beused to change the temperature of the air comingthrough the system on the passenger side ofthe vehicle. The temperature can be adjusted evenif the system is turned off. This is possible sinceoutside air will always flow through the systemas the vehicle is moving forward unless it is set torecirculation mode. See “Recirculation” later inthis section.

Press the + or − buttons to increase or decreasethe temperature. The passenger side displaywill show the temperature setting decreasing orincreasing.

The passenger’s temperature setting can beset to match the driver’s temperature settingby pressing the PASS button and turning offthe PASS indicator. When the passenger’stemperature setting is set different than thedriver’s setting, the indicator on the PASSbutton comes on and both the driver side andpassenger side temperature displays are shown.

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation isactive the system controls the inside temperature,the air delivery, and the fan speed.

Use the steps below to place the entire system inautomatic mode:

1. Press the AUTO button.When AUTO is selected, the display showsthe current temperature(s) selected and AUTOis on the display. The current delivery modeand fan speed also display for approximately5 seconds.

204

When AUTO is selected, the air conditioningoperation and air inlet are automaticallycontrolled. The air conditioning compressorruns when the outside temperature isover about 40°F (4°C). The air inlet is normallyset to outside air. If it is hot outside, the airinlet can automatically switch to recirculateinside air to help quickly cool down yourvehicle. The light comes on the recirculationbutton while in recirculation.

2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.To find your comfort setting, start with a73°F (23°C) temperature setting and allowabout 20 minutes for the system to regulate.Use the driver’s or passenger’s temperaturebuttons to adjust the temperature settingas necessary. If you choose the temperaturesetting of 60°F (15°C), the system remainsat the maximum cooling setting. If you choosethe temperature setting of 90°F (32°C), thesystem remains at the maximum heat setting.Choosing either maximum setting will notcause the vehicle to heat or cool any faster.

Do not cover the solar sensor located on thetop of the instrument panel near the windshield.This sensor regulates air temperature basedon sun load and also turns on your vehicle’sheadlamps. For more information on the solarsensor, see “Sensors” later in this section.To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, thesystem delays turning on the fan until warm air isavailable. The length of delay depends on theengine coolant temperature. Press the fan switchto override this delay and change the fan to aselected speed.

O (On/Off): Press this button to turn off theclimate control system. Outside air still entersthe vehicle, and is directed to the floor. Thisdirection can be changed by pressing the modebutton. Recirculation can only be selected invent or bi-level mode. The temperature can alsobe adjusted using either temperature button.If you adjust the air delivery mode or temperaturesettings with the system off, the display comeson briefly to show the settings and then turns off.Press the on/off button or the up down arrowson the fan switch, the defrost button, AUTO button,or the air conditioning button to turn the systemon when it is off.

205

Manual OperationThe air delivery mode or fan speed can bemanually adjusted.

DC (Fan): The buttons with the fan symbols letyou manually adjust the fan speed. Press theup arrow to increase fan speed and the downarrow to decrease fan speed.

Pressing a fan button while the system is off willturn the system on. Pressing a fan buttonwhile in automatic control places the fan undermanual control. The fan setting remains displayedand the AUTO light turns off. The air deliverymode remains in automatic control.

yN z (Mode): Press the mode up and downbuttons to manually change the direction ofthe airflow in the vehicle. Repeatedly press thebutton until the desired mode appears on thedisplay. Pressing a mode button while the systemis off will change air delivery mode withoutturning the system on. Press one of these buttonswhile in automatic control to place the modeunder manual control.

The air delivery mode setting displays and theAUTO light turns off. The fan remains underautomatic control.

H (Vent): This setting delivers air to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs air to theinstrument panel outlets and to the floor outlets.A little air is directed towards the windshieldand side window outlets. Cooler air is directed tothe upper outlets and warmer air to the flooroutlets.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor outlets, with some of the air directedto the windshield, side window outlets, andsecond row floor outlets. In this mode, the systemautomatically selects outside air. Recirculationcannot be selected in floor mode.

- (Defog): See “Defogging and Defrosting” laterin this section.

@ (Recirculation): Press this button to turnthe recirculation mode on. When the buttonis pressed, an indicator light comes on.

206

This mode keeps outside air from entering thevehicle. It can be used to reduce outside air andprevent odors from entering your vehicle.Recirculation can also help cool the air inside yourvehicle more quickly once the temperature insidethe vehicle is less than the outside temperature.

The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor,defrost, or defogging modes. If you try to selectrecirculation in one of those modes, the indicatorflashes three times and turns off. The airconditioning compressor also comes on when thismode is activated. While in recirculation mode thewindows may fog when the weather is cold anddamp. To clear the fog, select either the defog ordefrost mode and increase the fan speed.

Press the button again to turn off the recirculationmode. It automatically turns off when the engine isturned off and must be re-selected when the engineis turned on again.

Air Conditioning

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turnthe air conditioning (A/C) compressor on and off.When air conditioning is selected, an indicator lightcomes on to let you know that the air conditioninghas been activated.

The air conditioning compressor does not workwhen outside temperatures fall below 40°F (4°C).Pressing this button when the outside temperatureis too cool makes the air conditioning indicator flashthree times and turn off to let you know the airconditioning mode is not available. If the airconditioning is on and the outside temperaturedrops below a temperature which is too cool for airconditioning to be effective, the air conditioning lightturns off to show that the air conditioning mode hasbeen canceled.

On hot days, open the windows long enough to lethot inside air escape. This helps to reduce thetime it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It alsohelps the system to operate more efficiently.

The air conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so you may sometimes notice asmall amount of water dripping underneath yourvehicle while idling or after turning off theengine. This is normal.

207

Sensors

The solar sensor, located in the defrost grille inthe middle of the instrument panel, monitorsthe solar radiation. Do not cover the solar sensoror the system will not work properly.

The interior temperature sensor located on theinstrument panel to the right of the steering column,measures the temperature of the air inside thevehicle.

There is also an exterior temperature sensorlocated behind the front grille. This sensor readsthe outside air temperature and helps maintainthe temperature inside the vehicle. Any cover onthe front of the vehicle could cause a false readingin the displayed temperature.

208

The climate control system uses the informationfrom these sensors to maintain your comfortsetting by adjusting the outlet temperature, fanspeed, and the air delivery mode. The system mayalso supply cooler air to the side of the vehiclefacing the sun. The recirculation mode will alsobe used as needed to maintain cool outlettemperatures.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of the windows is a result ofhigh humidity (moisture) condensing on thecool window glass. This can be minimized if theclimate control system is used properly. Thereare two modes to clear fog or frost from yourwindshield.

Use the mode up and down arrows to selectthe defog mode. Use the defrost button toselect the defrost mode.

- (Defog): The defog mode is used to clearthe windows of fog or moisture and warmthe passengers. This mode directs air to thewindshield, floor outlets, and side window vents.When you select this mode, the system turnsoff recirculation and runs the air conditioningcompressor unless the outside temperature isclose to freezing. The recirculation mode cannotbe selected while in the defog mode. Do notdrive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.

0(Defrost): Press this button to removefog or frost from the windshield more quickly.This mode directs most of the air to thewindshield and side window vents and someto the floor vents. In this mode, the systemautomatically forces outside air into your vehicle.The recirculation mode cannot be selectedwhile in the defrost mode. The air conditioningcompressor runs automatically in this setting,unless the outside temperature is close to freezing.Do not drive the vehicle until all the windowsare clear.

209

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog from the rear window.

< (Rear Window Defogger): Press this buttonto turn the rear window defogger on or off. Therear window defogger stays on for about10 minutes after the button is pressed, beforeturning off. The defogger can also be turned offby pressing the button again or by turning offthe engine. Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

If your vehicle has heated outside rearviewmirrors, the mirrors will heat to help clear fog orfrost from the surface of the mirror when therear window defog button is pressed.

Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rear window. Do notadhere anything to the defogger grid linesin the rear glass. These actions may damagethe rear defogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

Outlet AdjustmentUse the slider switch in the center of the outlet,to change the direction of the air flow. Usethe thumbwheel near the outlet to control theamount of air flow or to shut off the airflowcompletely.

Keep all outlets open whenever possible for bestsystem performance.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the

air inlets at the base of the windshield thatcan block the flow of air into the vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors canadversely affect the performance of thesystem.

• Keep the path under all seats clear of objectsto help circulate the air inside the vehiclemore effectively.

• If fogging reoccurs while in vent or bi-levelmodes with mild temperature throughoutthe vehicle, turn on the air conditionerto reduce windshield fogging.

210

Rear Air Conditioning andHeating SystemIf your vehicle has this system, the rear controlsare three knobs located on the rear of thecenter console. The system can be controlled fromthe front controls as well as the rear controls.

To turn the system on, press the AUX button onthe front climate control system, an indicator will belit. Pressing the AUX button the first time willturn the rear system on in a mimic mode. In thismode, the airflow in the rear will be approximatelythe same direction, temperature, and fan speedas the front. Pressing the AUX button againwill turn the rear system and the indicator off.

If the rear controls are adjusted, the system turnson in a rear independent mode. Airflow in therear will then be directed according to the settingsof the rear controls. The rear system can beturned off by pressing the AUX button on thefront climate control system and the indicatorwill turn off. The system can be turned back on,by adjusting any of the rear air conditioningcontrol knobs.

Fan KnobTurn the left knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease the fan speed. Turnthe knob all the way counterclockwise to turn therear system off.

Temperature KnobThe middle knob on the control panel lets youselect the temperature of the air flowing into thepassenger area. Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise for warmer or cooler air.

211

Mode KnobThe right knob on the control panel lets youchoose the direction of the air flow.

H (Vent): This setting directs the air throughthe headliner outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This setting directs the air throughthe rear floor outlets under the third row seat,as well as the headliner outlets. The flow canbe divided between headliner and floor outletsdepending upon where the knob is placed betweenthe settings.

6 (Floor): This setting directs the air throughthe floor outlets. The rear system floor outletsare located under the third row seats.

Rear Air Conditioning andHeating System and ElectronicClimate ControlsIf your vehicle has this rear climate control systemthere are rear seat audio controls located in thecenter console.

The rear system can be controlled through theAUX button on the front climate control panel.Press the AUX button to turn the rear climatecontrol system on or off. An indicator light nearthe AUX button comes on when the rear climatecontrol system is on. The direction, temperature,and speed of the airflow for the rear of the vehiclewill be the same as those set for the front of thevehicle.

Use the controls located in the rear of the frontconsole, to independently control the air flowfor the rear of the vehicle separately from thatof the front of the vehicle. To turn the system on,press any of the rear air conditioning controlbuttons. To turn the system off, press and holdthe C button.

212

Manual Operation

DC (Fan): The fan buttons on the rear seataudio control panel let you manually adjustthe fan speed. Press D to increase airflowand C to decrease airflow.

+/− (Increase/Decrease Temperature):These buttons select the temperature of theair flowing into the rear passenger area. Pressthe + button for warmer air and press the − buttonfor cooler air. The temperature settings willdisplay in 0-12 increments, going from thecoolest (0) to the warmest (12) setting.

N (Mode): Press the mode button to manuallychange the direction of the airflow in the vehicle.Repeatedly press the button until the desired modeappears on the display. Multiple presses cyclesthrough the delivery selections.

H (Vent): This mode directs air through theheadliner outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs air through thefloor outlets as well as the headliner outlets.The rear system floor outlets are located underthe third row seats.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of theair through the floor outlets. The rear system flooroutlets are located under the third row seats.

Rear Climate Control with Rear Seat Audio Controls

213

Warning Lights, Gages,and IndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights andgages on your vehicle. The pictures help tolocate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal thatsomething is wrong before it becomes seriousenough to cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to the warninglights and gages could also save you or othersfrom injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be oris a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.As the details show on the next few pages,some warning lights come on briefly when youstart the engine just to let you know they areworking. If you are familiar with this section, youshould not be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions.Often gages and warning lights work togetherto let you know when there is a problem withyour vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on as you are driving, or when one ofthe gages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do about it.Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting todo repairs can be costly and even dangerous.So please get to know your vehicle’s warninglights and gages. They can be a big help.

214

Instrument Panel ClusterThe instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how the vehicle is running. You will knowhow fast you are going, about how much fuel you have used, and many other things you will need toknow to drive safely and economically.

United States version shown, Canada similar

215

Speedometer and OdometerThe speedometer lets you see your speed inboth miles per hour (mph) and kilometers perhour (km/h).

The odometer shows how far your vehicle hasbeen driven, in either miles or kilometers.

Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer.If your vehicle needs a new odometer installed,the new one will be set to the mileage total of theold odometer. If this is not possible, it will beset at zero and a label must be put on the driver’sdoor to show the old mileage reading when thenew odometer was installed. If the mileageis unknown, the label should then indicate“previous mileage unknown”.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the engine speed inrevolutions per minute (rpm).

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to ON or START, a chimewill come on for several seconds to remindpeople to fasten their safety belts, unless thedriver’s safety belt is already buckled.

The safety belt lightwill also come onand stay on forseveral seconds,then it will flash forseveral more.

This chime and light is repeated if the driverremains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion.

If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

216

Passenger Safety BeltReminder LightSeveral seconds after the key is turned to ON orSTART, a chime will sound for several secondsto remind the front passenger to buckle theirsafety belt. This would only occur if the passengerairbag is enabled. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 85 for more information. Thepassenger safety belt light will also come onand stay on for several seconds, then it will flashfor several more.

This chime and lightare repeated if thepassenger remainsunbuckled andthe vehicle isin motion.

If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled,neither the chime nor the light will come on.

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on theinstrument panel cluster, which shows theairbag symbol. The system checks the airbag’selectrical system for malfunctions. The lighttells you if there is an electrical problem.The system check includes the airbag sensor,the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the wiringand the crash sensing and diagnostic module.For more information on the airbag system,see Airbag System on page 76.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds.Then the light shouldgo out. This meansthe system is ready.

217

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stayson after you start your vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for afew seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON.If the light does not come on then, have it fixedso it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour vehicle has the passenger sensing system.Your instrument panel has a passenger airbagstatus indicator.

When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbagstatus indicator will light ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, for several seconds as asystem check. If you use remote start to start yourvehicle from a distance, if your vehicle has thisfeature, you may not see the system check. Then,after several more seconds, the status indicatorwill light either ON or OFF, or either the onor off symbol to let you know the status of theright front passenger’s frontal and seat-mountedside impact airbags.


218

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means thatthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag are enabled(may inflate).

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when you havea rear-facing child restraint installed in theright front passenger’s seat, it means thatthe passenger sensing system has notturned off the passenger’s frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped). A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured or killed ifthe right front passenger’s airbag inflates.This is because the back of the rear-facingchild restraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger’sseat if the airbag is turned on.

{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped) if the system detects arear-facing child restraint, no system isfail-safe, and no one can guarantee thatan airbag will not deploy under someunusual circumstance, even though it isturned off. We recommend that rear-facingchild restraints be secured in a rear seat,even if the airbag is or airbags are off.

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means thatthe passenger sensing system has turned offthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag. See PassengerSensing System on page 85 for more on this,including important safety information.

219

If, after several seconds, both status indicatorlights remain on, or if there are no lights atall, there may be a problem with the lightsor the passenger sensing system. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that something maybe wrong with the airbag system. If thisever happens, have the vehicle servicedpromptly, because an adult-size personsitting in the right front passenger’sseat may not have the protection of theairbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 217 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.

Charging System Light

The charging systemlight will come on brieflywhen you turn on theignition, but the engine isnot running, as a checkto show you it is working.

It should go out once the engine is running. If itstays on, or comes on while you are driving, youmay have a problem with the charging system.It could indicate that you have problems with agenerator drive belt, or another electrical problem.Have it checked right away. Driving while this lightis on could drain your battery.

When this light comes on, the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) will also display the SERVICEBATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM message. SeeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 244 for moreinformation.

If you must drive a short distance with the light on,be certain to turn off all your accessories, such asthe radio and air conditioner.

220

Voltmeter Gage

When the engine isnot running, but theignition is turned to ON,this gage shows thebattery’s state of chargein DC volts.

When the engine is running, this gage shows thecondition of the charging system. The vehicle’scharging system regulates voltage based onthe state of charge of the battery. The voltmetermay fluctuate. This is normal. Readings betweenthe low and high warning zones indicate thenormal operating range.

Readings in the low warning zone may occurwhen a large number of electrical accessoriesare operating in the vehicle and the engine isleft idling for an extended period.

If there is a problem with the battery chargingsystem, a SERVICE BATTERY CHARGINGSYSTEM message will appear in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) and/or the chargingsystem light will come on. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 244 and Charging SystemLight on page 220 for more information.

However, readings in either warning zone mayindicate a possible problem in the electricalsystem. Have the vehicle serviced as soonas possible.

221

Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part is not working, the otherpart can still work and stop you. For good braking,though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brakeproblem. Have your brake system inspectedright away.

This light should come on briefly when you turnthe ignition key to ON. If it does not come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you ifthere is a problem.

This light may also come on due to low brake fluid.See Brakes on page 421 for more information.

When the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight will also come on when you set your parkingbrake. The light will stay on if your parking brakedoes not release fully. If it stays on after yourparking brake is fully released, it means you havea brake problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull offthe road and stop carefully. Make sure the parkingbrake is fully released. You may notice that thepedal is harder to push or, the pedal may go closerto the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the lightis still on, have the vehicle towed for service.See Towing Your Vehicle on page 367.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.


222

Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning LightYour vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS).

This light will come onwhen your engine isstarted and may stayon for several seconds.This is normal.

If the light stays on, turn the ignition to off.If the light comes on and the chime soundswhen you are driving, pull your vehicle over to asafe location and stop as soon as possible.

Turn the ignition off. Then start the engine againto reset the system. If the light still stays on,or comes on again while you are driving, yourvehicle needs service. If the regular brakesystem warning light is not on, you still havebrakes, but you do not have anti-lock brakes.If the regular brake system warning light is alsoon, you do not have anti-lock brakes and thereis a problem with your regular brakes. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 222 earlier inthis section.

The ABS warning light will come on briefly whenyou turn the ignition key to ON. This is normal.If the light does not come on then, have it fixed soit will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

223

StabiliTrak® Indicator Light

This warning lightshould come onbriefly when theengine is started.

If the warning light does not come on then, haveit fixed so it will be ready to warn you if thereis a problem. If it stays on, or comes on whenyou are driving, there may be a problem with yourStabiliTrak® system and your vehicle may needservice. When this warning light is on, the systemis off and will not limit wheel spin. Adjust yourdriving accordingly.

This light will also flash when the StabiliTrak®

system is active.

If the StabiliTrak® system warning light comeson and stays on for an extended period oftime when the system is turned on, your vehicleneeds service. See StabiliTrak® System onpage 337 for more information.

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light

The engine coolanttemperature warninglight will come onwhen the enginehas overheated.

If this happens you should pull over and turn offthe engine as soon as possible. See EngineOverheating on page 410 for more information.

Notice: Driving with the engine coolanttemperature warning light on could cause yourvehicle to overheat. See Engine Overheatingon page 410. Your vehicle could be damaged,and it might not be covered by your warranty.Never drive with the engine coolanttemperature warning light on.

This light will also come on briefly when startingyour vehicle. If it does not, have your vehicleserviced.

224

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.Under normal driving conditions the gage willread 210°F (100 °C) or less. If the gage pointeris near 260°F (125 °C), the engine is too hot.

It means that your engine coolant has overheated.If you have been operating your vehicle undernormal driving conditions, you should pull off theroad, stop your vehicle and turn off the engineas soon as possible.

See Engine Overheating on page 410 for moreinformation.

Tire Pressure Light

This light comes onbriefly when you turnthe ignition to ON.

It will also come on when one or more of yourtires are significantly underinflated.A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message will accompany the light.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 244for more information.Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to doso. If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure.See Tires on page 435 for more information.This light will flash for about 70 seconds and thenstay on if a problem is detected with the TirePressure Monitor system.See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 444for more information.


225

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operationof the fuel, ignition,and emission controlsystems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto make sure that emissions are at acceptablelevels for the life of the vehicle, helping to producea cleaner environment. The check engine lightcomes on to indicate that there is a problem andservice is required. Malfunctions often will beindicated by the system before any problem isapparent. This can prevent more serious damageto your vehicle. This system is also designedto assist your service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after awhile, the emission controlsmight not work as well, your vehicle’s fueleconomy might not be as good, and the enginemight not run as smoothly. This could leadto costly repairs that might not be coveredby your warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof your vehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other than those of the sameTire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and can causethis light to come on. Modifications to thesesystems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This could alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 385.

226

This light should come on, as a check to showyou it is working, when the ignition is on and theengine is not running. If the light does notcome on, have it repaired. This light will alsocome on during a malfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and could damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosis andservice might be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected onyour vehicle. Diagnosis and service might berequired.

If the Light is FlashingThe following can prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reduce vehicle speed.

• Avoid hard accelerations.

• Avoid steep uphill grades.

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce theamount of cargo being hauled as soonas it is possible.

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe todo so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place topark the vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds, and restart the engine. If thelight remains on steady, see “If the Light Is OnSteady” following. If the light is still flashing, followthe previous steps and see your dealer/retailerfor service as soon as possible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou might be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 390.The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere. A few drivingtrips with the cap properly installed shouldturn the light off.

227

Did you just drive through a deep puddleof water?If so, your vehicle’s electrical system might bewet. The condition is usually corrected whenthe electrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 388. Poor fuelquality causes the engine not to run as efficientlyas designed. You might notice this as stallingafter start-up, stalling when you put the vehicleinto gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration — these conditionsmight go away once the engine is warmed up.This will be detected by the system and causethe light to turn on.If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your dealer/retailer can check the vehicle.Your dealer/retailer has the proper test equipmentand diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical orelectrical problems that might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance ProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor might begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to helpyour vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if thecheck engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection ifthe OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determinesthat critical emission control systems have notbeen completely diagnosed by the system.The vehicle would be considered not ready forinspection. This can happen if you have recentlyreplaced the battery or if the battery has rundown. The diagnostic system is designedto evaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This can take several daysof routine driving. If you have done this andyour vehicle still does not pass the inspection forlack of OBD system readiness, your dealer/retailercan prepare the vehicle for inspection.

228

Oil Pressure Light

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can becomeso hot that it catches fire. You or otherscould be burned. Check your oil as soon aspossible and have your vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

This light tells you ifthere could be aproblem with yourengine oil pressure.

The light comes on when you turn your key to ONor START. It goes off once you start your engine.That is a check to be sure the light works. If it doesnot come on, be sure to have it fixed so it will bethere to warn you if something goes wrong.

When the light comes on and stays on, it meansthat oil is not flowing through your engine properly.You could be low on oil and you might havesome other system problem.

Security Light

This light flasheswhen the securitysystem is activated.

For more information, see Theft-DeterrentSystems on page 118.

229

Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light willcome on when the foglamps are in use.

The light will go out when the fog lamps areturned off. See Fog Lamps on page 186 formore information.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes onwhenever you set thecruise control.

The light goes out when the cruise control isturned off. See Cruise Control on page 180 formore information.

Highbeam On Light

This light comes onwhen the high-beamheadlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changeron page 176 for more information.

Tow/Haul Mode Light

This light comeson when theTow/Haul modehas been activated.

For more information, see Tow/Haul Modeon page 133.

230

Fuel Gage

When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells youabout how much fuel you have left in your tank.

The gage will first indicate empty before youare out of fuel, and you should get more fuel assoon as possible.

When the fuel tank is low on fuel, the FUELLEVEL LOW message will appear on theDriver Information Center (DIC). For moreinformation see DIC Warnings and Messageson page 244.

Here are some situations you may experience withyour fuel gage. None of these indicate a problemwith the fuel gage.

• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts offbefore the gage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up thanthe fuel gage indicated. For example, thegage may have indicated the tank was half full,but it actually took a little more or less thanhalf the tank’s capacity to fill the tank.

• The gage goes back to empty when you turnoff the ignition.


231

Driver Information Center (DIC)Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).

The DIC displays information about your vehicle.It also displays warning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

All messages will appear in the DIC displaylocated at the top of the instrument panel cluster.

The DIC comes on when the ignition is on.After a short delay, the DIC will display theinformation that was last displayed before theengine was turned off.

The DIC also displays a shift lever positionindicator on the bottom line of the display. SeeAutomatic Transmission Operation on page 129for more information.

The outside air temperature also displays on theDIC when viewing the trip and fuel information.The outside air temperature automaticallyappears in the top right corner of the DIC display.If there is a problem with the system thatcontrols the temperature display, the numberswill be replaced with dashes. If this occurs,have the vehicle serviced.

If your vehicle has DIC buttons, see “DIC Operationand Displays (With DIC Buttons)” later in thissection and DIC Vehicle Customization (With DICButtons) on page 255 for the displays available.

If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, see“DIC Operation and Displays (Without DICButtons)” later in this section for the displaysavailable.

232

DIC Operation and Displays(With DIC Buttons)If your vehicle has DIC buttons, the informationbelow explains the operation of this system.

The DIC has different displays which can beaccessed by pressing the DIC buttons locatedon the instrument panel. See Instrument PanelOverview on page 170 for more information.

The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle systeminformation, and warning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

The DIC also allows some features to becustomized. See DIC Vehicle Customization(With DIC Buttons) on page 255 for moreinformation.

If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you can alsouse the trip odometer reset stem to view theodometer and trip odometers.

DIC Buttons

The buttons are the set/reset, customization,vehicle information, and trip/fuel buttons. Thebutton functions are detailed in the following pages.

V (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or resetcertain functions and to turn off or acknowledgemessages on the DIC.

U (Customization): Press this button tocustomize the feature settings on your vehicle.See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons)on page 255 for more information.

233

T (Vehicle Information): Press this button todisplay the oil life, park assist on vehicles with thisfeature, units, tire pressure readings, Tire PressureMonitor (TPM) system programming, and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter programming.

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to display theodometer, trip odometers, fuel range, averageeconomy, timer, fuel used, and average speed.

Vehicle Information Menu Items

T (Vehicle Information): Press this buttonto scroll through the following menu items:

OIL LIFEPress the vehicle information button until OIL LIFEREMAINING displays. This display shows anestimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. If yousee 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display,that means 99% of the current oil life remains.The engine oil life system will alert you to changethe oil on a schedule consistent with yourdriving conditions.

When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message will appear onthe display. See “CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON” under DIC Warnings and Messageson page 244. You should change the oil assoon as you can. See Engine Oil on page 397.In addition to the engine oil life systemmonitoring the oil life, additional maintenanceis recommended in the Maintenance Schedulein this manual. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 502 for more information.

Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE displayyourself after each oil change. It will not resetitself. Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFEdisplay accidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed. It cannotbe reset accurately until the next oil change.To reset the engine oil life system, see EngineOil Life System on page 400.

234

PARK ASSISTIf your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system, press the vehicleinformation button until PARK ASSIST displays.This display allows the system to be turned on oroff. Once in this display, press the set/reset buttonto select between ON or OFF. If you choose ON,the system will be turned on. If you choose OFF,the system will be turned off. The URPA systemautomatically turns back on after each vehicle start.When the URPA system is turned off and thevehicle is shifted out of PARK (P), the DIC willdisplay the PARK ASSIST OFF message as areminder that the system has been turned off.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 244and Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) onpage 194 for more information.

UNITSPress the vehicle information button until UNITSdisplays. This display allows you to select betweenEnglish or Metric units of measurement. Once inthis display, press the set/reset button to selectbetween ENGLISH or METRIC units. All of thevehicle information will then be displayed in theunit of measurement selected.

FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRESThe pressure for each tire can be viewed in theDIC. The tire pressure will be shown in eitherpounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).Press the vehicle information button until theDIC displays FRONT TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ##RIGHT ##. Press the vehicle information buttonagain until the DIC displays REAR TIRESPSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.

If a low or high tire pressure condition is detectedby the system while driving, a message advisingyou to check the pressure in a specific tirewill appear in the display. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 442 and DIC Warningsand Messages on page 244 for more information.

If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead ofa value, there may be a problem with your vehicle.If this consistently occurs, see your dealer/retailerfor service.

235

RELEARN TIRE POSITIONSAfter rotating the tires or after replacing a tireor sensor, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) systemmust re-learn the tire positions. To re-learn thetire positions, see Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 444. See Tire Inspection and Rotationon page 448 and DIC Warnings and Messageson page 244 for more information.

RELEARN REMOTE KEYThis display allows you to match Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. To matcha RKE transmitter to your vehicle, do the following:

1. Press the vehicle information button untilPRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEYdisplays.

2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTEKEY LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.

3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttonson the first transmitter at the same time forabout 15 seconds.On vehicles with memory recall seats, the firsttransmitter learned will match driver 1 andthe second will match driver 2.A chime will sound indicating that thetransmitter is matched.

4. To match additional transmitters at this time,repeat Step 3.Each vehicle can have a maximum ofeight transmitters matched to it.

5. To exit the programming mode, you mustcycle the key to OFF.

Blank DisplayThis display shows no information.

236

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scrollthrough the following menu items:

ODOMETERPress the trip/fuel button until ODOMETERdisplays. This display shows the distance thevehicle has been driven in either miles (mi)or kilometers (km). Pressing the trip odometerreset stem will also display the odometer.

To switch between English and metricmeasurements, see “UNITS” later in this section.

TRIP A and TRIP BPress the trip/fuel button until TRIP A or TRIP Bdisplays. This display shows the current distancetraveled in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km)since the last reset for each trip odometer. Bothtrip odometers can be used at the same time.Pressing the trip odometer reset stem willalso display the trip odometers.

Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separatelyby pressing the set/reset button or the trip odometerreset stem while the desired trip odometer isdisplayed.

The trip odometer has a feature called theretro-active reset. This can be used to set thetrip odometer to the number of miles (kilometers)driven since the ignition was last turned on.This can be used if the trip odometer is not resetat the beginning of the trip.

To use the retro-active reset feature, press andhold the set/reset button for at least four seconds.The trip odometer will display the number ofmiles (mi) or kilometers (km) driven since theignition was last turned on and the vehiclewas moving. Once the vehicle begins moving,the trip odometer will accumulate mileage.For example, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles(8 km) before it is started again, and thenthe retro-active reset feature is activated, thedisplay will show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehiclebegins moving, the display will then increaseto 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.

237

If the retro-active reset feature is activated afterthe vehicle is started, but before it begins moving,the display will show the number of miles (mi)or kilometers (km) that were driven during thelast ignition cycle.

RANGEPress the trip/fuel button until RANGE displays.This display shows the approximate numberof remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) thevehicle can be driven without refueling. Thedisplay will show LOW if the fuel level is low.

The fuel range estimate is based on an averageof the vehicle’s fuel economy over recentdriving history and the amount of fuel remainingin the fuel tank. This estimate will change if drivingconditions change. For example, if driving intraffic and making frequent stops, this displaymay read one number, but if the vehicle is drivenon a freeway, the number may change eventhough the same amount of fuel is in the fueltank. This is because different driving conditionsproduce different fuel economies. Generally,freeway driving produces better fuel economythan city driving. Fuel range cannot be reset.

AVG (Average) ECONOMYPress the trip/fuel button until AVG ECONOMYdisplays. This display shows the approximateaverage miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km). This number iscalculated based on the number of mpg (L/100 km)recorded since the last time this menu item wasreset. To reset AVG ECONOMY, press andhold the set/reset button.

TIMERPress the trip/fuel button until TIMER displays.This display can be used as a timer.To start the timer, press the set/reset button whileTIMER is displayed. The display will show theamount of time that has passed since the timerwas last reset, not including time the ignition is off.Time will continue to be counted as long as theignition is on, even if another display is being shownon the DIC. The timer will record up to 99 hours,59 minutes and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after whichthe display will return to zero.To stop the timer, press the set/reset button brieflywhile TIMER is displayed.To reset the timer to zero, press and hold theset/reset button while TIMER is displayed.

238

FUEL USEDPress the trip/fuel button until FUEL USEDdisplays. This display shows the number ofgallons (gal) or liters (L) of fuel used since thelast reset of this menu item. To reset the fuelused information, press and hold the set/resetbutton while FUEL USED is displayed.

AVG (Average) SPEEDPress the trip/fuel button until AVG SPEEDdisplays. This display shows the averagespeed of the vehicle in miles per hour (mph)or kilometers per hour (km/h). This average iscalculated based on the various vehicle speedsrecorded since the last reset of this value.To reset the value to zero, press and hold theset/reset button.

Blank DisplayThis display shows no information.

DIC Operation and Displays(Without DIC Buttons)If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, theinformation below explains the operation ofthis system.

The DIC has different displays which can beaccessed by pressing the trip odometer reset stemlocated on the instrument panel cluster. Pressingthe trip odometer reset stem will also turn off,or acknowledge, DIC messages.

The DIC displays trip and vehicle systeminformation, and warning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, youcan use the trip odometer reset stem to view thefollowing displays: odometer, trip odometers,oil life, park assist menu for vehicles withthe Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system programming,Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitterprogramming, units, and display language.

239

If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you can use thetrip odometer reset stem to view the followingdisplays: odometer and trip odometers.

Trip Odometer Reset Stem Menu ItemsODOMETERPress the trip odometer reset stem untilODOMETER displays. This display shows thedistance the vehicle has been driven in eithermiles (mi) or kilometers (km).

To switch between English and metricmeasurements, see “UNITS” later in this section.

TRIP A or TRIP BPress the trip odometer reset stem until TRIP Aor TRIP B displays. This display shows thecurrent distance traveled in either miles (mi) orkilometers (km) since the last reset for eachtrip odometer. Both trip odometers can be usedat the same time.

Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separatelyby pressing and holding the trip odometer resetstem while the desired trip odometer is displayed.

The trip odometer has a feature called theretro-active reset. This can be used to set the tripodometer to the number of miles (kilometers) drivensince the ignition was last turned on. This can beused if the trip odometer is not reset at thebeginning of the trip.

To use the retro-active reset feature, press andhold the trip odometer reset stem for at leastfour seconds. The trip odometer will display thenumber of miles (mi) or kilometers (km) drivensince the ignition was last turned on and thevehicle was moving. Once the vehicle beginsmoving, the trip odometer will accumulate mileage.For example, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles(8 km) before it is started again, and thenthe retro-active reset feature is activated, thedisplay will show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehiclebegins moving, the display will then increaseto 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.

If the retro-active reset feature is activated afterthe vehicle is started, but before it begins moving,the display will show the number of miles (mi)or kilometers (km) that were driven during thelast ignition cycle.

240

OIL LIFETo access this display, the vehicle must be inPARK (P). Press the trip odometer reset stem untilOIL LIFE REMAINING displays. This displayshows an estimate of the oil’s remaining usefullife. If you see 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on thedisplay, that means 99% of the current oil liferemains. The engine oil life system will alert youto change the oil on a schedule consistentwith your driving conditions.

When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message will appear onthe display. See “CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON” under DIC Warnings and Messageson page 244. You should change the oil assoon as you can. See Engine Oil on page 397.

In addition to the engine oil life systemmonitoring the oil life, additional maintenance isrecommended in the Maintenance Schedulein this manual. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 502 for more information.

Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFEdisplay yourself after each oil change. It will notreset itself. Also, be careful not to reset theOIL LIFE display accidentally at any time otherthan when the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately until the next oilchange. To reset the engine oil life system,see Engine Oil Life System on page 400.

241

PARK ASSISTTo access this display, the vehicle must be inPARK (P). If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) system, press the tripodometer reset stem until PARK ASSIST displays.This display allows the system to be turned onor off. Once in this display, press and hold thetrip odometer reset stem to select between ONor OFF. If you choose ON, the system willbe turned on. If you choose OFF, the system willbe turned off. The URPA system automaticallyturns back on after each vehicle start. When theURPA system is turned off and the vehicle isshifted out of PARK (P), the DIC will display thePARK ASSIST OFF message as a reminderthat the system has been turned off. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 244 andUltrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) onpage 194 for more information.

RELEARN TIRE POSITIONSTo access this display, the vehicle must be inPARK (P). After rotating the tires or after replacinga tire or sensor, the Tire Pressure Monitor(TPM) system must re-learn the tire positions.To re-learn the tire positions, see Tire PressureMonitor System on page 444. See Tire Inspectionand Rotation on page 448 and DIC Warningsand Messages on page 244 for more information.

RELEARN REMOTE KEYTo access this display, the vehicle must be inPARK (P). This display allows you to matchRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters to yourvehicle. To match an RKE transmitter to yourvehicle, do the following:

1. Press the trip odometer reset stem untilRELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.

2. Press and hold the trip odometer reset stemuntil REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE isdisplayed.

242

3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttonson the first transmitter at the same time forabout 15 seconds.On vehicles with memory recall seats, thefirst transmitter learned will match driver 1and the second will match driver 2.A chime will sound indicating that thetransmitter is matched.

4. To match additional transmitters at this time,repeat Step 3.Each vehicle can have a maximum ofeight transmitters matched to it.

5. To exit the programming mode, you mustcycle the key to OFF.

UNITSTo access this display, the vehicle must be inPARK (P). Press the trip odometer reset stemuntil UNITS displays. This display allows you toselect between English or Metric units ofmeasurement. Once in this display, press andhold the trip odometer reset stem to selectbetween ENGLISH or METRIC units. All of thevehicle information will then be displayed inthe unit of measurement selected.

DISPLAY LANGUAGETo access this display, the vehicle must be inPARK (P). This display allows you to selectthe language in which the DIC messages willappear. To select a language, do the following:

1. Press the trip odometer reset stem untilDISPLAY LANGUAGE, LANGUE AFFICHAGE(French), or MOSTRAR IDIOMA (Spanish)displays.

2. Continue to press and hold the trip odometerreset stem to scroll through all of the availablelanguages.The available languages are ENGLISH(default), FRANCAIS (French), and ESPANOL(Spanish).

3. Once the desired language is displayed,release the trip odometer reset stem toset your choice.

243

DIC Warnings and MessagesMessages are displayed on the DIC to notify thedriver that the status of the vehicle has changedand that some action may be needed by the driverto correct the condition. Multiple messages mayappear one after another.

Some messages may not require immediateaction, but you can press any of the DIC buttonson the instrument panel or the trip odometerreset stem on the instrument panel clusterto acknowledge that you received the messagesand to clear them from the display.

Some messages cannot be cleared from the DICdisplay because they are more urgent. Thesemessages require action before they can becleared. You should take any messages thatappear on the display seriously and remember thatclearing the messages will only make themessages disappear, not correct the problem.

The following are the possible messages that canbe displayed and some information about them.

ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFFIf your vehicle has the All-Wheel Drive (AWD)system, this message displays when thereis a compact spare tire on the vehicle, whenthe Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) warning lightcomes on, or when the rear differential fluidis overheating. This message turns off when thedifferential fluid cools.

The AWD system is disabled until the compactspare tire is replaced by a full-size tire. If thewarning message is still on after putting on thefull-size tire, you need to reset the warningmessage. To reset the warning message, turnthe ignition off and then back on again after30 seconds. If the message stays on, see yourdealer/retailer right away. See All-Wheel Drive(AWD) System on page 339 for more information.

AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL OFFThis message displays when the automaticheadlamps are turned off. This message clearsitself after 10 seconds.

244

AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL ONThis message displays when the automaticheadlamps are turned on. This message clearsitself after 10 seconds.

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVEThis message displays when the system detectsthat the battery voltage is dropping below expectedlevels. The battery saver system starts reducingcertain features of the vehicle that you may be ableto notice. At the point that the features are disabled,this message is displayed. It means that the vehicleis trying to save the charge in the battery.Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allowthe battery to recharge.The normal battery voltage range is11.5 to 15.5 volts.

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONThis message displays when the engine oil needsto be changed. When you change the engine oil, besure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage. See Engine Oil Life System on page 400for information on how to reset the message.See Engine Oil on page 397 and ScheduledMaintenance on page 502 for more information.

CHECK TIRE PRESSUREThis message displays when the pressure inone or more of the vehicle’s tires need tobe checked. This message also displays LEFTFRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT REAR, orRIGHT REAR to indicate which tire needs to bechecked. You can receive more than one tirepressure message at a time. To read the othermessages that may have been sent at thesame time, press the set/reset button or the tripodometer reset stem. If a tire pressure messageappears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can.Have the tire pressures checked and set to thoseshown on the Tire Loading Information label.See Tires on page 435, Loading Your Vehicleon page 361, and Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 442. The DIC display also shows thetire pressure values for the front and rear tires bypressing the vehicle information button. See“DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons)”earlier in this section. If the tire pressure islow, the low tire pressure warning light comes on.See Tire Pressure Light on page 225.

245

CRUISE SET TO XXXThis message displays whenever the cruise controlis set. See Cruise Control on page 180 for moreinformation.

DRIVER DOOR OPENThis message displays and a chime sounds if thedriver’s door is not fully closed and the vehicleis in a drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle,check the door for obstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the message still appearson the DIC.

ENGINE HOT A/C (Air Conditioning) OFFThis message displays when the engine coolantbecomes hotter than the normal operatingtemperature. See Engine Coolant TemperatureGage on page 225. To avoid added strain ona hot engine, the air conditioning compressorautomatically turns off. When the coolanttemperature returns to normal, the air conditioningcompressor turns back on. You can continue todrive your vehicle.If this message continues to appear, have thesystem repaired by your dealer/retailer as soonas possible to avoid damage to the engine.

ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OILIf your vehicle has an oil level sensor, thismessage displays if the oil level in the vehicleis low. Check the oil level and correct it asnecessary. You may need to let the vehicle coolor warm up and cycle the ignition to be surethis message clears. See Engine Oil on page 397for additional information.

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINENotice: If you drive your vehicle while theengine is overheating, severe engine damagemay occur. If an overheat warning appearson the instrument panel cluster and/orDIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible.Do not increase the engine speed abovenormal idling speed. See Engine Overheatingon page 410 for more information.

This message displays when the engine coolanttemperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicleto idle until it cools down. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gage on page 225.

See Overheated Engine Protection OperatingMode on page 412 for information on driving toa safe place in an emergency.

246

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINENotice: If you drive your vehicle while theengine is overheating, severe engine damagemay occur. If an overheat warning appears onthe instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stopthe vehicle as soon as possible. See EngineOverheating on page 410 for more information.

This message displays and a chime soundsif the engine cooling system reaches unsafetemperatures for operation. Stop and turn off thevehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoidsevere damage. This message clears when theengine has cooled to a safe operating temperature.

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCEDThis message displays and a chime sounds whenthe cooling system temperature gets too hotand the engine further enters the engine coolantprotection mode. See Engine Overheating onpage 410 for further information.

This message also displays when the vehicle’sengine power is reduced. Reduced engine powercan affect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there is no reductionin performance, proceed to your destination.The performance may be reduced the next timethe vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven ata reduced speed while this message is on, butacceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytimethis message stays on, the vehicle should betaken to your dealer/retailer for service as soonas possible.

FUEL LEVEL LOWThis message displays and a chime sounds ifthe fuel level is low. Refuel as soon as possible.See Fuel Gage on page 231 and Fuel on page 387for more information.

247

HEATED WASH (Washer)FLUID SYSTEM OFFIf your vehicle has this feature, this messagedisplays when you manually turn off the heatedwindshield washer fluid system or when thesystem automatically turns off. See “HeatedWindshield Washer” under Windshield Washeron page 177 for more information. This messageclears itself after 10 seconds.

HEATING WASH (Washer)FLUID WASH (Washer)WIPES PENDINGIf your vehicle has this feature, this messagedisplays when you turn on the heated windshieldwasher fluid system. See “Heated WindshieldWasher” under Windshield Washer on page 177for more information.

HOOD OPENThis message displays and a chime sounds if thehood is not fully closed. Stop and turn off thevehicle, check the hood for obstructions, and closethe hood again. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CAREThis message displays when the outside airtemperature is cold enough to create icy roadconditions. Adjust your driving accordingly.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPENThis message displays and a chime sounds if thedriver’s side rear door is not fully closed andthe vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn offthe vehicle, check the door for obstructions,and close the door again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC.

LIFTGATE OPENThis message displays and a chime sounds ifthe liftgate is open while the ignition is in ON.Turn off the vehicle and check the liftgate.Restart the vehicle and check for the messageon the DIC display.

248

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle whilethe engine oil pressure is low, severe enginedamage may occur. If a low oil pressurewarning appears on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), stop the vehicle as soon aspossible. Do not drive the vehicle until thecause of the low oil pressure is corrected. SeeEngine Oil on page 397 for more information.

This message displays if low oil pressurelevels occur. Stop the vehicle as soon as safelypossible and do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has been corrected.Check the oil as soon as possible and haveyour vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.See Engine Oil on page 397.

PARK ASSIST OFFIf your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system, after the vehicle hasbeen started and shifted out of PARK (P),this message displays to remind the driverthat the URPA system has been turned off.

Press the set/reset button or the trip odometerreset stem to acknowledge this message andclear it from the DIC display. To turn the URPAsystem back on, see Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) on page 194.

PASSENGER DOOR OPENThis message displays and a chime sounds ifthe passenger’s door is not fully closed andthe vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn offthe vehicle, check the door for obstructions,and close the door again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC.

REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVEThis message displays while you are matchinga Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter toyour vehicle. See “Matching Transmitter(s) toYour Vehicle” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 100 and DICOperation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) onpage 233 or DIC Operation and Displays (WithoutDIC Buttons) on page 239 for more information.

249

REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEYThis message displays if a Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter battery is low. The batteryneeds to be replaced in the transmitter. See“Battery Replacement” under Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation on page 100.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPENThis message displays and a chime sounds if thepassenger’s side rear door is not fully closedand the vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door for obstructions,and close the door again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC.

SERVICE A/C (Air Conditioning)SYSTEMThis message displays when the electronicsensors that control the air conditioning andheating systems are no longer working. Havethe climate control system serviced by yourdealer/retailer if you notice a drop in heatingand air conditioning efficiency.

SERVICE AIR BAGThis message displays if there is a problem withthe airbag system. Have your dealer/retailerinspect the system for problems. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 217 and Airbag Systemon page 76 for more information.

SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVEIf your vehicle has the All-Wheel Drive (AWD)system, this message displays if there is a problemwith this system. If this message appears, stopas soon as possible and turn off the vehicle.Restart the vehicle after 30 seconds and check forthe message on the DIC display. If the messageis still displayed or appears again when youbegin driving, the AWD system needs service.See your dealer/retailer.

250

SERVICE BATTERY CHARGINGSYSTEMOn some vehicles, this message displays if thereis a problem with the battery charging system.Under certain conditions, the charging system lightmay also turn on in the instrument panel cluster.See Charging System Light on page 220.Driving with this problem could drain the battery.Turn off all unnecessary accessories. Havethe electrical system checked as soon as possible.See your dealer/retailer.

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEMThis message displays along with the brakesystem warning light if there is a problem withthe brake system. See Brake System WarningLight on page 222. If this message appears, stopas soon as possible and turn off the vehicle.Restart the vehicle and check for the message onthe DIC display. If the message is still displayedor appears again when you begin driving, thebrake system needs service as soon as possible.See your dealer/retailer.

SERVICE PARK ASSISTIf your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system, this message displaysif there is a problem with the URPA system.Do not use this system to help you park. SeeUltrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) onpage 194 for more information. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

SERVICE POWER STEERINGThis message displays when a problem isdetected with the power steering system. Whenthis message is displayed, you may notice thatthe effort required to steer the vehicle increasesor feels heavier, but you will still be able tosteer the vehicle. Have your vehicle servicedby your dealer/retailer immediately.

251

SERVICE STABILITRAKThis message displays if there is a problem withthe StabiliTrak® system. If this message appears,try to reset the system. Stop; turn off the enginefor at least 15 seconds; then start the engineagain. If this message still comes on, it meansthere is a problem. See your dealer/retailerfor service. The vehicle is safe to drive, however,you do not have the benefit of StabiliTrak®,so reduce your speed and drive accordingly.

SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEMThis message displays when there is a problemwith the theft-deterrent system. The vehicle mayor may not restart so you may want to takethe vehicle to your dealer/retailer before turningoff the engine. See PASS-Key® III+ Operationon page 121 for more information.

SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEMThis message displays if a part on the TirePressure Monitor (TPM) system is not workingproperly. If you drive your vehicle while any ofthe four sensors are missing or inoperable,the warning comes on in about 20 minutes.A sensor would be missing, for example, if youput different wheels on your vehicle withouttransferring the sensors. If the warning comes onand stays on, there may be a problem with theTPM. See your dealer/retailer.

SERVICE TRACTION CONTROLThis message displays when there is a problemwith the Traction Control System (TCS). Whenthis message is displayed, the system will not limitwheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. Seeyour dealer/retailer for service. See StabiliTrak®


252

SERVICE TRANSMISSIONThis message displays when there is a problemwith the transmission. See your dealer/retailerfor service.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOONThis message displays when a non-emissionsrelated malfunction occurs. Have the vehicleserviced by your dealer/retailer as soon aspossible.

SPEED LIMITED TO XXX MPH (KM/H)This message displays when your vehicle speedis limited to 80 mph (128 km/h) because thevehicle detects a problem in the speed variableassist steering system. Have your vehicle servicedby your dealer/retailer.

STARTING DISABLED SERVICETHROTTLEThis message displays when your vehicle’s throttlesystem is not functioning properly. Have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.

THEFT ATTEMPTEDThis message displays if the content theft-deterrentsystem has detected a break-in attempt whileyou were away from your vehicle. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 118 for more information.

TIGHTEN GAS CAPThis message may display along with the checkengine light on the instrument panel cluster ifthe vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened properly.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 226.Reinstall the fuel cap fully. See Filling the Tankon page 390. The diagnostic system can determineif the fuel cap has been left off or improperlyinstalled. A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuelto evaporate into the atmosphere. A few drivingtrips with the cap properly installed should turnthis light and message off.

253

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVEThis message displays when the Tire PressureMonitor (TPM) system is re-learning the tirepositions on your vehicle. See DIC Operation andDisplays (With DIC Buttons) on page 233 or DICOperation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) onpage 239 for more information. The tire positionsmust be re-learned after rotating the tires or afterreplacing a tire or sensor. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 448, Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 444, and Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 442 for more information.

TRACTION CONTROL OFFThis message displays when the Traction ControlSystem (TCS) is turned off. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See StabiliTrak® System on page 337for more information. This message clears itselfafter 10 seconds.

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINENotice: If you drive your vehicle while thetransmission fluid is overheating and thetransmission temperature warning is displayedon the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, youcan damage the transmission. This could leadto costly repairs that would not be covered byyour warranty. Do not drive your vehicle withoverheated transmission fluid or while thetransmission temperature warning is displayed.

This message displays along with a continuouschime if the transmission fluid in the vehiclegets hot. Driving with the transmission fluidtemperature high can cause damage to thevehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it idle to allowthe transmission to cool. This message clearsand the chime stops when the fluid temperaturereaches a safe level.

254

TURN SIGNAL ONThis message displays and a chime sounds if aturn signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km).Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to theoff position.

WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUIDThis message displays when the windshieldwasher fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluidreservoir as soon as possible. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 396 for thelocation of the windshield washer fluid reservoir.Also, see Windshield Washer Fluid on page 420for more information.

DIC Vehicle Customization(With DIC Buttons)Your vehicle may have customization capabilitiesthat allow you to program certain features toone preferred setting. Customization featurescan only be programmed to one setting onthe vehicle and cannot be programmed to apreferred setting for two different drivers.

All of the customization options may not beavailable on your vehicle. Only the optionsavailable will be displayed on the DIC.

The default settings for the customization featureswere set when your vehicle left the factory,but may have been changed from their defaultstate since then.

The customization preferences are automaticallyrecalled.

255

To change customization preferences, use thefollowing procedure.

Entering the Feature Settings Menu1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle

in PARK (P).To avoid excessive drain on the battery,it is recommended that the headlamps areturned off.

2. Press the customization button to enter thefeature settings menu. If the menu is notavailable, FEATURE SETTINGS AVAILABLEIN PARK will display. Before entering themenu, make sure the vehicle is in PARK (P).

Feature Settings Menu ItemsThe following are customization features that allowyou to program settings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISHThis feature will only display if a language otherthan English has been set. This feature allowsyou to change the language in which the DICmessages appear to English.

Press the customization button until thePRESS V TO DISPLAY IN ENGLISH,APPUYER V POUR AFFICHAGE ANGLAIS inFrench, or PULSE V PARA MOSTRAR INGLES inSpanish screen appears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button once to display allDIC messages in English.

DISPLAY LANGUAGEThis feature allows you to select the language inwhich the DIC messages will appear.

Press the customization button until the DISPLAYLANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button once to accessthe settings for this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scroll through thefollowing settings:

ENGLISH (default): All messages will appearin English.

FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French.

ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to thisfeature. The current setting will remain.

256

Choose one of the available settings and pressthe set/reset button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it.

You can also change the language by pressingthe trip odometer reset stem. See “Language”under DIC Operation and Displays (Without DICButtons) earlier in this section for more information.

AUTO DOOR LOCKThis feature allows you to select when the vehicle’sdoors will automatically lock. See ProgrammableAutomatic Door Locks on page 107 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button until AUTO DOORLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The doors willautomatically lock when the vehicle is shifted outof PARK (P).

AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors willautomatically lock when the vehicle speed isabove 8 mph (13 km/h) for three seconds.



AUTO DOOR UNLOCKThis feature allows you to select whether or not toturn off the automatic door unlocking feature. It alsoallows you to select which doors and when thedoors will automatically unlock. See ProgrammableAutomatic Door Locks on page 107 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button until AUTO DOORUNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.

DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s doorwill unlock when the key is taken out of theignition.

257

DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door willunlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).

ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlockwhen the key is taken out of the ignition.

ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors willunlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).



REMOTE DOOR LOCKThis feature allows you to select the type offeedback you will receive when locking the vehiclewith the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.You will not receive feedback when locking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors areopen. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 100 for more information.

Press the customization button until REMOTEDOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: There will be no feedback when you pressthe lock button on the RKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flashwhen you press the lock button on the RKEtransmitter.

HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the secondpress of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.

HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exteriorlamps will flash when you press the lock buttonon the RKE transmitter, and the horn willsound when the lock button is pressed againwithin five seconds of the previous command.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made tothis feature. The current setting will remain.


258

REMOTE DOOR UNLOCKThis feature allows you to select the type offeedback you will receive when unlocking thevehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receive feedback whenunlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if thedoors are open. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 100 for moreinformation.Press the customization button until REMOTEDOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button once to accessthe settings for this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scroll through thefollowing settings:

LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flashwhen you press the unlock button on theRKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps willflash when you press the unlock button onthe RKE transmitter.



DELAY DOOR LOCKThis feature allows you to select whether or notthe locking of the vehicle’s doors and liftgatewill be delayed. When locking the doors andliftgate with the power door lock switch and adoor or the liftgate is open, this feature will delaylocking the doors and liftgate until five secondsafter the last door is closed. You will hearthree chimes to signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use. The key must be out of theignition for this feature to work. You cantemporarily override delayed locking by pressingthe power door lock switch twice or the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter twice. See DelayedLocking on page 107 for more information.

Press the customization button until DELAY DOORLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

OFF: There will be no delayed locking of thevehicle’s doors.

259

ON (default): The doors will not lock untilfive seconds after the last door or the liftgateis closed.



EXIT LIGHTINGThis feature allows you to select the amount oftime you want the exterior lamps to remainon when it is dark enough outside. This happensafter the key is turned from ON to OFF.

Press the customization button until EXITLIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.

30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps willstay on for 30 seconds.

1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on forone minute.

2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on fortwo minutes.



APPROACH LIGHTINGThis feature allows you to select whether or not tohave the exterior lights turn on briefly duringlow light periods after unlocking the vehicle usingthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

Press the customization button until APPROACHLIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when youunlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.

ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, theexterior lights will turn on briefly when you unlockthe vehicle with the RKE transmitter.

260

The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or untilthe lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed,or the vehicle is no longer off. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation onpage 100 for more information.



CHIME VOLUMEThis feature allows you to select the volume levelof the chime.

Press the customization button until CHIMEVOLUME appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

NORMAL (default): The chime volume will be setto a normal level.

LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level.



PARK TILT MIRRORSIf your vehicle has this feature, it allows you toselect whether or not the outside mirror(s)will automatically tilt down when the vehicle isshifted into REVERSE (R). See Outside PowerFoldaway Mirrors on page 143 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button until PARK TILTMIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the following settings:

OFF (default): Neither outside mirror willbe tilted down when the vehicle is shifted intoREVERSE (R).

DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’s outside mirrorwill be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted intoREVERSE (R).

PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger’s outsidemirror will be tilted down when the vehicle isshifted into REVERSE (R).

261

BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and passenger’soutside mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicleis shifted into REVERSE (R).



EASY EXIT SEATIf your vehicle has this feature, it allows you toselect your preference for the automatic easy exitseat feature. See Memory Seat and Mirrors onpage 13 for more information.

Press the customization button until EASY EXITSEAT appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the following settings:

OFF (default): No automatic seat exit recallwill occur.

ON: The driver’s seat will move back when thekey is removed from the ignition.

The automatic easy exit seat movement will onlyoccur one time after the key is removed fromthe ignition. If the automatic movement has alreadyoccurred, and you put the key back in theignition and remove it again, the seat will stay inthe original exit position, unless a memoryrecall took place prior to removing the key again.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made tothis feature. The current setting will remain.


MEMORY SEAT RECALLIf your vehicle has this feature, it allows you toselect your preference for the remote memory seatrecall feature. See Memory Seat and Mirrors onpage 13 for more information.

Press the customization button until MEMORYSEAT RECALL appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

OFF (default): No remote memory seat recallwill occur.

262

ON: The driver’s seat and outside mirrors willautomatically move to the stored driving positionwhen the unlock button on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter is pressed. See “RelearnRemote Key” under DIC Operation and Displays(With DIC Buttons) on page 233 or DIC Operationand Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 239for more information on matching transmittersto driver ID numbers.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to thisfeature. The current setting will remain.Choose one of the available settings and pressthe set/reset button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it.

REMOTE STARTIf your vehicle has this feature, it allows you toturn the remote start off or on. The remotestart feature allows you to start the engine fromoutside of the vehicle using the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter. See “Remote VehicleStart” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 100 for more information.Press the customization button until REMOTESTART appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to access the

settings for this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scroll through thefollowing settings:

OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.

ON (default): The remote start feature willbe enabled.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to thisfeature. The current setting will remain.Choose one of the available settings and pressthe set/reset button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it.

FACTORY SETTINGSThis feature allows you to set all of thecustomization features back to their factorydefault settings.Press the customization button until FACTORYSETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the following settings:

RESTORE ALL (default): The customizationfeatures will be set to their factory default settings.

DO NOT RESTORE: The customization featureswill not be set to their factory default settings.

263


EXIT FEATURE SETTINGSThis feature allows you to exit the featuresettings menu.Press the customization button until FEATURESETTINGS PRESS V TO EXIT appears inthe DIC display. Press the set/reset button onceto exit the menu.If you do not exit, pressing the customizationbutton again will return you to the beginning ofthe feature settings menu.

Exiting the Feature Settings MenuThe feature settings menu will be exited when anyof the following occurs:• The vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).• The vehicle is no longer in ON.• The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons

are pressed.• The end of the feature settings menu is

reached and exited.• A 40 second time period has elapsed with

no selection made.

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for asafer driving experience. See Defensive Drivingon page 330. By taking a few moments to readthis manual and get familiar with your vehicle’saudio system, you can use it with less effort,as well as take advantage of its features.While your vehicle is parked, set up your audiosystem by presetting your favorite radio stations,setting the tone and adjusting the speakers.Then, when driving conditions permit, you cantune to your favorite stations using the presets andsteering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.

264

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with a far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. Here are some ways in which youcan help avoid distraction while driving.While your vehicle is parked:• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.• Familiarize yourself with its operation.• Set up your audio system by presetting your

favorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

Notice: Before adding any sound equipmentto your vehicle, such as an audio system,CD player, CB radio, mobile telephone,or two-way radio, make sure that it can beadded by checking with your dealer/retailer.Also, check federal rules covering mobile radioand telephone units. If sound equipment canbe added, it is very important to do it properly.Added sound equipment may interfere withthe operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio,or other systems, and even damage them.Your vehicle’s systems may interfere withthe operation of sound equipment thathas been added.

Your vehicle has a feature called RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audiosystem can be played even after the ignitionis turned off. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 125 for more information.

265

Setting the Time

MP3 Radios with a Single CD or aSingle CD and DVD PlayerIf your vehicle has a radio with a single CD ora CD and DVD player, it has a clock buttonfor setting the time and date.

To set the time and date, follow the instructions:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC (accessory)or RUN. Press the power knob, located inthe center of the radio, to turn the radio on.

2. Press the clock button and the HR, MIN,MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day,and year) displays.

3. Press the pushbutton located under any oneof the labels that you want to change. Everytime the pushbutton is pressed again, the timeor the date if selected, increases by one.

• Another way to increase the time or date,is to press the right SEEK arrow or theFWD (forward) button.

4. To decrease the time or date, press the leftSEEK arrow or the REV (reverse) button.You can also turn the tune knob, located onthe upper right side of the radio, to adjustthe selected setting.

Changing the Time and Date DefaultSettingsYou can change the time default setting from12 hours to 24 hours or change the date defaultsetting from month/day/year to day/month/year.

To change the time or date default settings,follow these instructions:

1. Press the clock button and then thepushbutton located under the forward arrowthat is currently displayed on the radio screenuntil the time 12H (hour) and 24H (hour),and the date MM/DD (month and day)and DD/MM (day and month) displays.

2. Press the pushbutton located under thedesired option.

3. Press the clock button again to apply theselected default, or let the screen time out.

266

MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc CD PlayerIf your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CDplayer, the radio has a MENU button instead ofthe clock button to set the time and date.

To set the time and date, follow these instructions:

1. Press the MENU button. Once the clockoption displays, press the pushbuttonlocated under that label. The HR, MIN,MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day,and year) displays.

2. Press the pushbutton located under any oneof the time or date setting labels that youwant to change. Every time the pushbuttonis pressed again, the time or the date ifselected, increases by one.

• Another way to increase the time or date,is to press the right SEEK arrow or theFWD (forward) button.

3. To decrease the time or date, press the leftSEEK arrow or the REV (reverse) button.You can also turn the tune knob, located onthe upper right side of the radio, to adjustthe selected setting.

Changing the Time and Date DefaultSettingsYou can change the time default setting from12 hours to 24 hours or change the date defaultsetting from month/day/year to day/month/year.

To change the time or date default settings,follow these instructions:

1. Press the MENU button. Once the clockoption displays, press the pushbuttonlocated under the forward arrow that iscurrently displayed on the radio screenuntil the 12H (hour) and 24H (hour), andthe date MM/DD (month and day) andDD/MM (day and month) displays.

2. Press the pushbutton located under thedesired option.

3. Press the MENU button again to apply theselected default, or let the screen time out.

267

Radio with CD

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System(RDS). The RDS feature is available for use onlyon FM stations that broadcast RDS information.This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and onlyworks when the information is available.

While the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station,the station name or call letters appear on thedisplay. In rare cases, a radio station canbroadcast incorrect information that causes theradio features to work improperly. If this happens,contact the radio station.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes song titleand artist name. A service fee is required inorder to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

Radio with CD shown, Radio withSix-Disc CD (MP3) similar

268

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn thesystem on and off.

Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volume.

Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radiohas Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). WhenSCV is on, the radio volume automatically adjuststo compensate for road and wind noise as youspeed up or slow down while driving. That way,the volume level should sound about the sameas you drive.

To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.

2. Press the MENU button to display the radiosetup menu.

3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTOVOLUM (volume) label on the radio display.

4. Press the pushbutton under the desired SpeedCompensated Volume setting (OFF, Low,Med, or High) to select the level of radio

volume compensation. Press the pushbuttonlocated below the BACK label on theMENU SETUP display or let the display timeout after approximately 10 seconds. Eachhigher setting allows for more radio volumecompensation at faster vehicle speeds.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between AM,FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The selection displays.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

©SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEK arrowto go to the next or to the previous station andstay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEKarrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Press eitherSEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

The radio seeks and scans only stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

269

4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,MP3, and RDS Features): Press the informationbutton to display additional text informationrelated to the current FM-RDS or XM™ station,or MP3 song. A choice of additional informationsuch as: Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT(category) can appear. Continue pressing theinformation button to highlight the desired label,or press the pushbutton positioned under anyone of the labels and the information about thatlabel displays.

When information is not available, No Infodisplays.

Storing a Radio Station as a FavoriteDrivers are encouraged to set up their radiostation favorites while the vehicle is parked.Tune to your favorite stations using the presets,favorites button, and steering wheel controls, if thevehicle has this feature. See Defensive Drivingon page 330.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stationscan be programmed as favorites using thesix pushbuttons positioned below the radio stationfrequency labels and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Press the FAV buttonto go through up to six pages of favorites,each having six favorite stations available perpage. Each page of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)stations. To store a station as a favorite, performthe following steps:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to display the pagewhere you want the station stored.

3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttonsuntil a beep sounds. When that pushbuttonis pressed and released, the station that wasset, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radiostation you want stored as a favorite.

270

The number of favorites pages can be setupusing the MENU button. To setup the numberof favorites pages, perform the following steps:

1. Press the MENU button to display theradio setup menu.

2. Press the pushbutton located below theFAV 1-6 label.

3. Select the desired number of favorites pagesby pressing the pushbutton located below thedisplayed page numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu timeout, to return to the original main radioscreen showing the radio station frequencylabels and to begin the process ofprogramming your favorites for the chosenamount of numbered pages.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble):To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the tuneknob until the tone control labels display. Continuepressing to highlight the desired label, or pressthe pushbutton positioned under the desired label.

Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto adjust the highlighted setting. You can alsoadjust the highlighted setting by pressing either theSEEK, FWD or REV button until the desired levelsare obtained. If a station’s frequency is weak or ifthere is static, decrease the treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to themiddle position, press the pushbutton positionedunder the BASS, MID, or TREB label for more thantwo seconds. A beep sounds and the level adjuststo the middle position.

To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls tothe middle position, press the tune knob for morethan two seconds until a beep sounds.

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to selectpreset equalization settings.

To return to the manual mode, press the EQbutton until Manual displays or start to manuallyadjust the bass, midrange, or treble by pressingthe tune knob.

271

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balanceor fade, press the tune knob until the speakercontrol labels display. Continue pressing tohighlight the desired label, or press the pushbuttonpositioned under the desired label. Turn thetune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjustthe highlighted setting. You can also adjust thehighlighted setting by pressing either the SEEK,FWD (forward), or REV (reverse) button untilthe desired levels are obtained.

To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middleposition, press the pushbutton positioned under theBAL or FADE label for more than two seconds.A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middleposition.

To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controlsto the middle position, press the tune knobfor more than two seconds until a beep sounds.

Finding a Category (CAT) Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button is used tofind XM™ stations when the radio is in the XM™mode. To find XM™ channels within a desiredcategory, perform the following:

1. Press the BAND button until the XM™frequency displays. Press the CAT button todisplay the category labels on the radiodisplay. Continue pressing the CAT buttonuntil the desired category name displays.

2. Press either of the two buttons below thedesired category label to immediately tuneto the first XM™ station associated with thatcategory.

3. Rotate the tune knob, press the buttons belowthe right or left arrows displayed, or press theright or left SEEK buttons to go to the nextor previous XM™ station within the selectedcategory.

4. To exit the category search mode, press theFAV button or BAND button to display yourfavorites again.

272

Undesired XM™ categories can be removedthrough the setup menu. To remove an undesiredcategory, perform the following:


2. Press the pushbutton located below theXM CAT label.

3. Rotate the tune knob to display the categoryyou want removed.

4. Press the pushbutton located under theRemove label until the category namealong with the word Removed displays.

5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.

Removed categories can be restored by pressingthe pushbutton under the Add label when aremoved category is displayed or by pressing thepushbutton under the Restore All label.

You cannot remove or add categories while thevehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory.If Calibration Error displays, it means that theradio has not been configured properly for yourvehicle and it must be returned to your dealer/retailer for service.

Locked: This message displays when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an errorcannot be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.

Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 309 later inthis section for further detail.

Playing a CD (Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying.

273

Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)

LOAD ^: Press this button to load CDs into theCD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.

To insert one CD, do the following:

1. Press and release the load button.

2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.

3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Press and hold the load button fortwo seconds. A beep sounds andLoad All Discs displays.

2. Follow the displayed instruction on when toinsert the discs. The CD player takes up tosix CDs.

3. Press the Load button again to cancelloading more CDs.

If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CDin the player, it stays in the player. Whenthe ignition or radio is turned on, the CD startsplaying where it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.As each new track starts to play, the track numberdisplays.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, checkthe bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of theCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD does not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDsand DVDs on page 328 for more information.

274

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or morethan one CD is inserted into the slot at atime, or an attempt is made to play scratchedor damaged CDs, the CD player could bedamaged. While using the CD player, use onlyCDs in good condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keep the CD playerand the loading slot free of foreign materials,liquids, and debris.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later inthis section.

Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectCD(s). To eject the CD that is currently playing,press and release this button. A beep sounds andEjecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed.

If the CD is not removed, after several seconds,the CD is automatically pulled back into the playerand begins playing.

For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold theeject button for two seconds to eject all discs.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on theCD that is currently playing.

©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to goto the start of the current track, if more thanten seconds on the CD have been played. Pressthe right SEEK arrow to go to the next track.If either SEEK arrow is held, or pressed multipletimes, the player continues moving backwardor forward through the tracks on the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within a track. Youwill hear sound at a reduced volume. Releasethis pushbutton to resume playing the track.The elapsed time of the track displays.

275

\FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within a track.You will hear sound at a reduced volume.Release this button to resume playing the track.The elapsed time of the track displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, thetracks can be listened to in random, ratherthan sequential order, on one CD or all CDs in asix-disc CD player. To use random, do one ofthe following:

• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a single CDplayer, insert a disc partway into the slot ofthe CD player. A RDM label displays.To play the tracks from the single CD inrandom order, press the pushbutton positionedunder the RDM label until Random CurrentDisc is displayed. Press the pushbutton againto turn off random play.

• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-disc CDplayer, press and hold the LOAD button.A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.Insert one or more discs partway into theslot of the CD player.

To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-discCD player in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM labeluntil Randomize All Discs displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn off random play.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The CD remains inside theradio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD when listening to the radio. The CD iconand a message showing disc and/or track numberdisplays when a CD is in the player. Press thisbutton again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device, such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, “no input device found” displays.

276

Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R orCD-RW DiscIf you have a radio with a six-disc CD player, ithas the capability of playing an MP3/WMA CD-Ror CD-RW disc. For more information on howto play an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc,see “Using an MP3” in the index.

CD MessagesCHECK DISC: If this message displays and/orthe CD comes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:• It is very hot. When the temperature

returns to normal, the CD should play.• You are driving on a very rough road.

When the road becomes smoother,the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait aboutan hour and try again.

• There could have been a problem whileburning the CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If theradio displays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your dealer/retailer when reportingthe problem.

Using the Auxiliary Input JackYour radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.You can however, connect an external audiodevice such as an iPod, laptop computer,MP3 player, CD changer, or cassette tape player,etc. to the auxiliary input jack for use as anothersource for audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in PARK (P).See Defensive Driving on page 330 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

277

To use a portable audio player, connect a3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s frontauxiliary input jack. When a device is connected,press the radio CD/AUX button to begin playingaudio from the device over the vehicle speakers.

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase or decreasethe volume of the portable player. You mightneed to do additional volume adjustments fromthe portable device if the volume does not goloud or soft enough.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a portable audio device is playing. Theportable audio device continues playing, so youmight want to stop it or turn it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD when a portable audio device is playing.Press this button again and the system beginsplaying audio from the connected portableaudio player. If a portable audio player is notconnected, “No input device found” displays.

Radio with CD and DVD

If your vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) system, it has a CD/DVD radio. See RearSeat Entertainment System on page 311 formore information on the vehicle’s RSE system.

278

The DVD player is the top slot on the radiofaceplate. The player is capable of reading theDTS programmed DVD Audio or DVD Video media(DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registeredtrademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.).

Manufactured under license from Dolby®

Laboratories. Dolby® and the double-D symbolare trademarks of Dolby® Laboratories.

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System(RDS). The RDS feature is available for use onlyon FM stations that broadcast RDS information.This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and only workswhen the information is available. While theradio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the stationname or call letters display. In rare cases, a radiostation can broadcast incorrect information thatcauses the radio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radio station.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes song titleand artist name. A service fee is required inorder to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn thesystem on and off.

Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volume.

279

Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radiohas Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). WhenSCV is on, the radio volume automatically adjuststo compensate for road and wind noise as youspeed up or slow down while driving. That way, thevolume level should sound about the same asyou drive. To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.


3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTOVOLUM (volume) label on the radio display.

4. Press the pushbutton under the desiredSCV setting (OFF, Low, Med, or High) toselect the level of radio volume compensation.Press the pushbutton located below theBACK label on the MENU SETUP display orlet the display time out after approximately10 seconds. Each higher setting allowsfor more radio volume compensation atfaster vehicle speeds.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between AM,FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The display showsthe selection.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

©SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEKarrow to go to the next or to the previous stationand stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEKarrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Press eitherSEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

The radio seeks and scans only stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

280

4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,MP3, and RDS Features): Press the informationbutton to display additional text informationrelated to the current FM-RDS or XM™ station,or MP3 song. A choice of additional informationsuch as: Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT(category) can appear. Continue pressing theinformation button to highlight the desired label,or press the pushbutton positioned under anyone of the labels and the information about thatlabel displays.

When information is not available, No Infodisplays.

Storing a Radio Station as a FavoriteDrivers are encouraged to set up their radiostation favorites while the vehicle is parked.Tune to your favorite stations using the presets,favorites button, and steering wheel controls,if the vehicle has them. See Defensive Drivingon page 330.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stationscan be programmed as favorites using thesix pushbuttons positioned below the radio stationfrequency labels and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Press the FAV button togo through up to six pages of favorites, eachhaving six favorite stations available per page.Each page of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)stations. To store a station as a favorite, performthe following steps:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to display the pagewhere you want the station stored.

3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttonsuntil a beep sounds. When that pushbuttonis pressed and released, the station that wasset, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radiostation you want stored as a favorite.

281

The number of favorites pages can be setup usingthe MENU button. To setup the number offavorites pages, perform the following steps:


2. Press the pushbutton located below theFAV 1-6 label.

3. Select the desired number of favorites pagesby pressing the pushbutton located below thedisplayed page numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu timeout, to return to the original main radioscreen showing the radio station frequencylabels and to begin the process ofprogramming your favorites for the chosenamount of numbered pages.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble):To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press thetune knob until the tone control labels display.Continue pressing to highlight the desired label,or press the pushbutton positioned under thedesired label. Turn the tune knob clockwiseor counterclockwise to adjust the highlightedsetting. If a station’s frequency is weak or if thereis static, decrease the treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to themiddle position, press the pushbutton positionedunder the BASS, MID, or TREB label for morethan two seconds. A beep sounds and thelevel adjusts to the middle position.

To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls tothe middle position, press the tune knob formore than two seconds until a beep sounds.

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to choosebass and treble equalization settings designed fordifferent types of music. The choices are pop,rock, country, talk, jazz, and classical. SelectingMANUAL or changing bass or treble, returnsthe EQ to the manual bass and treble settings.

282

Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source.

If your radio has a Bose® audio system, the EQsettings are either MANUAL or TALK.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balanceor fade, press the tune knob until the speakercontrol labels display. Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the desired label. Turn the tuneknob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjustthe highlighted setting. You can also adjust thehighlighted setting by pressing either the SEEK,FWD, or REV button until the desired levelsare obtained.

To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middleposition, press the pushbutton positioned under theBAL or FADE label for more than two seconds.A beep sounds and the level adjusts to themiddle position.

To quickly adjust both the balance and fade to themiddle position at one time, press the tune knob formore than two seconds until a beep sounds.

If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is turned on, the radiodisables FADE and mutes the rear speakers.

Finding a Category (CAT) Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to findXM™ stations when the radio is in the XM™mode. To find XM™ channels within a desiredcategory, perform the following:

1. Press the BAND button until the XM™frequency displays. Press the CAT button todisplay the category labels on the radiodisplay. Continue pressing the CAT buttonuntil the desired category name displays.Another way to navigate the category list isto press the REV button or the FWD button.

2. Press either of the two buttons below thedesired category label to immediately tuneto the first XM™ station associated with thatcategory.

3. Turn the tune knob, press the buttons belowthe right or left arrows displayed, or press theright or left SEEK buttons to go to the nextor previous XM™ station within the selectedcategory.

4. To exit the category search mode, press theFAV button or BAND button to display yourfavorites again.

283

Undesired XM™ categories can be removedthrough the setup menu. To remove an undesiredcategory, perform the following:


2. Press the pushbutton located below theXM CAT label.

3. Turn the tune knob to display the categoryyou want removed.

4. Press the pushbutton located under theRemove label until the category namealong with the word Removed displays.

5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.

Removed categories can be restored by pressingthe pushbutton under the Add label when aremoved category is displayed or by pressing thepushbutton under the Restore All label.

You cannot remove or add categories while thevehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory.If Calibration Error displays, it means that theradio has not been configured properly for yourvehicle and it must be returned to yourdealer/retailer for service.

Locked: This message displays when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an errorcannot be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.

Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 309 later inthis section for further detail.

Playing a CD (In Either the DVD orCD Slot)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying (loading a disc into the system,depending on media type and format ranges from5 to 20 seconds for a CD, and up to 30 secondsfor a DVD to begin playing).

284

If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD inthe player, it stays in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD starts playingwhere it stopped, if it was the last selected audiosource. The CD is controlled by the buttonson the radio faceplate or by the RSA unit. SeeRear Seat Audio (RSA) on page 322 for moreinformation. The DVD/CD decks, (upper slot is theDVD deck and the lower slot is the CD deck) ofthe radio are compatible with most audio CDs,CD-R, CD-RW, and MP3s.

When a CD is inserted, the text label DVD or CDsymbol appears on the left side of the radiodisplay. As each new track starts to play, thetrack number displays.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, or

scratched, the CD does not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDsand DVDs on page 328 for more information.


Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or morethan one CD is inserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to play scratched ordamaged CDs, the CD player could bedamaged. While using the CD player, useonly CDs in good condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keep the CDplayer and the loading slot free of foreignmaterials, liquids, and debris.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.


285

Z CD (Eject): Press and release the CD ejectbutton to eject the CD that is currently playingin the bottom slot. A beep sounds and EjectingDisc displays. Once the disc is ejected, RemoveDisc displays. The CD can be removed. If theCD is not removed, after several seconds, theCD is automatically pulled back into the player.

If loading and reading of a CD cannot becompleted, such as unknown format, etc., andthe disc fails to eject, press and hold the DVDeject button for more than five seconds to forcethe disc to eject.

Z DVD (Eject): Press and release the DVDeject button to eject the CD that is currently playingin the top slot. You will hear a beep and EjectingDisc will be displayed. Once the disc is ejected,Remove Disc will appear on display. The CDcan be removed. If the CD is not removed, afterseveral seconds, the CD will be automaticallypulled back into the player.

If loading and reading of a CD cannot becompleted, such as unknown format, etc., andthe disc fails to eject, press and hold the DVDeject button for more than five seconds to forcethe disc to eject.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on theCD that is currently playing.

©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to goto the start of the current track, if more thanfive seconds on the CD have been played. If lessthan five seconds on the CD has played, theprevious track plays. Press the right SEEK arrow togo to the next track. If either SEEK arrow is held, orpressed multiple times, the player continues movingbackward or forward through the tracks on the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within a track. Youwill hear sound at a reduced volume. Releasethis pushbutton to resume playing the track.The elapsed time of the track displays.

\FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within a track.You will hear sound at a reduced volume.Release this button to resume playing the track.The elapsed time of the track displays.

286

RDM (Random): With the random setting, thetracks can be listened to in random, ratherthan sequential order. To play the tracks from theCD, press the DVD/CD AUX button when notsourced to the CD, or insert a disc partway intothe slot. A RDM label displays. Press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM label untilRandom Current Disc displays. Press thepushbutton again to turn off random play.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD or DVD is playing. The CD orDVD remains inside the radio for future listeningor viewing entertainment.

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button tocycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listeningto the radio. The DVD/CD text label and amessage showing the track or chapter numberdisplays when a disc is in either slot. Pressthis button again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device, such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio playeris not connected, “No aux input device” displays.

If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CDslot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles betweenthe two sources and not indicate “No aux inputdevice”. If a front auxiliary device is connected, theDVD/CD AUX button cycles through all availableoptions, such as: DVD slot, CD slot, FrontAuxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available).See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later inthis section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 311for more information.

If a disc is inserted into top DVD slot, the rearseat operator can turn on the video screenand use the remote control to navigate theCD (tracks only) through the remote control.

Audio OutputOnly one audio source can be heard throughthe speakers at one time. An audio sourceis defined as DVD slot, CD slot, XM™, FM/AM,Front Auxiliary Jack, or Rear Auxiliary Jack.

Press the power button to turn the radio on.The radio can be heard through all of thevehicle speakers.

287

Front seat passengers can listen to the radio(AM, FM, or XM) by pressing the BAND buttonor the DVD/CD AUX button to select CD slot, DVDslot, front or rear auxiliary input (if available).

If a playback device is plugged into the radio’sfront auxiliary input jack or the rear auxiliary jack,the front seat passengers are able to listen toplayback from this source through the vehiclespeakers. See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)”later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V)Jacks” under, Rear Seat Entertainment Systemon page 311 for more information.

In some vehicles, depending on audio options,the rear speakers can be muted when theRSA power is turned on. See Rear SeatAudio (RSA) on page 322 for more information.

Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R orCD-RW DiscYour radio with CD and DVD has the capabilityof playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc.For more information on how to play an MP3/WMACD-R or CD-RW disc, see “Using an MP3” inthe index.

CD MessagesIf these messages display and/or the CD comesout, it could be for one of the following reasons:

Optical Error: If the disc was insertedupside down.

Disk Read Error: If a disc was inserted with aninvalid or unknown format.

Player Error: If there are disc LOAD or discEJECT problems.• It is very hot. When the temperature returns

to normal, the CD should play.• You are driving on a very rough road.

When the road becomes smoother, the CDshould play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about anhour and try again.

• There could have been a problem whileburning the CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.If the CD is not playing correctly, for anyother reason, try a known good CD.

288

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If theradio displays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your dealer/retailer when reportingthe problem.

Using the DVD PlayerThe DVD player is controlled by the buttons onthe remote control, or by the RSA system,or by the buttons on the radio faceplate. See“Remote Control”, under Rear Seat EntertainmentSystem on page 311 and Rear Seat Audio(RSA) on page 322 for more information.

The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs ofthe appropriate region code that is printed onthe jacket of most DVDs.

The DVD slot of the radio is compatible withmost audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video,DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW media alongwith MP3 and WMA formats.

If an error message appears on the video screenor the radio, see “DVD Display Error Messages”under, Rear Seat Entertainment System onpage 311 and “DVD Radio Error Messages” inthis section for more information.

Playing a DVD

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this buttonto cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary whenlistening to the radio. The DVD/CD text label anda message showing track or chapter numberdisplays when a disc is in either slot. Pressthis button again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device, such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio playeris not connected, “No aux input device” displays.If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CDslot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles betweenthe two sources and not indicate “No aux inputdevice”. If a front auxiliary device is connected,the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through allavailable options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot,Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available).See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later inthis section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 311for more information.

289

O (Power): Press this knob to turn the radio onor off. Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease the volume. Press and holdthe knob for more than two seconds to turn off theentire radio and Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)system and to start the parental control feature.Parental control prevents the rear seat occupantfrom operating the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) systemor remote control.

A lock symbol appears next to the clock display.The parental control feature remains on untilyou press and hold this button for more thantwo seconds again, or until the driver turns theignition off and exits the vehicle.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to change tracks ona CD or DVD, to manually tune a radio station,or to change clock or date settings, while inthe clock or date setting mode. See the informationgiven earlier in this section specific to the radio,CD, and the DVD. Also, see Setting the Timeon page 266, for setting the clock and date.

©SEEK (Previous Track/Chapter): Press thisbutton to return to the start of the current trackor chapter. Press this button again to go tothe previous track or chapter. This button mightnot work when the DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

SEEK ¨(Next Track/Chapter): Press this buttonto go to the next track or chapter. This buttonmight not work when the DVD is playing thecopyright information or the previews.

s REV (Reverse): Press this button to quicklyreverse the CD or DVD, at five times the normalspeed. The radio displays the elapsed time while infast reverse. To stop fast reversing, press thisbutton again. This button might not work when theDVD is playing the copyright information or thepreviews.

\FWD (Fast Forward): Press this button tofast forward the CD or DVD. The radio displays theelapsed time and fast forwards five times thenormal speed. To stop fast forwarding, press thisbutton again. This button might not work whenthe DVD is playing the copyright information or thepreviews.

290

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD orDVD. If a CD or DVD is ejected, but not removed,the player automatically pulls it back in after15 seconds.

If loading and reading of a CD cannot becompleted, because of an unknown format, etc.,and the disc fails to eject, press and hold theCD eject button for more than five seconds toforce the disc to eject.

DVD-V (Video) Display ButtonsOnce a DVD-V is inserted, the radio display menushows several tag options for DVD playing.Press the pushbuttons located under any desiredtag option during DVD playback. See the tagoptions listed below for more information.

The rear seat passenger can navigate the DVD-Vmenus and controls through the remote control.See “Remote Control”, under Rear SeatEntertainment System on page 311 for moreinformation. The Video Screen automaticallyturns on when the DVD-V is inserted into theDVD slot.

r/j (Play/Pause): Press either the play orpause icon displayed on the radio system,to toggle between pausing or restarting playbackof a DVD. If the forward arrow is showing ondisplay, the system is in pause mode. If the pauseicon is showing on display, the system is inplayback mode. If the DVD screen is off, pressthe play button to turn the screen on.

Some DVDs begin playing after the previews havefinished, although there could be a delay of upto 30 seconds. If the DVD does not begin playingthe movie automatically, press the pushbuttonlocated under the play/pause symbol tag displayedon the radio. If the DVD still does not play, referto the on-screen instructions, if available.

c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.

r (Enter): Press this button to select thechoices that are highlighted in any menu.

291

y (Menu): Press this button to access the DVDmenu. The DVD menu is different on everyDVD. Use the pushbuttons located under thenavigation arrows to navigate the cursor throughthe DVD menu. After making a selection pressthe enter button. This button only operates whenusing a DVD.

Nav (Navigate): Press this button to displaydirectional arrows for navigating through themenus.

q (Return): Press this button to exit thecurrent active menu and return to the previousmenu. This button operates only when a DVD isplaying and a menu is active.

DVD-A (Audio) Display ButtonsOnce a DVD-A is inserted, radio display menushows several tag options for DVD playing. Pressthe pushbuttons located under any desired tagoption during DVD playback. See the tag optionslisted below for more information.

The rear seat operator can navigate the DVD-Amenus and controls through the remote control.See “Remote Control”, under Rear SeatEntertainment System on page 311 for moreinformation. The Video Screen does notautomatically power on when the DVD-A isinserted into the DVD slot. It must be manuallyturned on by the rear seat occupant throughthe remote control power button.

r/j (Play/Pause): Press either the play orpause icon displayed on the radio system,to toggle between pausing or restarting playbackof a DVD. If the forward arrow is showing ondisplay, the system is in pause mode. If the pauseicon is showing on display, the system is inplayback mode.

q Group r: Press this button to cycle throughmusical groupings on the DVD-A disc.

Nav (Navigate): Press this button to displaydirectional arrows for navigating through themenus.

292

e (Audio Stream): Press this button to cyclethrough audio steam formats located on a DVD-Adisc. There is not any type of notification forthe customer to see through the radio display,but VSM has a text field that shows audio streamchanging.

Inserting a DiscTo play a disc, gently insert the disc, with thelabel side up, into the loading slot. The DVD playermight not accept some paper labeled media.The player starts loading the disc into the systemand display “Loading Disc” on the radio display.At the same time, the radio displays a softkeymenu of option(s). Some discs automatically playthe movie while others default to the softkeymenu display which requires the Play, Enter, orNavigation softkeys to be pressed; either bysoftkey or by the rear seat passenger using theremote control.

Loading a disc into the system, dependingon media type and format, ranges from5 to 20 seconds for a CD, and up to30 seconds for a DVD.

Stopping and Resuming PlaybackTo stop playing a DVD without turning off thesystem, press the stop button on the remotecontrol, or press the pushbutton located under thestop or the play/pause symbol tags displayedon the radio. If the radio head is sourced tosomething other than DVD-V, press the DVD/CDAUX button to make DVD-V the active source.

To resume DVD playback, press the play/pausebutton on the remote control, or press thepushbutton located under the play/pause symboltag displayed on the radio. The DVD shouldresume play from where it last stopped if the dischas not been ejected and the stop button hasnot been pressed twice on the remote control.If the disc has been ejected or the stop buttonhas been pressed twice on the remote control,the disc resumes playing at the beginning ofthe disc.

293

Ejecting a DiscPress the eject button on the radio to eject thedisc. If a disc is ejected from the radio, butnot removed, the radio reloads the disc after ashort period of time. The disc is stored in theradio. The radio does not resume play of the discautomatically. If the RSA system is sourced tothe DVD, the movie when reloaded into the DVDplayer begins to play again. In case loadingand reading of a DVD or CD cannot be completed(unknown format, etc.), and the disc fails toeject, press and hold the DVD Eject button morethan 5 seconds to force the disc to eject.

DVD Radio Error MessagesPlayer Error: This message displays when thereare disc load or eject problems.

Disc Format Error: This message displays, if thedisc is inserted with the disc label wrong sideup, or if the disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This message displays, if thedisc is not from a correct region.

No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if nodisc is present when the EJECT or DVD/CD AUXbutton is pressed on the radio.

Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)Your radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.You can however, connect an external audiodevice such as an iPod, laptop computer,MP3 player, CD player, or cassette tape player,etc. to the auxiliary input jack for use as anothersource for audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in PARK (P).See Defensive Driving on page 330 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a1/8 inch (3.5 mm) cable to the radio’s frontauxiliary input jack. When a device is connected,the radio automatically begins playing audiofrom the device over the vehicle speakers.

To listen to a device through the rear auxiliaryinput over the speakers, cycle the DVD/CD Auxbutton on the radio faceplate until “Rear Aux Input”displays on the radio. The RSA or DVD Screenmust be on in order for the radio to source torear auxiliary.

294

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume of the portable player. You might needto do additional volume adjustments fromthe portable device if the volume does not goloud or soft enough.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a portable audio device is playing. Theportable audio device continues playing, so youmight want to stop it or power it off.

DVD/CD AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this buttonto cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary whenlistening to the radio. The DVD/CD text label anda message showing track or chapter numberdisplays when a disc is in either slot. Press thisbutton again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device, such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, “No aux input device” displays.If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot theDVD/CD AUX button cycles between the twosources and not indicate “No aux input device”.If a front auxiliary device is connected, theDVD/CD AUX button cycles through all availableoptions, such as: DVD slot, CD slot, FrontAuxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available).

See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in thissection, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 311 formore information.

Using an MP3 (Radio with CD orSix-Disc CD Player)

MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW DiscThe radio plays MP3/WMA files that were recordedon a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can berecorded with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps,40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps,112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps,224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variablebit rate. Song title, artist name, and albumare available for display by the radio whenrecorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

Compressed AudioThe radio also plays discs that contain bothuncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) andMP3/WMA files. By default the radio shows theMP3 label on the left side of the screen butplays both file formats in the order in whichthey were recorded to the disc.

295

MP3/WMA FormatIf you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on apersonal computer:• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded

on a CD-R or CD-RW disc.• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA

files on one disc.• The CD player is able to read and play a

maximum of 50 folders, 15 playlists, anda combined total of 512 folders and files.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy tofind songs while driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for each album.Each folder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

• Avoid subfolders. The system can support upto eight subfolders deep, however, keep thetotal number of folders to a minimum inorder to reduce the complexity and confusionin trying to locate a particular folder duringplayback.

• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wplextension (other file extensions mightnot work).

• Minimize the length of the file, folder, orplaylist names. Long file, folder, or playlistnames, or a combination of a large number offiles and folders, or playlists can cause theplayer to be unable to play up to the maximumnumber of files, folders, playlists, or sessions.If you wish to play a large number of files,folders, playlists or sessions, minimizethe length of the file, folder, or playlist name.Long names also take up more space onthe display, potentially getting cut off.

• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it.Trying to add music to an existing discmight cause the disc not to function inthe player.

Playlists can be changed by using the previousand next folder buttons, the tuner knob, orthe seek buttons. An MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RWthat was recorded can also be played using nofile folders. If a CD-R or CD-RW containsmore than the maximum of 50 folders, 15 playlists,and a combined total of 512 folders and files,the player lets you access and navigate up to themaximum, but all items over the maximum arenot accessible.

296

Root DirectoryThe root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW istreated as a folder. If the root directory hascompressed audio files, the directory is displayedas the CD label. All files contained directlyunder the root directory are accessed prior to anyroot directory folders. However, playlists (Px)are always accessed before root folders or files.

If a disc contains both uncompressed CDaudio (.CDA) and MP3/WMA files, a folder underthe root directory called CD accesses all ofthe CD audio tracks on the disc.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewherein the file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder does not display.

No FolderWhen the CD-R or CD-RW contains onlycompressed files, the files are located under theroot folder. The next and previous folder functiondoes not display on a CD-R or CD-RW thatwas recorded without folders or playlists.

When the CD-R or CD-RW contains only playlistsand compressed audio files, but no folders, all filesare located under the root folder. The folder downand the folder up buttons search playlists (Px) firstand then goes to the root folder.

Order of PlayTracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW areplayed in the following order:

• Play begins from the first track in the firstplaylist and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each playlist. When the last trackof the last playlist has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first playlist.

• Play begins from the first track in the firstfolder and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each folder. When the last track ofthe last folder has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first folder.

297

When play enters a new folder, the display doesnot automatically show the new folder name unlessyou have chosen the folder mode as the defaultdisplay. The new track name displays.

File System and NamingThe song name that displays is the song namethat is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name isnot present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displaysthe file name without the extension (suchas .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters or fourpages are shortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extension of thefilename does not display.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsPreprogrammed playlists that were created usingWinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however, they cannotbe edited using the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containing compressedaudio song files.

Playing an MP3/WMAInsert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into the slot(Single CD Player), or press the load button andwait for the message to insert disc (Six-DiscCD Player), label side up. The player pulls it in,and the CD-R or CD-RW should begin playing.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-Ror CD-RW in the player, it stays in the player.When the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-Ror CD-RW starts to play where it stopped, if itwas the last selected audio source.

As each new track starts to play, the track numberand song title displays.

If playing a CD-R or CD-RW, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to CD-R or CD-RW quality,the method of recording, the quality of themusic that has been recorded, and the way theCD-R or CD-RW has been handled. There canbe an increase in skipping, difficulty in findingtracks, and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting.

298

If these problems occur, check the bottom surfaceof the CD. If the surface of the CD is damaged,such as cracked, broken, or scratched, theCD does not play properly. If the surface of theCD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs and DVDs onpage 328 for more information.


Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or morethan one CD is inserted into the slot at atime, or an attempt is made to play scratchedor damaged CDs, the CD player could bedamaged. While using the CD player, useonly CDs in good condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keep the CDplayer and the loading slot free of foreignmaterials, liquids, and debris.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recordedCD with a marking pen.


Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectCD-R(s) or CD-RW(s). To eject the CD-R orCD-RW that is currently playing, press and releasethis button. A beep sounds and Ejecting Discdisplays. Once the disc is ejected, Remove Discdisplays. The CD-R or CD-RW can be removed.If the CD-R or CD-RW is not removed, after severalseconds, the CD-R or CD-RW automatically pullsback into the player and begins playing. For theSix-Disc CD player, press and hold the eject buttonfor two seconds to eject all discs.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3/WMAfiles on the CD-R or CD-RW currently playing.

©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to goto the start of the current MP3/WMA file, if morethan ten seconds have played. Press the rightSEEK arrow to go to the next MP3/WMA file.If either SEEK arrow is held or pressed multipletimes, the player continues moving backwardor forward through MP3/WMA files on the CD.

S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

299

c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to thefirst track in the next folder.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within an MP3/WMAfile. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.Release this button to resume playing the file.The elapsed time of the file displays.

\FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within anMP3/WMA file. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume. Release this button to resume playingthe file. The elapsed time of the file displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting,MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW can belistened to in random, rather than sequential order,on one CD-R or CD-RW, or all discs in a six-discCD player. To use random, do one of the following:

• To play MP3/WMA files from the CD-R orCD-RW in random order, press the pushbuttonpositioned under the RDM label until RandomCurrent Disc displays. Press the samepushbutton again to turn off random play.

• To play songs from all CDs loaded in asix-disc CD player in random order, pressthe pushbutton positioned under theRDM label until Randomize All Discs displays.Press the same pushbutton again to turnoff random play.

h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigatorfeature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R orCD-RW in order by artist or album. Pressthe pushbutton located below the music navigatorlabel. The player scans the disc to sort thefiles by artist and album ID3 tag information.It might take several minutes to scan the discdepending on the number of MP3/WMA filesrecorded to the CD-R or CD-RW. The radio canbegin playing while it is scanning the disc inthe background. When the scan is finished, theCD-R or CD-RW begins playing again.

Once the disc has scanned, the player defaultsto playing MP3/WMA files in order by artist.The current artist playing is shown on thesecond line of the display between the arrows.

300

Once all songs by that artist are played, theplayer moves to the next artist in alphabeticalorder on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins playingMP3/WMA files by that artist. To listen toMP3/WMA files by another artist, press thepushbutton located below either arrow button.The CD goes to the next or previous artistin alphabetical order. Continue pressing eitherbutton until the desired artist is displayed.

To change from playback by artist to playbackby album, press the pushbutton located belowthe Sort By label. From the sort screen, pushone of the buttons below the album button.Press the pushbutton below the back label toreturn to the main music navigator screen.Now the album name displays on the second linebetween the arrows and songs from the currentalbum begins to play. Once all songs fromthat album are played, the player moves to thenext album in alphabetical order on the CD-Ror CD-RW and begins playing MP3/WMA filesfrom that album.

To exit music navigator mode, press thepushbutton below the Back label to returnto normal MP3/WMA playback.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The CD remains inside theradio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD when listening to the radio. The CD iconand a message showing disc and/or track numberdisplays when a CD is in the player. Press thisbutton again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, “No Input Device Found” displays.

Using an MP3 (Radio with CDand DVD Player)MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW DiscCompressed Audio or Mixed Mode DiscsThe radio also plays discs that contain bothuncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) andMP3/WMA files depending on which slot the discis loaded into. By default the radio reads onlythe uncompressed audio (.CDA) and ignores theMP3/WMA files on the DVD deck. On the CDdeck, pressing the CAT button toggles betweencompressed and uncompressed audio format, thedefault being the uncompressed format (.CDA).

301

MP3/WMA FormatIf you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on apersonal computer:

• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recordedon a CD-R or CD-RW disc.

• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMAfiles on one disc.

• The CD player (lower slot) is able to readand play a maximum combination of 512 filesand folders. The DVD player (upper slot) isable to read 255 folders, 15 playlists and40 sessions.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy tofind songs while driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for each album.Each folder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

• Avoid subfolders. The system can support upto eight subfolders deep, however, keep thetotal number of folders to a minimum inorder to reduce the complexity and confusionin trying to locate a particular folder duringplayback.

• Make sure playlists have a .m3u, .wpl or .plsextension as other file extensions may not work.

• Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlistnames. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or acombination of a large number of files andfolders, or playlists can cause the player to beunable to play up to the maximum number offiles, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wishto play a large number of files, folders, playlists,or sessions, minimize the length of the file,folder, or playlist name. Long names also takeup more space on the display, potentiallygetting cut off.

• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it.Trying to add music to an existing disc cancause the disc not to function in the player.

Root DirectoryThe root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW istreated as a folder. If the root directory hascompressed audio files, the directory is displayedas F1 ROOT. All files contained directly underthe root directory are accessed prior to any rootdirectory folders. However, playlists (Px) arealways accessed before root folders or files.

302

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewherein the file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder does not display.

No FolderWhen the CD-R or CD-RW contains onlycompressed files, the files are located under theroot folder. The next and previous folder functiondoes not function on a CD-R or CD-RW thatwas recorded without folders or playlists. Whendisplaying the name of the folder the radiodisplays ROOT.

When the CD-R or CD-RW contains only playlistsand compressed audio files, but no folders, allfiles are located under the root folder. The folderdown and the folder up buttons search playlists(Px) first and then goes to the root folder.When the radio displays the name of the folderthe radio displays ROOT.

Order of PlayTracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW areplayed in the following order:

• Play begins from the first track in the firstplaylist and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each playlist. When the last trackof the last playlist has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first playlist.

• Play begins from the first track in the firstfolder and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each folder. When the last trackof the last folder has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, the display doesnot automatically show the new folder name unlessthe folder mode was chosen as the defaultdisplay. The new track name displays.

303

File System and NamingThe song name that is displayed is the songname that is contained in the ID3 tag. If thesong name is not present in the ID3 tag, thenthe radio displays the file name without theextension (such as .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters orfour pages are shortened. Parts of words onthe last page of text and the extension ofthe filename displays.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsPreprogrammed playlists that were created usingWinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however, they cannotbe edited using the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containing compressedaudio song files.

Playing an MP3/WMA (In Either the DVDor CD Slot)Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into eitherthe top or bottom slot, label side up. The playerpulls it in, and the CD-R or CD-RW shouldbegin playing.

Depending on the format of the disc, a softkeymenu appears and allows navigation of the disc.The menu reads left to right as RDM (Randomizesong play order), a Folder icon with left andright arrows (to move up or down through availablefolders), a PL tag if the disc has a Playlist available,and a Music Navigator tag. If a Playlist tag isshown, toggling this key brings up a Folder softkeyonly or the menu as previously described.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-Ror CD-RW in the player, it stays in the player.When the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-Ror CD-RW starts to play where it stopped, if itwas the last selected audio source.

As each new track starts to play, the track numberand song title displays.

If playing a CD-R or CD-RW, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to CD-R or CD-RW quality,the method of recording, the quality of themusic that has been recorded, and the way theCD-R or CD-RW has been handled. There canbe an increase in skipping, difficulty in findingtracks, and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting.

304

If these problems occur, check the bottom surfaceof the CD. If the surface of the CD is damaged,such as cracked, broken, or scratched, theCD does not play properly. If the surface of theCD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs and DVDson page 328 for more information.


Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or morethan one CD is inserted into the slot at atime, or an attempt is made to play scratchedor damaged CDs, the CD player could bedamaged. While using the CD player, useonly CDs in good condition without anylabel, load one CD at a time, and keep theCD player and the loading slot free of foreignmaterials, liquids, and debris.

Do not add any label to a CD. It could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.


Z CD (Eject): Press and release theZ CDbutton to eject the CD-R or CD-RW that iscurrently playing in the bottom slot. A beep soundsand Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc isejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R can beremoved. If the CD-R or CD-RW is not removed,after several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RWautomatically pulls back into the player.

If loading and reading of a CD cannot becompleted, such as unknown format, etc., and thedisc fails to eject, press and hold theZ CD buttonfor more than five seconds to force the disc to eject.

Z DVD (Eject): Press and release theZDVD button to eject the CD-R or CD-RW that iscurrently playing in the top slot. A beep soundsand Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc isejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R orCD-RW can be removed. If the CD-R or CD-RWis not removed, after several seconds, the CD-R orCD-RW automatically pulls back into the player.

305

If loading and reading of a CD cannot becompleted, such as unknown format, etc., andthe disc fails to eject, press and hold theZ DVDbutton for more than five seconds to force thedisc to eject.

f (Tune): Turn the f knob to select MP3/WMAfiles on the CD-R or CD-RW that is currentlyplaying.

©SEEK ¨: Press the left ©SEEK arrow togo to the start of the current MP3/WMA file,if more than five seconds have played. If less thanfive seconds have played, the previous MP3/WMAfile plays. Press the right ¨SEEK arrow to go tothe next MP3/WMA file. If either the left ©orright ¨SEEK arrow is held, or pressed multipletimes, the player continues moving backward orforward through the MP3/WMA files on the CD.

S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to the firsttrack in the next folder.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold thes REVbutton to reverse playback quickly within anMP3/WMA file. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume. Release thes REV button to resumeplaying the file. The elapsed time of the filedisplays.

\FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold the\FWD button to advance playback quickly withinan MP3/WMA file. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume. Release the\FWD button to resumeplaying the file. The elapsed time of the filedisplays.

306

RDM (Random): With the random setting,MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW can belistened to in random, rather than sequential order.To play MP3/WMA files from the CD-R orCD-RW you are listening to in random order,press the pushbutton positioned under the RDMlabel until Random Current Disc displays.Press the same pushbutton again to turn offrandom play.

h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigatorfeature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-Ror CD-RW in order by artist or album. Press thepushbutton located below the music navigatorlabel. The player scans the disc to sort the files byartist and album ID3 tag information. It mighttake several minutes to scan the disc dependingon the number of MP3/WMA files recorded tothe CD-R or CD-RW.

To cancel music navigator while the player isscanning, press the pushbutton located below themusic navigator label or eject the disc.

The radio can begin playing while it is scanning thedisc in the background. When the scan is finished,the CD-R or CD-RW begins playing again.

Once the disc has been scanned, the playerdefaults to playing MP3/WMA files in order by artist.The current artist playing is shown on the secondline of the display between the arrows. If you wantto listen to MP3/WMA files by another artist, pressthe pushbutton located below either arrow button.The disc goes to the next or previous artist inalphabetical order. Continue pressing either buttonuntil the desired artist is displayed.

To change from playback by artist to playback byalbum, press the pushbutton located below theSort By label. From the sort screen, push oneof the buttons below the album button. Press thepushbutton below the back label to return to themain music navigator screen. Now the album nameis displayed on the second line between the arrowsand songs from the current album begin to play.Once all songs from that album are played, theplayer moves to the next album in alphabeticalorder on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins playingMP3/WMA files from that album.

To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbuttonbelow the Back label to return to normal MP3/WMAplayback.

307

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD or a DVD is playing. The CD or DVDremains inside the radio for future listening orviewing entertainment.

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this buttonto cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary whenlistening to the radio. The DVD/CD text labeland a message showing track or chapternumber displays when a disc is in either slot.Press this button again and the systemautomatically searches for an auxiliary inputdevice, such as a portable audio player.If a portable audio player is not connected,“No Aux Input Device” displays. If a disc is inboth the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD/CD

AUX button cycles between the two sources andnot indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If a frontauxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUXbutton cycles through all available options,such as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, andRear Auxiliary (if available). See “Using theAuxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or“Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, Rear SeatEntertainment System on page 311 for moreinformation.

If a MP3/WMA is inserted into top DVD slot, therear seat operator can turn on the video screenand use the remote control to navigate theCD (tracks only) through the remote control.

308

XM Radio Messages

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

XM Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No XM Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you moveinto an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after four second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

Channel Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to anotherchannel.

Channel Unavail Channel no longeravailable

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Artist Info Artist Name/Featurenot available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

No Title Info Song/Program Titlenot available

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

309

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

No CAT Info Category Namenot available

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Information No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

CAT Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Theftlocked Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously beenin another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If this messageappears after having your vehicle serviced, check with yourdealer/retailer.

XM Radio ID Radio ID label(channel 0)

If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with theXM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is neededto activate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, therecould be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.

Check XM Receivr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver could have a fault. Consult with yourdealer/retailer.

XM Not Available XM™ Not Available If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver could have a fault. Consult with yourdealer/retailer.

310

Navigation/Radio SystemYour vehicle may have a navigation radio system.

The navigation system has built-in featuresintended to minimize driver distraction. Technologyalone, no matter how advanced, can neverreplace your own judgment. See the NavigationSystem manual for some tips to help youreduce distractions while driving.

Rear Seat Entertainment SystemYour vehicle may have a DVD Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) system. The RSE systemworks with the vehicle’s audio system. TheDVD player is part of the front radio. The RSEsystem includes a radio with a DVD player, a videodisplay screen, audio/video jacks, two wirelessheadphones, and a remote control. See Radio withCD and DVD on page 278 for more informationon the vehicle’s audio/DVD system.

Before You DriveThe RSE is designed for rear seat passengersonly. The driver cannot safely view the videoscreen while driving and should not try to do so.

In severe or extreme weather conditions theRSE system might not work until the temperatureis within the operating range. The operatingrange for the RSE system is above −4°F (−20°C)or below 140°F (60°C). If the temperature ofyour vehicle is outside of this range, heat or coolthe vehicle until the temperature is within theoperating range of the RSE system.

Parental ControlThe RSE system may have a Parental Controlfeature, depending on which radio you have.To enable Parental Control, press and hold theradio power button for more than two seconds tostop all system features such as: radio, videoscreen, RSA, DVD and/or CD. While ParentalControl is on, a padlock icon displays.

When the radio is turned back on, ParentalControl is unlocked.

311

Headphones

The RSE includes two 2-channel wirelessheadphones that are dedicated to this system.These headphones are used to listen to mediasuch as CDs, DVDs, MP3s, DVDAs, radio,any auxiliary source connected to A/V jacks,or the auxiliary input jack, if your vehicle hasthis feature. The wireless headphones havean On/Off button, channel 1/2 switch, and avolume control.

Push the power button to turn on the headphones.An indicator light located on the headphones comeson. If the light does not come on, the batteries mightneed to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement”later in this section for more information. Switch theheadphones to Off when not in use. Channel 1 isdedicated to the video screen, while Channel 2 isdedicated to RSA selections.

Infrared transmitters are located at the rear of theRSE overhead console. The headphones shut offautomatically to save the battery power if the RSEsystem and RSA are shut off or if the headphonesare out of range of the transmitters for more thanthree minutes. If you move too far forward or stepout of the vehicle, the headphones lose the audiosignal.

The headphones automatically turns off afterfour hours of continuous use.

To adjust the volume on the headphones, usethe volume control located on the right side.

312

For optimal audio performance, the headphonesmust be worn correctly. The symbol L (Left)appears on the upper left side, above the ear padand should be positioned on the left ear. Thesymbol R (Right) appears on the upper right side,above the ear pad and should be positioned onthe right ear.

Notice: Do not store the headphones in heator direct sunlight. This could damage theheadphones and repairs will not be covered byyour warranty. Keep the headphones storedin a cool, dry place.

If the foam ear pads attached to the headphonesbecome worn or damaged, the pads can bereplaced separately from the headphone setthrough your dealer/retailer for more information.

Headphones should be stored in the front floorconsole and not in the front seat back pocket.Headphone damage can occur when the secondrow seats are folded forward.

Battery ReplacementTo change the batteries on the headphones,do the following:

1. Turn the screw with a coin or screw driver toloosen the battery door located on the leftside of the headphones. Slide the batterydoor open.

2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.Make sure that they are installed correctly,using the diagram on the inside of the batterycompartment.

3. Replace the battery door and tighten thedoor screw.

If the headphones are to be stored for a longperiod of time, remove the batteries and keepthem in a cool, dry place.

313

Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks

The A/V jacks located on the rear of the floorconsole, allow audio or video signals to beconnected from an auxiliary device such as acamcorder or a video game unit to the RSEsystem. Adapter connectors or cables may berequired to connect the auxiliary device to theA/V jacks. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructionsfor proper usage.

The A/V jacks are color coded to match typicalhome entertainment system equipment. The yellowjack (A) is for the video input. The white jack (B)is for the left audio input. The red jack (C) is forthe right audio input.

Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by theradio system.

To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system,connect an external auxiliary device to thecolor-coded A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliarydevice and the video screen power on. If the videoscreen is in the DVD player mode, pressing theAUX (auxiliary) button on the remote controlswitches the video screen from the DVD playermode to the auxiliary device. The radio can listento the audio of the connected auxiliary deviceby sourcing to auxiliary. See Radio with CD andDVD on page 278 for more information.

314

How to Change the RSE Video ScreenSettingsThe screen display mode (normal, full, and zoom),screen brightness, and setup menu languagecan be changed from the on screen setup menu.To change any feature, do the following:

1. Press the display menu button on theremote control.

2. Use the remote control menu navigationarrows and the enter button to use thesetup menu.

3. Press the display menu button again toremove the setup menu from the screen.

Audio OutputAudio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs canbe heard through the following possible sources:

• Wireless Headphones

• Vehicle Speakers

• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the rearseat audio system, if your vehicle has thisfeature.

The RSE system always transmits the audiosignal to the wireless headphones, if there isaudio available. See “Headphones” earlier in thissection for more information.

When a device is connected to the A/V jacks,or the radio’s auxiliary input jack, if your vehiclehas this feature, the rear seat passengers are ableto hear audio from the auxiliary device throughthe wireless or wired headphones. The frontseat passengers are able to listen to playbackfrom this device through the vehicle speakers byselecting AUX as the source on the radio.

Video ScreenThe video screen is located in the RSE overheadconsole.

To use the video screen, do the following:

1. Push the release button located on theRSE overhead console.

2. Move the screen to the desired position.

When the video screen is not in use, push it upinto its locked position.

315

If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised toits locked position, the screen remains on. This isnormal. The DVD continues to play through theprevious audio source. Use the remote controlpower button or eject the disc to turn off thescreen.

The RSE overhead console contains the IRtransmitters for the wireless headphones andthe IR receivers for the remote control. Theyare located at the rear of the console.

Notice: Avoid directly touching the videoscreen, as damage may occur. See “Cleaningthe Video Screen” later in this section formore information.

Remote ControlTo use the remote control, aim it at the transmitterwindow at the rear of the RSE overhead consoleand press the desired button. Direct sunlightor very bright light can affect the ability of theRSE transmitter to receive signals from the remotecontrol. If the remote control does not seem tobe working, the batteries might need to bereplaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in thissection. Objects blocking the line of sight canalso affect the function of the remote control.

If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot,the remote control power button can be used toturn on the video screen display and start the disc.The radio can also turn on the video screendisplay. See Radio with CD and DVD on page 278for more information.

Notice: Storing the remote control in a hotarea or in direct sunlight can damage it,and the repairs will not be covered by yourwarranty. Keep the remote control stored in acool, dry place.

316

Remote Control Buttons

O (Power): Press this button to turn the videoscreen on and off.

P (Illumination): Press this button to turnon the remote control backlight. The backlightautomatically times out after 7 to 10 seconds if noother button is pressed while the backlight is on.

v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD tothe main menu of the DVD. This function canvary for each disc.

y (Main Menu): Press this button to access theDVD menu. The DVD menu is different onevery DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrowbuttons to move the cursor around the DVDmenu. After making a selection, press the enterbutton. This button only operates when usinga DVD.

n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Usethe arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.

r (Enter): Press this button to select the choicethat is highlighted in any menu.

z (Display Menu): Press this button to adjustthe brightness, screen display mode (normal,full, or zoom), and display the language menu.

317

q (Return): Press this button to exit the currentactive menu and return to the previous menu.This button operates only when the display menuor a DVD menu is active.

c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD. Press thisbutton twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.

s (Play/Pause): Press this button to startplaying a DVD. Press this button while a DVD isplaying to pause it. Press it again to continueplaying the DVD.

When the DVD is playing, depending on the radio,you might be able to do slow play by pressingthe pause button then pressing the fast forwardbutton. The DVD continues playing in a slow playmode. Depending on the radio, you might alsoperform reverse slow play by pressing the pausebutton and then pressing the fast reversebutton. To cancel slow play mode, press theplay/pause button.

t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this buttonto return to the start of the current track orchapter. Press this button again to go to theprevious track or chapter. This button might notwork when the DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

u (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to goto the beginning of the next chapter or track. Thisbutton might not work when the DVD is playing thecopyright information or the previews.

r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fastreverse the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversinga DVD video, press the play button. To stop fastreversing a DVD audio or CD, release the fastreverse button. This button might not work whenthe DVD is playing the copyright information orthe previews.

318

[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fastforward the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding aDVD video, press the play button. To stop fastforwarding a DVD audio or CD, release thefast forward button. This button might not workwhen the DVD is playing the copyright informationor the previews.

e (Audio): Press this button to change audiotracks on DVDs that have this feature whenthe DVD is playing. The format and content of thisfunction vary for each disc.

{ (Subtitles): Press this button to turn ON/OFFsubtitles and to move through subtitle optionswhen a DVD is playing. The format and contentof this function vary for each disc.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch thesystem between the DVD player and an auxiliarysource.

d (Camera): Press this button to change cameraangles on DVDs that have this feature when aDVD is playing. The format and content ofthis function vary for each disc.

1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numerickeypad provides the capability of direct chapter ortrack number selection.

\ (Clear): Press this button within three secondsafter entering a numeric selection, to clear allnumeric inputs.

} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press this button toselect chapter or track numbers greater thannine. Press this button before entering the number.

If the remote control becomes lost or damaged,a new universal remote control can be purchased.If this happens, make sure the universal remotecontrol uses a code set of Toshiba®.

319

Battery ReplacementTo change the remote control batteries, do thefollowing:

1. Remove the battery compartment doorlocated on the bottom of the remote control.

2. Replace the two AA batteries in thecompartment. Make sure that they areinstalled correctly, using the diagram on theinside of the battery compartment.

3. Close the battery door securely.

If the remote control is to be stored for a longperiod of time, remove the batteries and keep themin a cool, dry place.

Problem Recommended Action

No power. The ignition might not beturned on or in accessory.

The picture does not fillthe screen. There areblack borders on thetop and bottom or onboth sides or it looksstretched out.

Check the display modesettings in the setup menuby pressing the displaymenu button on theremote control.

In auxiliary mode, thepicture moves or scrolls.

Check the auxiliary inputconnections at bothdevices.

The remote controldoes not work.

Check to make sure thereis no obstruction betweenthe remote control andthe transmitter window.Check the batteries tomake sure they are notdead or installedincorrectly.

After stopping the player,I push Play butsometimes the DVDstarts where I left off andsometimes at thebeginning.

If the stop button waspressed one time, theDVD player resumesplaying where the DVDwas stopped. If the stopbutton was pressed twotimes the DVD playerbegins to play from thebeginning of the DVD.

320

Problem Recommended Action

The auxiliary source isrunning but there is nopicture or sound.

Check that the RSEvideo screen is in theauxiliary source mode.Check the auxiliary inputconnections at bothdevices.

Sometimes the wirelessheadphone audio cutsout or buzzes.

Check for obstructions,low batteries, receptionrange, and interferencefrom cellular telephonetowers or by usingyour cellular telephonein the vehicle.Check that theheadphones are oncorrectly using theL (left) and R (right) onthe headphones.

I lost the remote and/orthe headphones.

See your dealer/retailerfor assistance.

The DVD is playing,but there is no pictureor sound.

Check that the RSE videoscreen is sourced to theDVD player.

DVD Display Error MessagesThe DVD display error message depends onwhich radio you have. The video screen maydisplay one of the following:

Disc Load/Eject Error: This message displayswhen there are disc load or eject problems.

Disc Format Error: This message displays, if thedisc is inserted with the disc label wrong sideup, or if the disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This message displays, if thedisc is not from a correct region.

No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if nodisc is present when the EJECT button is pressedon the radio.

321

DVD DistortionVideo distortion may occur when operating cellularphones, scanners, CB radios, Global PositionSystems (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, orwalkie talkies.

It may be necessary to turn off the DVD playerwhen operating one of these devices in or nearthe vehicle.

*Excludes the OnStar® System.

Cleaning the RSE Overhead ConsoleWhen cleaning the RSE overhead console surface,use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water.

Cleaning the Video ScreenWhen cleaning the video screen, use only a cleancloth dampened with clean water. Use carewhen directly touching or cleaning the screen,as damage could result.

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)This feature allows rear seat passengers to listento and control any of the music sources: radio,CDs, DVDs, or other auxiliary sources. However,the rear seat passengers can only control themusic sources the front seat passengers are notlistening to (except on some radios wheredual control is allowed). For example, rear seatpassengers can listen to and control a CD throughthe headphones, while the driver listens to theradio through the front speakers. The rearseat passengers have control of the volume foreach set of headphones.

You can operate the RSA functions even whenthe main radio is off.

Audio can be heard through wired headphones(not included) plugged into the jacks on the RSA.If your vehicle has this feature, audio can alsobe heard on Channel 2 of the wirelessheadphones.

The audio system mutes the rear speakers whenthe RSA audio is active through the headphones.

322

P (Power): Press this button to turn the RSAon or off.

Volume: Turn this knob to increase or todecrease the volume of the wired headphones.The left knob controls the left headphones andthe right knob controls the right headphones.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switchbetween the radio (AM/FM), XM (if equipped),CD, and if your vehicle has these features, DVD,front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.

©¨ (Seek): When listening to FM, AM, orXM™ (if equipped), press the left seek arrow orthe right seek arrow to go to the previous or to thenext station or channels and stay there. Thisfunction is inactive, with some radios, if the frontseat passengers are listening to the radio.

Press and hold the left seek arrow or right seekarrow until the display flashes, to tune to anindividual station. The display stops flashing afterthe buttons have not been pushed for morethan two seconds. This function is inactive, withsome radios, if the front seat passengers arelistening to the radio.

While listening to a disc, press the right seekarrow to go to the next track or chapter on the disc.Press the left seek arrow to go back to the startof the current track or chapter (if more thanten seconds have played). This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seat passengersare listening to the disc.

When a DVD video menu is being displayed,press the left seek arrow or right seek arrow toperform a cursor up or down on the menu.Hold the left seek arrow or right seek arrow toperform a cursor left or right on the menu.

323

PROG (Program): Press this button to go to thenext preset radio station or channel set on themain radio. This function is inactive, withsome radios, if the front seat passengers arelistening to the radio.

When a CD or DVD audio is playing, press thisbutton to go to the beginning of the CD orDVD audio. This function is inactive, with someradios, if the front seat passengers are listeningto the disc.

When a disc audio is playing in the CD or DVDchanger, press this button to select the next disc,if multiple discs are loaded. This function isinactive, with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to the disc.

When a DVD video menu is being displayed,press the PROG button to perform the menufunction, enter.

Rear Audio Controller (RAC)

Your vehicle may have the Rear AudioController (RAC). With RAC you can controlcertain radio functions.

xw (Next/Previous): Press the down or uparrows to go to the next or to the previous radiostation stored as a favorite.

When a CD/DVD is playing, press the down orup arrows to go to the next or previous trackor chapter.

324

©SEEK ¨: Press the SEEK arrows to go to theprevious or to the next radio station while inAM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped). Press the SEEKarrows to go to the previous or to the next track orchapter while sourced to the DVD slot.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switchbetween the radio (AM, FM), XM™ (if equipped),CD, and if your vehicle has these features,DVD, front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.

> (Mute): Press this button to silence thesystem. Press this button again, or any otherradio button, to turn the sound on.

+ / − x (Volume): Press the plus or minus volumebuttons to increase or to decrease the volume.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theftof your vehicle’s radio. The feature worksautomatically by learning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). If the radio is movedto a different vehicle, it does not operate andLOCKED displays.

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

If your vehicle has audiosteering wheel controls,they could differdepending on yourvehicle’s options.Some audio controlscan be adjusted at thesteering wheel. Theyinclude the following:

xw (Next/Previous): Press the up or the downarrow to go to the next or to the previous radiostation stored as a favorite.

When a CD/DVD is playing, press the up or thedown arrow to go to the next or previous track orchapter.

325

g (Mute/Voice Recognition): Press and releasethis button to silence the vehicle speakers only.The audio of the wireless and wired headphones,if your vehicle has these features, does notmute. Press and release this button again, toturn the sound on.

If your vehicle has the navigation system, pressand hold this button for longer than one second toinitiate voice recognition. See “Voice Recognition”in the Navigation System manual for moreinformation.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, press and hold thisbutton for longer than one second to interactwith the OnStar® system. If your vehicle also hasthe navigation system, press and hold thisbutton for longer than one second to initiate voicerecognition and say “OnStar” to enter OnStar®

mode. See the OnStar® System on page 145 inthis manual for more information.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switchbetween the radio (AM, FM), XM™ (if equipped),CD, and if your vehicle has these features,DVD, front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.

+ e − e (Volume): Press the plus or minusbutton to increase or to decrease the radio volume.

¨(Seek): Press the seek arrow to go to thenext radio station while in AM, FM, or XM™(if equipped). Press this button to go to the nexttrack or chapter while sourced to the CD orDVD slot.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and static can occurduring normal radio reception if items such as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenience accessories,and external electronic devices are pluggedinto the accessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug the item from theaccessory power outlet.

326

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range cancause station frequencies to interfere with eachother. For better radio reception, most AMradio stations boosts the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levels during the night.Static can also occur when things like stormsand power lines interfere with radio reception.When this happens, try reducing the treble onyour radio.

FM StereoFM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signalsonly reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,tall buildings or hills can interfere with satelliteradio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.In addition, traveling or standing under heavyfoliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels could causeloss of the XM™ signal for a period of time.The radio might display NO XM SIGNAL toindicate interference.

327

Care of Your CDs and DVDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of aCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD does not play properly ornot at all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, takea soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft clothin a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed withwater, and clean it. Make sure the wiping processstarts from the center to the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface.Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges orthe edge of the hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD and DVD PlayerThe use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is notadvised, due to the risk of contaminating the lensof the CD optics with lubricants internal to theCD mechanism.

Multi-Band AntennaThe multi-band antenna is located on the roof ofyour vehicle. This type of antenna is used with theAM/FM radio, as well as OnStar® and the XM™Satellite Radio Service System, if your vehiclehas these features. Keep this antenna clearof snow and ice build up for clear radio reception.If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performanceof the radio system may be affected if the sunroofis open. Loading items onto the roof of yourvehicle can interfere with the performance ofthe radio system and, if your vehicle hasthis feature, OnStar®. Make sure the multi-bandantenna is not obstructed.

328

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle ............................................ 330Defensive Driving ...................................... 330Drunken Driving ........................................ 331Control of a Vehicle .................................. 334Braking ...................................................... 334Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 335Braking in Emergencies ............................. 336StabiliTrak® System ................................... 337All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System .................. 339Steering .................................................... 340Off-Road Recovery .................................... 342Passing ..................................................... 342Loss of Control .......................................... 344Driving at Night ......................................... 346

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 347City Driving ............................................... 350Freeway Driving ........................................ 351Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 352Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 353Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 354Winter Driving ........................................... 356If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,

Ice, or Snow .......................................... 360Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 361Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 361

Towing ........................................................ 367Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 367Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 367Towing a Trailer ........................................ 371

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

329

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about drivingis: Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 24.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-end collisionsare about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything that distractsfrom the driving task makes properdefensive driving more difficult and caneven cause a collision, with resultinginjury. Ask a passenger to help do thesethings, or pull off the road in a safe place todo them. These simple defensive drivingtechniques could save your life.

330

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the number onecontributor to the highway death toll, claimingthousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol,with more than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half theadult population — choose never to drink alcohol,so they never drive after drinking. For personsunder 21, it is against the law in every U.S. stateto drink alcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmental reasons forthese laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends uponfour things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

331

According to the American Medical Association, a180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up witha BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person wouldreach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks ifeach had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors likewhiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,if the same person drank three double martinis(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.A person who consumes food just before or duringdrinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage of bodywater than men. Since alcohol is carried in bodywater, this means that a woman generally willreach a higher BAC level than a man of hersame body weight will when each has the samenumber of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.In some other countries, the limit is even lower.For example, it is 0.05 percent in both Franceand Germany. The BAC limit for all commercialdrivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

332

But the ability to drive is affected well below aBAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows thatthe driving skills of many people are impaired ata BAC approaching 0.05 percent, and thatthe effects are worse at night. All drivers areimpaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.Statistics show that the chance of being in acollision increases sharply for drivers who have aBAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with aBAC level of 0.06 percent has doubled his or herchance of having a collision. At a BAC level of0.10 percent, the chance of this driver havinga collision is 12 times greater; at a level of0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold showers will speed that up. “I willbe careful” is not the right answer. What ifthere is an emergency, a need to take suddenaction, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC might notbe able to react quickly enough to avoid thecollision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive after drinking.Please do not drink and drive or ride with adriver who has been drinking. Ride home ina cab; or if you are with a group, designatea driver who will not drink.

333

Control of a VehicleThe following three systems help to control yourvehicle while driving — brakes, steering, andaccelerator. At times, as when driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those controlsystems than the tires and road can provide.Meaning, you can lose control of your vehicle.See StabiliTrak® System on page 337.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories canaffect your vehicle’s performance. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 385.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 222.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time. First, you have to decide to pushon the brake pedal. That is perception time.Then you have to bring up your foot and do it.That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths ofa second. But that is only an average. It mightbe less with one driver and as long as two orthree seconds or more with another. Age, physicalcondition, alertness, coordination, and eyesight allplay a part. So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration.

But even in three-fourths of a second, a vehiclemoving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet(20 m). That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enough space betweenyour vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the conditionof the brakes; the weight of the vehicle; and theamount of brake force applied.

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavybraking — rather than keeping pace with traffic.This is a mistake. The brakes might not have timeto cool between hard stops. The brakes willwear out much faster if you do a lot of heavybraking. If you keep pace with the traffic and allowrealistic following distances, you will eliminate alot of unnecessary braking. That means betterbraking and longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while youare driving, brake normally but do not pumpthe brakes. If you do, the pedal could getharder to push down. If the engine stops,you will still have some power brake assist.

334

But you will use it when you brake. Once thepower assist is used up, it can take longer to stopand the brake pedal will be harder to push.


Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system thatwill help prevent a braking skid.

When you start the engine and begin to driveaway, ABS will check itself. You might heara momentary motor or clicking noise while this testis going on, and you might even notice that thebrake pedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problemwith ABS, this warninglight will stay on.See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem WarningLight on page 223.

Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes at eachwheel.

335

ABS can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. The computer is programmed tomake the most of available tire and road conditions.This can help you steer around the obstacle whilebraking hard.

As you brake, the computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedal oralways decrease stopping distance. If you gettoo close to the vehicle in front of you, you will nothave time to apply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Always leave enoughroom up ahead to stop, even though youhave ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brakepedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you.You might hear the anti-lock pump or motoroperate, and feel the brake pedal pulsate, but thisis normal.

Braking in EmergenciesWith ABS, you can steer and brake at the sametime. In many emergencies, steering can help youmore than even the very best braking.

336

StabiliTrak® SystemYour vehicle has the StabiliTrak® system whichcombines antilock brake, traction and stabilitycontrol systems and helps the driver maintaindirectional control of the vehicle in most drivingconditions.

When you first start your vehicle and begin todrive away, the system performs severaldiagnostic checks to ensure there are noproblems. You may hear or feel the systemworking. This is normal and does not meanthere is a problem with your vehicle. The systemshould initialize before the vehicle reaches20 mph (32 km/h). In some cases, it may takeapproximately two miles of driving before thesystem initializes.

If the system fails to turn on or activate, theStabiliTrak® light along with one of the followingmessages will be displayed on the DriverInformation Center (DIC): TRACTION CONTROLOFF, SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL,SERVICE STABILITRAK. If you see theseconditions, turn the vehicle off, wait 15 seconds,and then turn it back on again to reset the system.

If any of these messages still appear on the DriverInformation Center (DIC), your vehicle shouldbe taken in for service. For more information onthe DIC messages, see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 232.

The StabiliTrak® lightwill flash on theinstrument panel clusterwhen the system isboth on and activated.

You may also feel or hear the system working;this is normal.

The traction controldisable button is locatedon the instrumentpanel below the climatecontrols.

The traction control part of StabiliTrak® can beturned off by pressing and releasing the tractioncontrol disable button.

337

Traction control can be turned on by pressing andreleasing the traction control disable button ifnot automatically shut off for any other reason.

When the traction control system is turnedoff, the StabiliTrak® light and the appropriatetraction control off message will be displayed onthe DIC to warn the driver. Your vehicle willstill have brake-traction control when tractioncontrol is off, but will not be able to use the enginespeed management system. See “TractionControl Operation” next for more information.

When the traction control system has been turnedoff, you may still hear system noises as a resultof the brake-traction control coming on.

It is recommended to leave the system on fornormal driving conditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if your vehicle is stuck insand, mud, ice or snow, and you want to “rock”your vehicle to attempt to free it. It may alsobe necessary to turn off the system when drivingin extreme off-road conditions where high wheelspin is required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuckin Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 360.

Traction Control OperationThe traction control system is part of theStabiliTrak® system. Traction control limits wheelspin by reducing engine power to the wheels(engine speed management) and by applyingbrakes to each individual wheel (brake-tractioncontrol) as necessary.The traction control system is enabled automaticallywhen you start your vehicle. It will activate and theStabiliTrak® light will flash if it senses that any of thewheels are spinning or beginning to lose tractionwhile driving. If you turn off traction control, only thebrake-traction control portion of traction control willwork. The engine speed management will bedisabled. In this mode, engine power is not reducedautomatically and the driven wheels can spin morefreely. This can cause the brake-traction control toactivate constantly.Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axleto spin excessively while the StabiliTrak®,ABS and brake warning lights and the SERVICESTABILITRAK message are displayed, youcould damage the transfer case. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Reduce engine power and do not spin thewheel(s) excessively while these lights and thismessage are displayed.

338

The traction control system may activate ondry or rough roads or under conditions such asheavy acceleration while turning or abruptupshifts/downshifts of the transmission.When this happens, you may notice a reductionin acceleration, or may hear a noise or vibration.This is normal.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the systemactivates, the StabiliTrak® light will flash and thecruise control will automatically disengage.When road conditions allow you to use cruiseagain, you may re-engage the cruise control.See Cruise Control on page 180.

StabiliTrak® may also turn off automatically if itdetermines that a problem exists with the system.If the problem does not clear itself after restartingthe vehicle, you should see your dealer/retailerfor service.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) SystemIf your vehicle has this feature, engine power issent to all four wheels when extra traction isneeded. This is like four-wheel drive, but thereis no separate lever or switch to engage ordisengage the front axle. It is fully automatic, andadjusts itself as needed for road conditions.

When using a compact spare tire on your AWDequipped vehicle, the AWD system automaticallydetects the presence of the compact spareand the AWD is disabled. To restore the AWDoperation and prevent excessive wear onthe clutch in your AWD system, replace thecompact spare with a full-size tire as soon aspossible. See Compact Spare Tire on page 477for more information.

339

Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because theengine stops or the system is not functioning,you can steer but it will take much more effort.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonablespeed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidentsmentioned on the news happen on curves.Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when drivingon curves. The traction of the tires against theroad surface makes it possible for the vehicle tochange its path when you turn the front wheels.If there is no traction, inertia will keep thevehicle going in the same direction. If you haveever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, youwill understand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of the tires and the road surface,the angle at which the curve is banked, and yourspeed. While you are in a curve, speed is theone factor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly accelerate. Both controlsystems — steering and acceleration — have todo their work where the tires meet the road.Adding the sudden acceleration can demandtoo much of those places. You can lose control.See StabiliTrak® System on page 337.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease upon the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle theway you want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that you shouldadjust your speed. Of course, the posted speedsare based on good weather and road conditions.Under less favorable conditions you will want to goslower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whilethe front wheels are straight ahead.

340

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” throughthe curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed.Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve,and then accelerate gently into the straightaway.


Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you comeover a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane,or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, ora child darts out from between parked cars andstops right in front of you. You can avoidthese problems by braking — if you can stop intime. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.That is the time for evasive action — steeringaround the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First, apply the brakes. See Brakingon page 334. It is better to remove as much speedas you can from a possible collision. Then steeraround the problem, to the left or right dependingon the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attentionand a quick decision. If you are holding thesteering wheel at the recommended 9 and3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full180 degrees very quickly without removing eitherhand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,and just as quickly straighten the wheel once youhave avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations arealways possible is a good reason to practicedefensive driving at all times and wear safetybelts properly.

341

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your vehicle’s right wheels havedropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulderwhile you are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly belowthe pavement, recovery should be fairly easy.Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing

in the way, steer so that your vehicle straddles theedge of the pavement. You can turn the steeringwheel up to one-quarter turn until the right front tirecontacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steeringwheel to go straight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead,then goes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the samelane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenlyput the passing driver face to face with the worstof all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.

342

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to thesides, and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your passing patterns. If youhave any doubt whatsoever about makinga successful pass, wait for a better time.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings,and lines. If you can see a sign up aheadthat might indicate a turn or an intersection,delay your pass. A broken center line usuallyindicates it is all right to pass, providingthe road ahead is clear. Never cross a solidline on your side of the lane or a double solidline, even if the road seems empty ofapproaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you wantto pass while you are awaiting an opportunity.For one thing, following too closely reducesyour area of vision, especially if you arefollowing a larger vehicle. Also, you will nothave adequate space if the vehicle aheadsuddenly slows or stops. Keep back areasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the rightlane and do not get too close. Time your moveso you will be increasing speed as the timecomes to move into the other lane. If the wayis clear to pass, you will have a runningstart that more than makes up for the distanceyou would lose by dropping back. And ifsomething happens to cause you to cancelyour pass, you need only slow down and dropback again and wait for another opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check theblind spot.

343

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and start your left lane changesignal before moving out of the right lane topass. When you are far enough ahead ofthe passed vehicle to see its front in yourvehicle’s inside mirror, activate the right lanechange signal and move back into theright lane. Remember that an outside convexmirror makes the vehicle you just passedseem farther away from you than it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicleat a time on two-lane roads. Reconsider beforepassing the next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly. Even though the brake lamps arenot flashing, it might be slowing downor starting to turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.

344

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,the wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid is best handled by easing yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and quickly steer the way youwant the vehicle to go. If you start steering quicklyenough, your vehicle may straighten out. Always beready for a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.For safety, you want to slow down and adjust yourdriving to these conditions. It is important to slowdown on slippery surfaces because stoppingdistance is longer and vehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction,try your best to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking, including reducingvehicle speed by shifting to a lower gear.Any sudden changes could cause the tires toslide. You might not realize the surface is slipperyuntil your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognizewarning clues — such as enough water, ice,or packed snow on the road to make a mirroredsurface — and slow down when you have anydoubt.

Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)helps avoid only the braking skid.

345

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, slow down andkeep more space between you and othervehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only somuch road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver might require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They might cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make a lotof things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,as from a driver who does not lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,slow down a little. Avoid staring directly intothe approaching headlamps.

346

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Even theinside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flashmore than clean glass would, making the pupilsof your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less ofa roadway when you are in a turn or curve.Keep your eyes moving; that way, it is easier topick out dimly lighted objects. Just as theheadlamps should be checked regularly forproper aim, so should your eyes be examinedregularly. Some drivers suffer from nightblindness — the inability to see in dim light — andare not even aware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble.On a wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, orturn as well because your vehicle’s tire-to-roadtraction is not as good as on dry roads.

347

And, if the tires do not have much tread left, youget even less traction. It is always wise to goslower and be cautious if rain starts to fall whileyou are driving. The surface may get wet suddenlywhen your reflexes are tuned for driving on drypavement.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.Even if the windshield wiper blades are in goodshape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see roadsigns and traffic signals, pavement markings,the edge of the road, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep windshield wiping equipment ingood shape and keep the windshield washerfluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replacewindshield wiper inserts when they show signs ofstreaking or missing areas on the windshield,or when strips of rubber start to separate fromthe inserts.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theymay not work as well in a quick stop andmay cause pulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply the brake pedallightly until the brakes work normally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect the brakes.Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to slowdown before you hit them.

348

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under the tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fast enough.When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little orno contact with the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it canif the tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen if alot of water is standing on the road. If you cansee reflections from trees, telephone poles,or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’ssurface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing WaterNotice: If you drive too quickly through deeppuddles or standing water, water can come inthrough the engine’s air intake and badlydamage the engine. Never drive through waterthat is slightly lower than the underbody of yourvehicle. If you cannot avoid deep puddles orstanding water, drive through them very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carried away.As little as six inches of flowing watercan carry away a smaller vehicle. If thishappens, you and other vehicle occupantscould drown. Do not ignore police warningsigns, and otherwise be very cautiousabout trying to drive through flowing water.

349

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra

following distance. And be especiallycareful when you pass another vehicle.Allow yourself more clear room ahead, andbe prepared to have your view restrictedby road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth.See Tires on page 435.

City DrivingOne of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. Watch out for whatthe other drivers are doing and pay attentionto traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 351.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal.A traffic light is there because the corner isbusy enough to need it. When a lightturns green, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be running thered light.

350

Freeway DrivingMile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads.But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway drivingis: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Driveat the same speed most of the other drivers aredriving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks asmooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freewayas a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp,you should begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailingspeed. Switch on the turn signal, check themirrors, and glance over your shoulder as oftenas necessary. Try to blend smoothly with thetraffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if itis slower. Stay in the right lane unless you wantto pass.

Before changing lanes, check the mirrors. Then,use the turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, make sureyou allow a reasonable following distance.

Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduceyour speed according to the speedometer, notto your sense of motion. After driving for anydistance at higher speeds, you might tend to thinkyou are going slower than you actually are.

351

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.If you must start when you are not fresh — such asafter a day’s work — do not plan to make toomany miles that first part of the journey. Wearcomfortable clothing and shoes you can easilydrive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If itneeds service, have it done before starting out.Of course, you will find experienced and ableservice experts at dealers/retailers all acrossNorth America. They are ready and willing to helpyou if needed.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short time to avoid a majorstorm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

352

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep atthe wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum ofthe tires on the road, the drone of the engine,and the rush of the wind against the vehicle thatcan make you sleepy. Do not let it happen to you!If it does, your vehicle can leave the road inless than a second, and you could crash andbe injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis?First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated,with a comfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road aheadand to the sides. Check your vehicle’s mirrorsand instruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, getsome exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

353

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Checkall fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transmission. These partscan work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, the brakes couldget so hot that they would not work well.You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engine assistthe brakes on a steep downhill slope.

354

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. The brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have theengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The mostimportant thing to know is this: let the enginedo some of the slowing down. Shift to alower gear when you go down a steep orlong hill.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shiftdown to a lower gear. The lower gears helpcool the engine and transmission, and you canclimb the hill better.

• Stay in your own lane when driving ontwo-lane roads in hills or mountains. Do notswing wide or cut across the center of theroad. Drive at speeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert.There could be something in your lane,like a stalled car or an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountainsthat warn of special problems. Examplesare long grades, passing or no-passing zones,a falling rocks area, or winding roads.Be alert to these and take appropriate action.

355

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in your vehicle.

Also see Tires on page 435.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom,a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag,some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, aflashlight, a red cloth, and a couple of reflectivewarning triangles. And, if you will be driving undersevere conditions, include a small bag of sand,a piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags tohelp provide traction. Be sure you properlysecure these items in your vehicle.

356

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between the tiresand the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,and will need to be very careful.

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.But wet ice can be even more trouble because itmay offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

StabiliTrak® improves your ability to acceleratewhen driving on a slippery road. Even withStabiliTrak®, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to the road conditions. Under certainconditions, you might want to turn the tractioncontrol part of the StabiliTrak® System off, such aswhen driving through deep snow and loosegravel, to help maintain vehicle motion at lowerspeeds. See StabiliTrak® System on page 337 andIf Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, orSnow on page 360.

357

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves yourvehicle’s stability when you make a hard stopon a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,you want to begin stopping sooner than you wouldon dry pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS) on page 335.

• Allow greater following distance on anyslippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot that is covered withice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patchesmay appear in shaded areas where thesun cannot reach, such as around clumps oftrees, behind buildings, or under bridges.Sometimes the surface of a curve or anoverpass can remain icy when the surroundingroads are clear. If you see a patch of iceahead of you, brake before you are on it.Try not to brake while you are actually on theice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be ina serious situation. You should probably stay withyour vehicle unless you know for sure that youare near help and you can hike through the snow.Here are some things to do to summon helpand keep yourself and your passengers safe:

• Turn on the hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanketaround you. If you do not have blanketsor extra clothing, make body insulatorsfrom newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing tokeep warm.

358

You can run the engine to keep warm, but becareful.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbonmonoxide) gas to get inside. CO couldovercome you and kill you. You cannot seeit or smell it, so you might not know it isin your vehicle. Clear away snow fromaround the base of your vehicle, especiallyany that is blocking the exhaust pipe.And check around again from time to timeto be sure snow does not collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side ofthe vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

Run the engine only as long as you must.This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make itgo a little faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heatthat you get and it keeps the battery charged.

359

You will need a well-charged battery to restart thevehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withthe headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it aslittle as possible. Preserve the fuel as long asyou can. To help keep warm, you can get out ofthe vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, youneed to spin the wheels, but you do not wantto spin the wheels too fast. The method knownas rocking can help you get out when youare stuck, but you must use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you or otherscould be injured. And, the transmission orother parts of the vehicle can overheat.That could cause an engine compartmentfire or other damage. When you are stuck,spin the wheels as little as possible. Do notspin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) asshown on the speedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy partsof your vehicle as well as the tires. If youspin the wheels too fast while shiftingthe transmission back and forth, you candestroy the transmission.

For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 456.

360

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right to clearthe area around the front wheels. Turn thetraction control part of the StabiliTrak® System off.See StabiliTrak® System on page 337. Thenshift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and aforward gear, spinning the wheels as little aspossible. To prevent transmission wear, wait untilthe wheels stop spinning before shifting gears.Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, andpress lightly on the accelerator pedal when thetransmission is in gear. By slowly spinningthe wheels in the forward and reverse directions,you will cause a rocking motion that could freeyour vehicle. If that does not get your vehicle outafter a few tries, it might need to be towedout. If your vehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing Your Vehicle on page 367.

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight and includes the weight ofall occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installedoptions. Two labels on your vehicle show howmuch weight it may properly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label and the Certification/Tirelabel.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

361

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar)of your vehicle. With the driver’s door open,you will find the label attached below the door lockpost (striker). The tire and loading informationlabel shows the number of occupant seatingpositions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacityweight (B) in kilograms and pounds.

The Tire and Loading Information label also showsthe size of the original equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tires and inflation seeTires on page 435 and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 442.

There is also important loading information on thevehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) andthe Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for thefront and rear axle. See “Certification/Tire Label”later in this section.

Example Label

362

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceedXXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity for your vehicle.

See Towing a Trailer on page 371 for importantinformation on towing a trailer, towing safety rules,and trailering tips.

363

Item Description Total

A Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtractOccupant Weight150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)




750 lbs (340 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)

Example 1 Example 2

364




1,000 lbs (453 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loadinginformation label for specific information aboutyour vehicle’s capacity weight and seatingpositions. The combined weight of the driver,passengers, and cargo should never exceed yourvehicle’s capacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label isattached to the rear edge of the driver’s door.

The label shows the gross weight capacity of yourvehicle. This is called the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label also tells you themaximum weights for the front and rear axles,called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

Example 3

365

To find out the actual loads on your front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weigh station andweigh your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can helpyou with this. Be sure to spread out your loadequally on both sides of the centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or theGAWR for either the front or rear axle.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

If you put things inside your vehicle — likesuitcases, tools, packages, or anything else, theywill go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you haveto stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, theywill keep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the cargo area of yourvehicle. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded downunless you need to.

366

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer/retailer or a professionaltowing service if you need to have your disabledvehicle towed. See Roadside Assistance Programon page 524.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes (such as behinda motorhome), see “Recreational VehicleTowing” following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind amotorhome. The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghytowing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground) and “dolly towing” (towingyour vehicle with two wheels on the ground andtwo wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).

With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicles can be towed in these ways. See “DinghyTowing” and “Dolly Towing” following in thissection.

Here are some important things to consider beforeyou do recreational vehicle towing:

• What’s the towing capacity of the towingvehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long theycan tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer/retailer or traileringprofessional for additional advice andequipment recommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just asyou would prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle isprepared to be towed. See Before Leaving ona Long Trip on page 352.

367

Dinghy TowingIf you have a front-wheel-drive vehicle, it can bedinghy towed from the front. These vehiclesmay also be towed by putting the front wheels ona dolly. See “Dolly Towing” later in this section.

If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, it canbe dinghy towed from the front. You can also towthese vehicles by placing them on a platformtrailer with all four wheels off of the ground.These vehicles cannot be towed using a dolly.

For vehicles being dinghy towed, the vehicleshould be run at the beginning of each day andat each RV fuel stop for about five minutes.This will ensure proper lubrication of transmissioncomponents. Put the IGN (Ignition) fuse in tostart the vehicle.

To tow your vehicle from the front with all fourwheels on the ground:

1. Position the vehicle to tow and then secure it.

2. Turn the ignition to OFF.

3. Set the parking brake.

4. To prevent your battery from draining whilethe vehicle is being towed, remove the IGN(Ignition) fuse from the underhood fuse block.See Underhood Fuse Block on page 493.

5. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY.

368

6. Shift your transmission to NEUTRAL (N).

7. Release the parking brake.

Notice: If you tow your vehicle withoutperforming each of the steps listed under“Dinghy Towing,” you could damage theautomatic transmission. Be sure to follow allsteps of the dinghy towing procedure priorto and after towing your vehicle.

Notice: If you exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) whiletowing your vehicle, it could be damaged.Never exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towingyour vehicle.

Once you have reached your destination, do thefollowing:


2. Turn the ignition key to OFF and remove thekey from the ignition.

3. Reinstall the IGN (Ignition) fuse.

Notice: Don’t tow a vehicle with the frontdrive wheels on the ground if one of the fronttires is a compact spare tire. Towing withtwo different tire sizes on the front of thevehicle can cause severe damage to thetransmission.

Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)

All-wheel-drive vehicles must not be towed withtwo wheels on the ground. To properly towthese vehicles, they should be placed on aplatform trailer with all four wheels off of theground or dinghy towed from the front.

369

Dolly Towing (Front-Wheel-DriveVehicles Only)

To tow your front-wheel-drive vehicle from thefront with two wheels on the ground:1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.2. Move the shift lever to PARK (P).3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead

position with a clamping device designedfor towing.

5. Release the parking brake.

Towing Your Vehicle From the Rear

Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rearcould damage it. Also, repairs would notbe covered by the warranty. Never have yourvehicle towed from the rear.

Do not tow your vehicle from the rear.

370

Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipmentand drive properly, you can lose controlwhen you pull a trailer. For example, if thetrailer is too heavy, the brakes may notwork well — or even at all. You and yourpassengers could be seriously injured.You may also damage your vehicle; theresulting repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Pull a trailer only if youhave followed all the steps in this section.Ask your dealer/retailer for advice andinformation about towing a trailer withyour vehicle.

To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle,you should read the information in “Weight ofthe Trailer” that appears later in this section.

But trailering is different than just driving yourvehicle by itself. Trailering means changesin handling, acceleration, braking, durability andfuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to be used properly.

That’s the reason for this part. In it are manytime-tested, important trailering tips and safetyrules. Many of these are important for your safetyand that of your passengers. So please readthis section carefully before you pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine,transmission, rear axle, wheel assemblies and tiresare forced to work harder against the drag ofthe added weight. The engine is requiredto operate at relatively higher speeds and undergreater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more,the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,increasing the pulling requirements.

371

If You Do Decide to Pull a TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speedlimit restrictions, having to do with trailering.Make sure your rig will be legal, not only whereyou live but also where you’ll be driving.A good source for this information can be stateor provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. You can ask ahitch dealer/retailer about sway controls.

• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first500 miles (805 km) your new vehicle is driven.Your engine, axle or other parts could bedamaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) thatyou tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle.This helps your engine and other parts ofyour vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing atrailer. Don’t drive faster than the maximumposted speed for trailers, or no more than55 mph (90 km/h), to save wear on yourvehicle’s parts.

• You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want toshift the transmission to a lower gear selectionif the transmission shifts too often (e.g., underheavy loads and/or hilly conditions). See“Tow/Haul Mode” later in this section.

Three important considerations have to do withweight:

• the weight of the trailer

• the weight of the trailer tongue

• and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires

372

Tow/Haul ModeTow/Haul is a feature that assists when pulling aheavy trailer or a large or heavy load. The purposeof the Tow/Haul mode is to:

• Reduce the frequency and improve thepredictability of transmission shifts when pullinga heavy trailer or a large or heavy load.

• Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling aheavy trailer or a large or heavy load as whenthe vehicle is unloaded.

• Improve control of vehicle speed while requiringless throttle pedal activity when pulling a heavytrailer or a large or heavy load.

• Increase the charging system voltage to assistin recharging a battery installed in a trailer.

Press this button onthe console toenable/disable thetow/haul mode.

A light on the instrumentpanel will come on toindicate that tow/haulmode has beenselected.

Tow/Haul may be turned off by pressing thebutton again, at which time the indicator light onthe instrument panel will turn off. The vehiclewill automatically turn off Tow/Haul every timeit is started.Tow/Haul is designed to be most effective whenthe vehicle and trailer combined weight is atleast 75 percent of the vehicle’s Gross CombinedWeight Rating (GCWR). See Weight of the Trailerlater in this section. Tow/Haul is most usefulunder the following driving conditions:

• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large orheavy load through rolling terrain.

• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large orheavy load in stop and go traffic.

• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavyload in busy parking lots where improved lowspeed control of the vehicle is desired.

373

Operating the vehicle in tow/haul when lightlyloaded or with no trailer at all will not causedamage. However, there is no benefit to theselection of Tow/Haul when the vehicle isunloaded. Such a selection when unloaded mayresult in unpleasant engine and transmissiondriving characteristics and reduced fuel economy.Tow/Haul is recommended only when pulling aheavy trailer or a large or heavy load.

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how you plan to use your rig.For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much your vehicle is usedto pull a trailer are all important. It can also dependon any special equipment that you have on yourvehicle, and the amount of tongue weight thevehicle can carry. See “Weight of the TrailerTongue” later in this section for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assumingonly the driver is in the tow vehicle and ithas all the required trailering equipment.

The weight of additional optional equipment,passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must besubtracted from the maximum trailer weight.

Look in the following chart to find the maximumtrailer weight for your vehicle.

Package MaximumTrailer Weight *GCWR

Front-WheelDrive

4,500 lbs(2 041 kg)

9,500 lbs(4 309 kg)

All-Wheel Drive 4,500 lbs(2 041 kg)

9,700 lbs(4 400 kg)

*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)is the total allowable weight of the completelyloaded vehicle and trailer including anypassengers, cargo, equipment and conversions.The GCWR for your vehicle should not beexceeded.

Ask your dealer/retailer for our traileringinformation or advice, or write us at our CustomerAssistance Offices. See Customer AssistanceOffices on page 522 for more information.

374

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an importantweight to measure because it affects the totalor gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross VehicleWeight (GVW) includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, andthe people who will be riding in the vehicle. If youhave a lot of options, equipment, passengersor cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight your vehicle can carry, which will alsoreduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow.And if you tow a trailer, you must add the tongueload to the GVW because your vehicle will becarrying that weight, too. See Loading YourVehicle on page 361 for more information aboutyour vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch or aweight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A)should weigh 10-15 percent of the total loadedtrailer weight (B).

After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailerand then the tongue, separately, to see if theweights are proper. If they aren’t, you may be ableto get them right simply by moving some itemsaround in the trailer.

Trailering may also be limited by the vehicle’sability to carry tongue weight. Tongue weightcannot cause the vehicle to exceed theGVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or theRGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating).

375

The effect of additional weight may reduce yourtrailering capacity more than the total of theadditional weight.

Consider the following example:A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs(2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axleand 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It hasa GVWR of 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg), a RGAWRof 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a GCWR (GrossCombination Weight Rating) of 14,000 lbs(6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:

You can expect tongue weight to be at least10 percent of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) andbecause the weight is applied well behind the rearaxle, the effect on the rear axle will be greater thanjust the weight itself, as much as 1.5 times as much.

The weight at the rear axle could be 850 lbs(386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg). Since the rearaxle already weighs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg), adding1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the total to 3,975 lbs(1 803 kg). This is very close to, but within the limitfor RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set to trailerup to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).

But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped withsome of the latest options and you have a frontseat passenger and two rear seat passengers withsome luggage and gear in the vehicle as well.You may add 300 lbs (136 kg) to the front axleweight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear axleweight. Your vehicle now weighs:

Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and youmay think that you should subtract 700 additionalpounds (318 kg) from your trailering capacityto stay within GCWR limits. Your maximumtrailer would only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg).

376

You may go further and think you must limittongue weight to less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) toavoid exceeding GVWR. But, you must stillconsider the effect on the rear axle. Because yourrear axle now weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), youcan only put 900 lbs (408 kg) on the rear axlewithout exceeding RGAWR. The effect of tongueweight is about 1.5 times the actual weight.Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves youwith being able to handle only 600 lbs (272 kg) oftongue weight. Since tongue weight is usuallyat least 10 percent of total loaded trailer weight,you can expect that the largest trailer your vehiclecan properly handle is 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).

It is important that you make sure your vehicledoes not exceed any of its ratings — GCWR,GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Ratingor Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure youare not exceeding any of these ratings is to weighyour vehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upperlimit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on theCertification/Tire label. See Loading Your Vehicleon page 361. Then be sure you don’t go over theGVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight ofthe trailer tongue.

HitchesIt’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and roughroads are a few reasons why you’ll need theright hitch. Here are some rules to follow:

• The rear bumper on your vehicle is notintended for hitches. Do not attach rentalhitches or other bumper-type hitches to it.Use only a frame-mounted hitch that does notattach to the bumper.

• Will you have to make any holes in the body ofyour vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?If you do, then be sure to seal the holes laterwhen you remove the hitch. If you don’t sealthem, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from yourexhaust can get into your vehicle. See EngineExhaust on page 138. Dirt and water can, too.

377

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains between yourvehicle and your trailer. Cross the safetychains under the tongue of the trailer so that thetongue will not drop to the road if it becomesseparated from the hitch. Instructions about safetychains may be provided by the hitch manufactureror by the trailer manufacturer. Follow themanufacturer’s recommendation for attachingsafety chains and do not attach them to thebumper. Always leave just enough slack so youcan turn with your rig. And, never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer BrakesIf you tow more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg), use trailerbrakes. Because your vehicle has anti-lock brakes,don’t try to tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic brakesystem. If you do, both brake systems won’twork well, or at all.

Be sure to read and follow the instructions for thetrailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjustand maintain them properly.

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certain amount ofexperience. Before setting out for the open road,you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaintyourself with the feel of handling and braking withthe added weight of the trailer. And alwayskeep in mind that the vehicle you are driving isnow a good deal longer and not nearly asresponsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains, electrical connector,lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer movingand then apply the trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes are working. This lets youcheck your electrical connection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be surethat the load is secure, and that the lamps and anytrailer brakes are still working.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle aheadas you would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This can help you avoid situationsthat require heavy braking and sudden turns.

378

PassingYou’ll need more passing distance up ahead whenyou’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re agood deal longer, you’ll need to go much fartherbeyond the passed vehicle before you canreturn to your lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel withone hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left,just move that hand to the left. To move the trailerto the right, move your hand to the right. Alwaysback up slowly and, if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making TurnsNotice: Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer to come incontact with the vehicle. Your vehicle couldbe damaged. Avoid making very sharp turnswhile trailering.

When you’re turning with a trailer, make widerturns than normal. Do this so your trailerwon’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs,trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers. Signal well in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerWhen you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need adifferent turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring.Check with your dealer/retailer. The arrowson your instrument panel will flash whenever yousignal a turn or lane change. Properly hookedup, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling otherdrivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash for turns even if thebulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you maythink drivers behind you are seeing your signalwhen they are not. It’s important to checkoccasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs arestill working.

379

Driving on GradesYour vehicle is designed primarily as a passengerand load carrying vehicle. If you tow a trailer,your vehicle will require more frequentmaintenance due to the additional load. Becauseof the added load of the trailer, your vehicle’sengine may overheat on hot days, when going upa long or steep grade with a trailer. If the enginecoolant temperature gage indicates overheating,turn off the air conditioning to reduce engine load,pull off the road and stop in a safe spot.

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear beforeyou start down a long or steep downgrade. If youdon’t shift down, you might have to use yourbrakes so much that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduceyour speed to around 55 mph (88 km/h) to reducethe possibility of the engine and the transmissionoverheating.

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle,with a trailer attached, on a hill.If something goes wrong, your rig couldstart to move. People can be injured, andboth your vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,here’s how to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shiftinto PARK (P).When parking uphill, turn your wheels awayfrom the curb. When parking downhill,turn your wheels into the curb.

2. Have someone place chocks behind thetrailer wheels.

380

3. When the chocks are in place, release theregular brakes until the chocks absorbthe load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply yourparking brake and shift into PARK (P).

5. Release the regular brakes.

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal

down while you:

• start your engine,

• shift into a gear, and

• release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of thechocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and storethe chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more oftenwhen you’re pulling a trailer. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 502 for more information.Things that are especially important in traileroperation are automatic transmission fluid(don’t overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, drivebelt, cooling system and brake system. Each ofthese is covered in this manual, and the Index willhelp you find them quickly. If you’re trailering,it’s a good idea to review this information beforeyou start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts andbolts are tight.

381

Trailer Wiring HarnessYour vehicle is equipped with the following wiringharness for towing a trailer.

Basic Trailer Wiring

The trailer wiring harness, with a seven-pinconnector, is located at the rear of the vehicleand is tied to the vehicle’s frame. The harnessconnector can be plugged into a seven-pinuniversal heavy-duty trailer connector availablethrough your dealer/retailer.

The seven-wire harness contains the followingtrailer circuits:

• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal

• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal

• Brown: Taillamps

• White: Ground

• Light Green: Back-up Lamps

• Red: Battery Feed*

• Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*

*The fuses for these two circuits are installed inthe underhood electrical center, but the wiresare not connected. They should be connected byyour dealer/retailer or a qualified service center.

If you are charging a remote (non-vehicle) battery,press the tow/haul mode button located at theend of the shift lever. This will boost the vehiclesystem voltage and properly charge the battery.If the trailer is too light for tow/haul mode, you canturn on the headlamps (Non-HID only) as asecond way to boost the vehicle system andcharge the battery.

Engine Cooling When Trailer TowingYour cooling system may temporarily overheatduring severe operating conditions. See EngineOverheating on page 410.

382

Service ........................................................ 385Accessories and Modifications ................... 385California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 386Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 386Adding Equipment to the Outside

of Your Vehicle ...................................... 387Fuel ............................................................. 387

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 388Gasoline Specifications .............................. 388California Fuel ........................................... 388Additives ................................................... 389Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 390Filling the Tank ......................................... 390Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 393

Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 394Hood Release ........................................... 395Engine Compartment Overview .................. 396Engine Oil ................................................. 397Engine Oil Life System .............................. 400Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 402Automatic Transmission Fluid .................... 404Engine Coolant .......................................... 406Radiator Pressure Cap .............................. 410Engine Overheating ................................... 410

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode ..................................... 412

Cooling System ......................................... 413Power Steering Fluid ................................. 419Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 420Brakes ...................................................... 421Battery ...................................................... 424Jump Starting ............................................ 425

All-Wheel Drive ........................................... 430Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 431Bulb Replacement ....................................... 432

High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ..... 432Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 432License Plate Lamp ................................... 433Replacement Bulbs ................................... 433

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 434Tires ............................................................ 435

Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 436Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 439Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 442Tire Pressure Monitor System ................... 444Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 448When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 450

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

383

Buying New Tires ...................................... 450Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 452Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 453Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 454Wheel Replacement .................................. 454Tire Chains ............................................... 456If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 457Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 458Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 459Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire ....................................... 463Secondary Latch System ........................... 468Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 472Compact Spare Tire .................................. 477

Appearance Care ........................................ 478Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 478Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 480Leather ...................................................... 481Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 481Care of Safety Belts .................................. 482Weatherstrips ............................................ 482Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 482Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 483

Finish Care ............................................... 483Windshield, Backglass, and

Wiper Blades ......................................... 484Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels

and Trim ................................................ 484Tires ......................................................... 485Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 486Finish Damage .......................................... 486Underbody Maintenance ............................ 486Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 486Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 487

Vehicle Identification .................................. 488Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 488Service Parts Identification Label ............... 488

Electrical System ........................................ 489High Voltage Devices and Wiring .............. 489Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 489Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 490Power Windows and Other

Power Options ....................................... 490Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 490Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..................... 490Underhood Fuse Block .............................. 493

Capacities and Specifications .................... 497

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

384

ServiceYour dealer/retailer knows your vehicle best andwants you to be happy with it. We hope you will goto your dealer/retailer for all your service needs.You will get genuine GM parts and GM-trained andsupported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle allGM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-GM accessories to your vehiclethey can affect your vehicle’s performance andsafety, including such things as, airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systemslike anti-lock brakes, traction control andstability control. Some of these accessories mayeven cause malfunction or damage not coveredby warranty.

GM Accessories are designed to complement andfunction with other systems on your vehicle.Your GM dealer/retailer can accessorize yourvehicle using genuine GM Accessories. When yougo to your GM dealer/retailer and ask for GMAccessories, you will know that GM-trained andsupported service technicians will perform the workusing genuine GM Accessories.

385

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engine exhaust,many parts and systems (including some insidethe vehicle), many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/or emit thesechemicals.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficientknowledge, experience, the properreplacement parts, and toolsbefore you attempt any vehiclemaintenance task.

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English andmetric fasteners can be easilyconfused. If you use the wrongfasteners, parts can later break orfall off. You could be hurt.

386

If you want to do some of your own service work,you should use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how to service yourvehicle than this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 535.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 90.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Maintenance Recordon page 514.

Adding Equipment to the Outsideof Your VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your dealer/retailerbefore adding equipment to the outside of yourvehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an importantpart of the proper maintenance of your vehicle.To help keep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, we recommendthe use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline.

387

Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 87 or higher. For best performanceor trailer towing, you could choose to use middlegrade 89 octane unleaded gasoline. If theoctane rating is less than 87, you might noticean audible knocking noise when you drive,commonly referred to as spark knock. If thisoccurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higheras soon as possible. If you are using gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavyknocking, the engine needs service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. Somegasolines contain an octane-enhancing additivecalled methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against theuse of gasolines containing MMT. See Additiveson page 389 for additional information.

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operateon fuels that meet California specifications.See the underhood emission control label.If this fuel is not available in states adoptingCalifornia emissions standards, your vehicle willoperate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control systemperformance might be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and your vehicle mightfail a smog-check test. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 226. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis.If it is determined that the condition is causedby the type of fuel used, repairs might notbe covered by your warranty.

388

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in theUnited States are now required to contain additivesthat help prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing the emissioncontrol system to work properly. In most cases,you should not have to add anything to thefuel. However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meetU.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intake valvesclean, or if your vehicle experiences problems dueto dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline thatis advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.Also, your dealer/retailer has additives thatwill help correct and prevent most deposit-relatedproblems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethersand ethanol, and reformulated gasolines mightbe available in your area. We recommendthat you use these gasolines, if they complywith the specifications described earlier.

However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 10% ethanol must not beused in vehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and also damageplastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldnot be covered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions can contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.We recommend against the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life ofspark plugs and the performance of the emissioncontrol system could be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,return to your dealer/retailer for service.

389

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outsidethe United States or Canada, the proper fuel mightbe hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline orany other fuel not recommended in the previoustext on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use ofimproper fuel would not be covered by yourwarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuelor refueling your vehicle. Do not usecellular phones. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattended whenrefueling your vehicle. This is against thelaw in some places. Do not re-enter thevehicle while pumping fuel. Keep childrenaway from the fuel pump; never let childrenpump fuel.

390

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hingedfuel door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

To open the fuel door, push the rearward centeredge in and release. The door will pop open.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowlycounterclockwise. The fuel cap has a springin it; if the cap is released too soon, it willspring back to the right.

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel capfrom the hook on the fuel door.

391

{CAUTION:

Fuel can spray out on you if you open thefuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel andthen something ignites it, you could bebadly burned. This spray can happen ifyour tank is nearly full, and is more likelyin hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any hiss noise to stop.Then unscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon aspossible. See Washing Your Vehicle on page 482.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise untilit clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.The diagnostic system can determine if the fuelcap has been left off or improperly installed.This would allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 226.

If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center(DIC), the TIGHTEN GAS CAP message will bedisplayed if the fuel cap is not properly installed.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, donot remove the nozzle. Shut off the flowof fuel by shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant. Leave thearea immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure toget the right type. Your dealer/ retailer canget one for you. If you get the wrong type,it may not fit properly. This may cause yourmalfunction indicator lamp to light andmay damage your fuel tank and emissionssystem. See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 226.

392

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container whileit is in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignitethe gasoline vapor. You can be badlyburned and your vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to you andothers:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is insidea vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other than theground.



• Bring the fill nozzle in contact withthe inside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumpinggasoline.

• Do not use a cellular phone whilepumping gasoline.

393

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can startup and injure you even when the engineis not running. Keep hands, clothing,and tools away from any underhoodelectric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids,and plastic or rubber. You or otherscould be burned. Be careful not to dropor spill things that will burn onto ahot engine.

394

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the hoodrelease handle withthis symbol on it.It is located underthe instrument panelon the driver’sside of the vehicle.

2. At the front of the vehicle, pull up on thecenter of the hood, and push the secondaryhood release to the right.

3. After you have partially lifted the hood, gasstruts will automatically take over to lift andhold the hood in the fully open position.

Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps areon properly.

Pull the hood down to close. Lower the hood untilthe lifting pressure of the strut is reduced. Thenallow the hood to fall and latch into place under itsown weight. Check to make sure the hood isclosed. If the hood does not fully latch, gently pushthe hood down at the front and center of thehood until it is completely latched.

395

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you lift the hood, here is what you will see:

396

A. Radiator Pressure Cap (Out of View).See Radiator Pressure Cap on page 410.

B. Engine Coolant Recovery Cap. See CoolingSystem on page 413.

C. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood FuseBlock on page 493.

D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See JumpStarting on page 425.

E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See PowerSteering Fluid on page 419.

F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 397.

G. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 397.

H. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick.See “Checking the Fluid Level” underAutomatic Transmission Fluid on page 404.

I. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 421.

J. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 402.

K. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir.See “Adding Washer Fluid” underWindshield Washer Fluid on page 420.

Engine Oil

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 396for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oilseveral minutes to drain back into the oilpan. If you do not do this, the oil dipstick mightnot show the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,and check the level.

397

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tipof the dipstick, you need to add at least onequart/liter of oil. But you must use the right kind.This section explains what kind of oil to use.For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacitiesand Specifications on page 497.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets abovethe cross-hatched area that shows theproper operating range, the engine couldbe damaged.

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 396 for thelocation of the engineoil fill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range in thecross-hatched area. Push the dipstick all theway back in when you are through.

398

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for three things:

• GM6094MYour vehicle’s engine requires oil meetingGM Standard GM6094M. Look for and use onlyan oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 isbest for your vehicle.

These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

• Oils meeting theserequirements shouldhave the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. Thissymbol indicates thatthe oil has beencertified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

Look for this information on the oil container, anduse only those oils that are identified as meetingGM Standard GM6094M and have the starburstsymbol on the front of the oil container.

Notice: Use only engine oil identified asmeeting GM Standard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum Institute CertifiedFor Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failureto use the recommended oil can result inengine damage not covered by your warranty.

GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirementsfor your vehicle.

399

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provideeasier cold starting and better protection forthe engine at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meetGM Standard GM6094M are all you need forgood performance and engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets youknow when to change the engine oil and filter.This is based on engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage. Based on drivingconditions, the mileage at which an oil changewill be indicated can vary considerably. For the oillife system to work properly, you must reset thesystem every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil changeis necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will come on. Change the oil as soon aspossible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).It is possible that, if you are driving under the bestconditions, the oil life system might not indicatethat an oil change is necessary for over ayear. However, the engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and at this time thesystem must be reset. Your dealer/retailer hastrained service people who will perform this workusing genuine parts and reset the system. It isalso important to check the oil regularly and keepit at the proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) sinceyour last oil change. Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

400

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when tochange the engine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Whenever the oil is changed, reset thesystem so it can calculate when the next oilchange is required. If a situation occurs whereyou change the oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message being turned on, resetthe system.

If your vehicle does not have a Driver InformationCenter (DIC):

1. Turn the ignition to ON, with the engine off.

2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedalslowly three times within five seconds.

3. Turn the key to OFF.If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messagecomes back on when you start your vehicle,the engine oil life system has not reset.Repeat the procedure.

If your vehicle has a DIC:

1. Turn the ignition to ON, with the engine off.

2. Press the MODE button until the DICreads OIL LIFE LEFT/HOLD SET TO RESET.

3. Press and hold the SET button until 100% isdisplayed.You will hear three chimes and the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message will go off.

4. Turn the key to OFF.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messagecomes back on when you start your vehicle,the engine oil life system has not reset.Repeat the procedure.

401

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that canbe unhealthy for your skin and could evencause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on yourskin for very long. Clean your skin and nailswith soap and water, or a good hand cleaner.Wash or properly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oilproducts.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Never dispose ofoil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on theground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies ofwater. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a placethat collects used oil. If you have a problemproperly disposing of used oil, ask yourdealer/retailer, a service station, or a localrecycling center for help.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterWhen to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil changeafter each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval.See Scheduled Maintenance on page 502 formore information. If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at each engineoil change.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 396for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.

402

How to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filterfrom the vehicle and lightly shake the filter(away from vehicle) to release loose dust and dirt.If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new filteris required.

To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,do the following:

1. Loosen the screws that hold the cover on.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector.

3. Lift off the cover.

4. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter elementand any loose debris that may be found in theair cleaner base.

5. Inspect or replace the air filter element.

6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall thecover and reconnect the electrical connector.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you or othersto be burned. The air cleaner not onlycleans the air; it helps to stop flames ifthe engine backfires. If it is not there andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with theair cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into your engine, which willdamage it. Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.

403

Automatic Transmission Fluid

When to Check and Change AutomaticTransmission FluidA good time to check the automatic transmissionfluid level is when the engine oil is changed.

Change the fluid at the intervals listed in AdditionalRequired Services on page 504, and be sure touse the transmission fluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 511.

How to Check Automatic TransmissionFluidBecause this operation can be a little difficult, youmay choose to have this done at the dealer/retailerservice department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all theinstructions here, or you could get a false readingon the dipstick.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid candamage your transmission. Too much canmean that some of the fluid could come outand fall on hot engine parts or exhaust systemparts, starting a fire. Too little fluid couldcause the transmission to overheat. Be sure toget an accurate reading if you check yourtransmission fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking thetransmission fluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures are above90°F (32°C).

• At high speed for quite a while.

• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.

• While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid should be atnormal operating temperature, which is 180°F to200°F (82°C to 93°C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures areabove 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),you may have to drive longer.

404

Checking the Fluid LevelPrepare the vehicle as follows:

1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep theengine running.

2. With the parking brake applied, place the shiftlever in PARK (P).

3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move theshift lever through each gear, pausing forabout three seconds in each one. Then,position the shift lever in PARK (P).

4. Let the engine run at idle for three tofive minutes.

Then, without shutting off the engine, followthese steps:

The transmission fluiddipstick cap has thissymbol on it, andis located near thefront of the enginecompartment.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 396for more information on location.

1. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a cleanrag or paper towel.

2. Reinstall back in all the way, waitthree seconds and then pull it back outagain.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read thelower level. The fluid level must be in thecrosshatched area.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,twist & lock dipstick cap in place.

405

How to Add Automatic TransmissionFluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of transmission fluid to use. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 511.

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of theproper fluid to bring the level into the crosshatchedarea on the dipstick.1. Remove the dipstick.2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at

the dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.It does not take much fluid, generallyless than one half of a pint (0.25 L).Do not overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damage your vehicle,and the damages may not be covered byyour warranty. Always use the automatictransmission fluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 511.3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as

described under “How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.

4. When the correct fluid level is obtained,twist & lock dipstick cap in place.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five years or150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occursfirst, if you add only DEX-COOL® extendedlife coolant.

The following explains your cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If you havea problem with engine overheating or if you needto add coolant to the radiator, see EngineOverheating on page 410.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to−34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work asthey should.

406

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core, orradiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, at thefirst maintenance service after each30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolantmixture, you do not need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, can boilbefore the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you would notget the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others could beburned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

407

If coolant needs to be added more than four timesa year, have your dealer/retailer check thecooling system.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system, youcould damage your vehicle. Use only theproper mixture of the engine coolant listed inthis manual for the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 511 for more information.

Checking CoolantThe coolant recoverytank cap has thissymbol on it.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 396for more information on the location of thecoolant recovery tank.

The vehicle must be on a level surface whenchecking the coolant level.

When the engine is cold, the coolant level shouldbe at the FULL COLD line or a little higher.When the engine is warm, the level could beabove the FULL COLD level. The FULL COLD lineis marked on the coolant recovery tank.

408

Adding CoolantIf more coolant is needed, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolantrecovery tank, but be careful not to spill it.

If the coolant recovery tank is completely empty,add coolant to the radiator. See EngineOverheating on page 410.

{CAUTION:

Turning the radiator pressure capwhen the engine and radiator are hot canallow steam and scalding liquids to blowout and burn you badly. With the coolantrecovery tank, you will almost never haveto add coolant at the radiator. Neverturn the radiator pressure cap — even alittle — when the engine and radiatorare hot.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Occasionally check the coolant level in theradiator. For information on how to add coolant tothe radiator, see Cooling System on page 413.

409

Radiator Pressure Cap

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 396for more information on location.

Engine OverheatingThere is an engine coolant temperature gage onyour vehicle’s instrument panel. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gage on page 225.

Your vehicle may also have an ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE and ENGINEOVERHEATED STOP ENGINE messagedisplayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC).See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 244.

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine canburn you badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away from the engine if yousee or hear steam coming from it. Turn itoff and get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Wait untilthere is no sign of steam or coolantbefore you open the hood.


410


If you keep driving when the vehiclesengine is overheated, the liquids in it cancatch fire. You or others could be badlyburned. Stop your engine if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until the engineis cool.

See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 412 forinformation on driving to a safe place inan emergency.

Notice: If your engine catches fire because youkeep driving with no coolant, your vehicle canbe badly damaged. The costly repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. See OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode on page 412for information on driving to a safe place in anemergency.

If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngineIf you get an engine overheat warning but see orhear no steam, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine can get a littletoo hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highestfan speed and open the windows asnecessary.

3. If you are in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);otherwise, shift to the highest gear whiledriving — DRIVE (D) or LOW (L).

411

If you no longer have the overheat warning,you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower forabout 10 minutes. If the warning does notcome back on, you can drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and parkyour vehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine forthree minutes while you are parked. If you stillhave the warning, turn off the engine andget everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down.Also, see “Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode” later in this section.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to getservice help right away.

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating ModeThis emergency operating mode lets your vehiclebe driven to a safe place in an emergency situation.If an overheated engine condition exists, anoverheat protection mode which alternates firinggroups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage.In this mode, there is a significant loss in power andengine performance. The temperature gageindicates an overheat condition exists. Drivingextended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in theoverheat protection mode should be avoided.

Notice: After driving in the overheated engineprotection operating mode, to avoid enginedamage, allow the engine to cool beforeattempting any repair. The engine oil will beseverely degraded. Repair the cause of coolantloss, change the oil and reset the oil lifesystem. See Engine Oil on page 397.

412

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here iswhat you will see:

A. Engine Coolant ReservoirB. Radiator Pressure Cap (covered)C. Engine Cooling Fans

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under thehood can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you.Keep hands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.

413

When the engine is cold, the coolant level shouldbe at least up to the FULL COLD mark. If it is not,you may have a leak at the pressure cap or in theradiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pumpor somewhere else in the cooling system.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do not touchthem. If you do, you can be burned.Do not run the engine if there is a leak.If you run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,check to see if the electric engine cooling fans arerunning. If the engine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not, your vehicleneeds service.

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered by yourwarranty.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core, orradiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changing sooner, at30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

414

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantRecovery Tank

Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fillprocedure. Failure to follow this procedurecould cause your engine to overheat andbe severely damaged.

If you have not found a problem yet, check to seeif coolant is visible in the coolant recovery tank.If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at orabove the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixtureof clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®

coolant at the coolant recovery tank, but be surethe cooling system, including the coolant recoverytank pressure cap, is cool before you do it. SeeEngine Coolant on page 406 for more information.

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the radiator pressure cap — evena little — they can come out at highspeed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the radiatorpressure cap, is hot. Wait for the coolingsystem and radiator pressure cap to coolif you ever have to turn the pressure cap.

415

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolant andthe proper coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank isat the FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.If the overheat warning continues, there is onemore thing you can try. You can add the propermixture directly to the radiator, but be surethe cooling system is cool before you do it.

416

1. To remove the panel that covers the radiatorcap, detach fasteners and lift off panel.

2. Remove the radiator pressure cap when thecooling system, including the upper radiatorhose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure capslowly counterclockwise about one full turn.If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hissmeans there is still some pressure left.

3. Keep turning thepressure cap slowly,and remove it.

4. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture, up to the base of the fillerneck. See Engine Coolant on page 406for more information about the proper coolantmixture.

417

5. Fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULLCOLD mark.

6. Reinstall the cap on the coolant recovery tank,but leave the radiator pressure cap off.

7. Start the engine and let it run until you canfeel the upper radiator hose getting hot.Watch out for the engine cooling fan.

8. By this time, the coolant level inside theradiator filler neck may be lower. If the level islower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture through the filler neck until thelevel reaches the base of the filler neck.Replace the pressure cap.

At any time during this procedure if coolant beginsto flow out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressurecap. Be sure to secure it tightly.

418

Power Steering Fluid

The power steering fluidreservoir is locatedtoward the front of theengine compartmenton the passenger’s sideof the vehicle. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 396for reservoir location.

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid unless you suspect there is a leakin the system or you hear an unusual noise. A fluidloss in this system could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power Steering FluidTo check the power steering fluid, do the following:

1. Turn the key off and let the enginecompartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with aclean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and look at thefluid level on the dipstick.

The fluid level should be somewhere within thecross-hatched area on the dipstick. If the fluid isat the ADD mark, you should add fluid.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 511.Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use theproper fluid can cause leaks and damage hosesand seals.

419

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen adding windshield washer fluid, be sure toread the manufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If operating your vehicle in an area where thetemperature may fall below freezing, use a fluidthat has sufficient protection against freezing.

Adding Washer FluidWhen the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low,a WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID messagewill be displayed on the Driver Information Center(DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 244 for more information.

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 396for reservoir location.

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.

• Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for fluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank if it iscompletely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damagethe vehicle’s windshield washer systemand paint.

420

Brakes

Brake Fluid

The brake mastercylinder reservoir isfilled with DOT-3 brakefluid. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 396 for thelocation of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The firstis that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out ofthe brake system. If it is, you should have thebrake system fixed, since a leak means thatsooner or later the brakes will not work well.

So, it is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If youadd fluid when the linings are worn, then you willhave too much fluid when you get new brakelinings. You should add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work is done onthe brake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, itcan spill on the engine. The fluid will burnif the engine is hot enough. You or otherscould be burned, and your vehicle couldbe damaged. Add brake fluid only whenwork is done on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brakewarning light comes on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 222.

421

What to AddWhen you need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brakefluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed containeronly. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 511.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and thearea around the cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brakesystem, the brakes may not work well.This could cause a crash. Always use theproper brake fluid.

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in the brake system candamage brake system parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 482.

422

Brake WearYour vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except when youare pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon the brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates can cause abrake squeal when the brakes are first appliedor lightly applied. This does not mean somethingis wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities and Specifications onpage 497.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal doesnot return to normal height, or if there is arapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might be required.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you apply the brakes, with or withoutthe vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.

423

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Itsmany parts have to be of top quality and work welltogether if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. Your vehicle was designed and testedwith top-quality brake parts. When you replaceparts of the braking system — for example, whenthe brake linings wear down and you neednew ones put in — be sure you get new approvedreplacement parts. If you do not, the brakesmight not work properly. For example, if someoneputs in brake linings that are wrong for yourvehicle, the balance between the front and rearbrakes can change — for the worse. The brakingperformance you have come to expect canchange in many other ways if someone puts in thewrong replacement brake parts.

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, get one that hasthe replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®

replacement battery. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 396 for battery location.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm.Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)cable from the battery. This will help keep thebattery from running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 425 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

424

Jump StartingIf your vehicle’s battery has run down, you maywant to use another vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or

ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is nota 12-volt system with a negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged. Only use vehicleswith 12-volt systems with negative grounds tojump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection you do notwant. You would not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure. Putan automatic transmission in PARK (P) or amanual transmission in NEUTRAL beforesetting the parking brake. If you have afour-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfercase is not in NEUTRAL.

425

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Always turn off your radio and otheraccessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged intothe cigarette lighter or the accessory poweroutlets. Turn off the radio and all lampsthat are not needed. This will avoid sparksand help save both batteries. And it couldsave the radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+)and negative (−) terminal locations on theother vehicle. Your vehicle has a remotepositive (+) and a remote negative (−) jumpstarting terminal. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 396 for more information onthe terminal locations.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you needmore light.

Be sure the batteries have enough water.You do not need to add water to theACDelco® battery (or batteries) installed inyour new vehicle. But if a battery has fillercaps, be sure the right amount of fluid isthere. If it is low, add water to take care ofthat first. If you do not, explosive gas couldbe present.

Battery fluid contains acid that canburn you. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.

426

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+)will go to positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.Negative (−) will go to a heavy, unpaintedmetal engine part or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) oryou will get a short that would damagethe battery and maybe other parts too. And donot connect the negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.

6. Connect the redpositive (+) cable tothe positive (+)terminal of thedead battery.

Use a remote positive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect itto the positive (+) terminal of the good battery.Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal of the good battery.Use a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything until thenext step. The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the dead battery. It goes toa heavy, unpainted metal engine part, or to aremote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle withthe dead battery.

427

9. Connect the otherend of thenegative (−) cable atleast 18 inches(45 cm) away fromthe dead battery,but not near engineparts that move.

The electrical connection is just as goodthere, and the chance of sparks getting backto the battery is much less.Your vehicle has a remote negative (−)terminal for this purpose.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries,it probably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electricalshorting may occur and damage the vehicle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Always connect and removethe jumper cables in the correct order, makingsure that the cables do not touch each otheror other metal.

428

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part orRemote Negative (−) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) andRemote Negative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

Jumper Cable Removal

429

All-Wheel DriveBe sure to perform the lubricant checks describedin this section. There are two additional systemsthat need lubrication.

Transfer CaseWhen to Check LubricantRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinehow often to check the lubricant. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 502.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should beon a level surface.If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,you will need to add some lubricant. Add enoughlubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the fillerplug hole. Use care not to overtighten the plug.

What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of lubricant to use. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 511.

(A) Drain Plug (B) Filler Plug

430

Rear Drive ModuleWhen to Check LubricantRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinehow often to check the lubricant. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 502.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should beon a level surface.

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,you will need to add some lubricant. Add enoughlubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the fillerplug hole. Use care not to overtighten the plug.

What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of lubricant to use. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 511.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset at the factory andshould need no further adjustment.

However, if your vehicle is damaged in anaccident, the headlamp aim may be affected.Aim adjustment to the low-beam headlamps maybe necessary if oncoming drivers flash theirhigh-beam headlamps at you (for vertical aim).

If you believe your headlamps need to bere-aimed, it is recommend that you take the vehicleto your dealer/retailer for service.(A) Filler Plug (B) Drain Plug

431

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 433.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer/retailer.

High Intensity Discharge (HID)Lighting

{CAUTION:

The high beam and low beam highintensity discharge lighting systemoperates at a very high voltage. If you tryto service any of the system components,you could be seriously injured. Have yourdealer/retailer or a qualified technicianservice them.

Your vehicle may have HID headlamps. After yourvehicle’s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced,you may notice that the beam is a slightly differentshade than it was originally. This is normal.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions on the bulb package.

432

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Remove the two screws holding each of thelicense plate lamps to the liftgate trim.

2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forwardthrough the lift gate trim opening.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andpull the bulb straight out of the socket.

4. Install the new bulb.

5. Reverse steps 1 – 3 to reinstall the licenseplate lamp.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp Bulb Number

License Plate Lamp 194

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer/retailer.

433

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 502 for more information.Replacement blades come in different types andare removed in different ways. To replace the wiperblade assembly, do the following:1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the

windshield.

2. Press the button in the middle of the wiper armconnector, and pull the wiper blade away fromthe arm connector.

3. Install the new wiper blade, and make sure thewiper blade locks into place.

For the proper size and type see NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 512.

Backglass Wiper Blade1. Pull the wiper blade assembly away from the

backglass. The backglass wiper blade will notlock in a vertical position, so care shouldbe used when pulling it away from the vehicle.

2. Rotate the wiper blade assembly, holdthe wiper arm in position and push the bladeaway from the wiper arm.

3. Replace the wiper blade.

4. Return the wiper arm and blade assembly tothe rest position on the glass.

434

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet fordetails. For additional information refer to the tiremanufacturer’s booklet included with your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly usedtires are dangerous.

• Overloading your vehicle’s tires cancause overheating as a result of toomuch friction. You could have anair-out and a serious accident. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 361.



• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checked whenyour vehicle’s tires are cold. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 442.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to becut, punctured, or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit apothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.If the tire’s tread is badly worn,or if your vehicle’s tires have beendamaged, replace them.

435

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The examples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tiresidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particular tire’swidth, height, aspect ratio, construction type, andservice description. See the “Tire Size” illustrationlater in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):The Department of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance withthe U.S. Department of Transportation MotorVehicle Safety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

436

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and underthe tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):Tire manufacturers are required to gradetires based on three performance factors:treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance.For more information see Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 453.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact sparetire or temporary use tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and shouldnot be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).The compact spare tire is for emergency usewhen a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire on page 477 and If a TireGoes Flat on page 457.

Compact Spare Tire Example

437

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under thetread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following the DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire orcompact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressureand inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 442.

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters andnumbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and service description.The letter T as the first character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporary use only.

(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The UnitedStates version of a metric tire sizing system.The letter P as the first character in the tire sizemeans a passenger vehicle tire engineeredto standards set by the U.S. Tire and RimAssociation.

438

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60,as shown in item C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as highas it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction;the letter D means diagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter B means belted-biasply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel ininches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The load indexcan range from 1 to 279. The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire is certified to carry aload. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatic transmission,power steering, power brakes, power windows,power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

439

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built upheat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 442.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 361.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 361.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for therear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 361.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded ontothe sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

440

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 361.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 442 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 361.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in whichthe ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread ofa tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadremains. See When It Is Time for New Tires onpage 450.

441

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 453.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 361.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on anindividual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached toa vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weightand the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 361.

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right.It is not. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

442

A Tire and Loading Information label is attached tothe vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). This label showsyour vehicle’s original equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures for your tires when theyare cold. The recommended cold tire inflationpressure, shown on the label, is the minimumamount of air pressure needed to support yourvehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an example ofthe Tire and Loading Information label, seeLoading Your Vehicle on page 361. How you loadyour vehicle affects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load your vehicle with more weightthan it was designed to carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more. Do notforget to check the compact spare tire, it should beat 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional informationregarding the compact spare tire, see CompactSpare Tire on page 477.

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to checktire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated even when theyare under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirtand moisture.

443

Tire Pressure Monitor SystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) usesradio and sensor technology to check tire pressurelevels. TPMS sensors are mounted onto eachtire and wheel assembly, except the sparetire. TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure inyour vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressurereadings to a receiver located in the vehicle.

The TPMS is designed to alert the driver, if a lowtire pressure condition exists. If your vehicle has theDriver Information Center (DIC), the driver can alsocheck tire pressure levels using the DIC.

When a low tire pressure condition is detected,the TPMS illuminates the low tire pressure warningsymbol located on the instrument panel cluster.If your vehicle has the DIC feature, a messageto check the pressure in a specific tire alsoappears on the DIC display. The low tire pressurewarning symbol on the instrument panel clusterand the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warningmessage on the DIC display appears at eachignition cycle until the tires are inflated to

the correct inflation pressure. For additionalinformation and details about the DIC operationand displays see DIC Operation and Displays(With DIC Buttons) on page 233 or DIC Operationand Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 239and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 244.

You may notice, during cooler weather conditions,the tire pressure monitor light, located on theinstrument panel cluster, and the CHECK TIREPRESSURE message appears when the vehicleis first started and then turn off as you start to drivethe vehicle. This could be an early indicator thatthe tire pressures are getting low and need tobe inflated to the proper pressure.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), shouldbe checked monthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommended by the vehiclemanufacturer on the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires ofa different size than the size indicated on thevehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,you should determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

444

As an added safetyfeature, your vehiclehas been equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoring system(TPMS) that illuminatesa low tire pressuretelltale when oneor more of your tiresis significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and check your tiresas soon as possible, and inflate them to theproper pressure. Driving on a significantlyunder-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat andcan lead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,even if under-inflation has not reached the level totrigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMSmalfunction indicator to indicate when the system isnot operating properly. The TPMS malfunctionindicator is combined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects a malfunction,the telltale will flash for approximately one minuteand then remain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue upon subsequentvehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,the system may not be able to detect or signal lowtire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctionsmay occur for a variety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. Always check the TPMSmalfunction telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to function properly.

445

The Tire and Loading Information label (tireinformation placard) shows the size of yourvehicle’s original tires and the correct inflationpressure for your vehicle’s tires when they are cold.See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 442. For thelocation of the tire and loading information label,see Loading Your Vehicle on page 361.

Your vehicle’s TPMS can alert you about a lowtire pressure condition but it does not replacenormal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 448 and Tires on page 435.

Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if yourvehicle has Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquidsealant can damage the tire pressure monitorsensors.

Resetting the TPMS Identification CodesEach TPMS sensor has a unique identificationcode. Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires orreplace one or more of the TPMS sensors,the identification codes need to be matched tothe new tire/wheel position. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions in the followingorder: driver side front tire, passenger side fronttire, passenger side rear tire, and driver siderear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

The TPMS sensors can also be matched to eachtire/wheel position by increasing or decreasingthe tire’s air pressure. If increasing the tire’sair pressure, do not exceed the maximum inflationpressure indicated on the tire’s sidewall.To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can usethe pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-styleair pressure gage, or a key.

You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheelposition, and five minutes overall to match allfour tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer thantwo minutes to match the first tire and wheel, ormore than five minutes to match all four tire andwheel positions, the matching process stops andyou will need to start over.

446

The TPMS sensor matching process is outlinedbelow:


2. Turn the ignition switch to ON with theengine off.

3. Using the DIC, press the vehicle informationbutton until the PRESS V TO RELEARN TIREPOSITIONS message displays. If your vehicledoes not have the DIC buttons, press the tripodometer reset stem located on the instrumentpanel cluster until the RELEARN TIREPOSITIONS message displays.

4. If your vehicle has the DIC buttons, press theset/reset button. The horn sounds twice toindicate the TPMS receiver is ready, and theTIRE LEARNING ACTIVE messagedisplays. If your vehicle does not have theDIC buttons, press and hold the trip odometerreset stem until the horn chirps twice andthe TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE messageis displayed.

5. Start with the driver side front tire. The driverside front turn signal lamp is on.

6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem.Activate the TPMS sensor by increasingor decreasing the tire’s air pressure forfive seconds, or until a horn chirp sounds.The horn chirp, which may take up to30 seconds to sound, confirms that the sensoridentification code has been matched to thistire and wheel position.

7. Proceed to the passenger side front tire.The passenger side front turn signal lamp is on.Repeat the procedure in Step 6.

8. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire.The passenger side rear turn signal lamp is on.Repeat the procedure in Step 6.

9. Proceed to the driver side rear tire. The driverside rear turn signal lamp is on. Repeat theprocedure in Step 6. Instead of a single hornchirp a double horn chirp signals the TPMSsensor has been matched to this tire and wheelposition and the matching process is no longeractive.

10. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.11. Set all four tires to the recommended air

pressure level as indicated on the Tire andLoading Information label.

12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.

447

The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor.If you replace one of the road tires with the spare,the SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEMmessage displays on the DIC screen. Thismessage should go off once you re-install theroad tire containing the TPMS sensor.

Federal Communications Commission(FCC) and Industry and ScienceCanadaThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency and complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subjectto the following two conditions:



The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency and complies withRSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:




Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate yourtires as soon as possible and check wheelalignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 450and Wheel Replacement on page 454 formore information.

448

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve moreuniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. Thefirst rotation is the most important. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 502.

When rotating your tires, always use the correctrotation pattern shown here.

Do not include the compact spare tire in your tirerotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand rear inflation pressures as shown on theTire and Loading Information label.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properlytightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications on page 497.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this;but be sure to use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rust or dirtoff. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 458.

449

When It Is Time for New TiresOne way to tell when itis time for new tires isto check the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining.

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:• You can see the indicators at three or more

places around the tire.• You can see cord or fabric showing through

the tire’s rubber.• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or

snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage

that cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tires foryour vehicle. The original equipment tires installedon your vehicle, when it was new, were designed tomeet General Motors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC spec) system rating. If you needreplacement tires, GM strongly recommends thatyou get tires with the same TPC Spec rating.This way, your vehicle will continue to have tiresthat are designed to give the same performanceand vehicle safety, during normal use, as theoriginal tires.

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers overa dozen critical specifications that impact theoverall performance of your vehicle, includingbrake system performance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM’s TPC Spec number is moldedonto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.If the tires have an all-season tread design,the TPC spec number will be followed by anMS for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labelingon page 436 for additional information.

450

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires), the vehicle may nothandle properly, and you could have acrash. Using tires of different sizes,brands, or types may also cause damageto your vehicle. Be sure to use the correctsize, brand, and type of tires on allwheels. It is all right to drive with yourcompact spare temporarily, as it wasdeveloped for use on your vehicle.See Compact Spare Tire on page 477.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with thosethat do not have a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size, load range,speed rating, and construction type (radial andbias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed onthe Tire and Loading Information label. This labelis attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar).See Loading Your Vehicle on page 361, formore information about the Tire and LoadingInformation label and its location on your vehicle.

451

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different sizethan your original equipment wheels and tires,this could affect the way your vehicle performs,including its braking, ride and handlingcharacteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle has electronicsystems such as anti-lock brakes, rollover airbags,traction control, and electronic stability control,the performance of these systems can be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tires notrecommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use GM specific wheel andtire systems developed for your vehicle,and have them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 450 andAccessories and Modifications on page 385for additional information.

452

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) timesas well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in driving habits, servicepractices, and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

453

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give youthe longest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tirebalancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.However, if you notice unusual tire wear or yourvehicle pulling to one side or the other, thealignment may need to be checked. If you noticeyour vehicle vibrating when driving on a smoothroad, your tires and wheels may need to berebalanced. See your dealer/retailer for properdiagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air,replace it (except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired). See yourdealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheelyou need.

454

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offsetand be mounted the same way as the oneit replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheelbolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only withnew GM original equipment parts. This way,you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheelbolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collisionin which you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chain clearanceto the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 458 for moreinformation.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven.It could fail suddenly and cause a crash.If you have to replace a wheel, use a newGM original equipment wheel.

455

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

Do not use tire chains. There is notenough clearance. Tire chains used on avehicle without the proper amount ofclearance can cause damage to thebrakes, suspension or other vehicle parts.The area damaged by the tire chainscould cause you to lose control of yourvehicle and you or others may be injuredin a crash.



Use another type of traction device only ifits manufacturer recommends it for useon your vehicle and tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer’s instructions. To help avoiddamage to your vehicle, drive slowly,readjust or remove the device if it iscontacting your vehicle, and do not spinyour vehicle’s wheels. If you do findtraction devices that will fit, install themon the front tires.

456

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’stires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly. But if youshould ever have a blowout, here are a few tipsabout what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a dragthat pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take yourfoot off the accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain laneposition, and then gently brake to a stop well outof the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rear blowoutremove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Getthe vehicle under control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpyand noisy, but you can still steer. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use thejacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

457

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn onyour vehicle’s hazard warning flashers. SeeHazard Warning Flashers on page 172 for moreinformation.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll overor fall on you or other people. You andthey could be badly injured or even killed.Find a level place to change your tire.To help prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).



3. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remain inthe vehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle willnot move, you should put blocks at thefront and rear of the tire farthest awayfrom the one being changed. That wouldbe the tire, on the other side, at theopposite end of the vehicle.

When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks.

458

The following information will tell you next how touse the jack and change a tire.

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe tools needed to remove the spare tire arelocated in the storage compartment on the driverside, at the rear of the vehicle.1. Open the jack storage compartment by squeezing

down on the latch tab and pulling the cover off.

A. Tool BagB. Wing BoltC. Jack

2. Remove the wing bolt (B) by turning itcounterclockwise.

3. Push the jack (C) up out of the holding bracket.

459

4. Turn the jack on its side, with the bottomfacing toward you.

5. Pull the jack straight out, bottom first.

The tools you will be using include the jack (A)and lug wrench (B).

Removing the Spare TireThe compact spare tire is located under thevehicle, in front of the rear bumper. See CompactSpare Tire on page 477 for more informationabout the compact spare.

A. RearConvenienceCenter

B. Lug WrenchC. Storage

CompartmentCap Hole

D. Hoist ShaftE. Compact

Spare TireF. RetainerG. Hoist Shaft

Assembly

460

1. Open the storage compartment door of theconvenience center that is nearest theliftgate.

2. Move the carpet cutout that is located throughthe hole of the storage compartment.

3. Attach the lug wrench into the hoist shaft.

4. Turn the lug wrench counterclockwise to lowerthe spare tire to the ground. Continue turningthe wrench until the spare tire can bepulled out from under the vehicle.

5. Tilt the retainer and slip it through the wheelopening to remove the spare tire from thecable.

6. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the cableback up after removing the spare tire.Do not store a full-size or a flat road tire underthe vehicle. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools on page 472.

461

To continue changing the flat tire, see Removingthe Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire onpage 463.

If the spare tire will not lower, the secondary latchcould be engaged.

Do the following to check the cable:

1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable isvisible.

2. If it is not visible, see Secondary LatchSystem on page 468.If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable byturning the lug wrench clockwise until you heartwo clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannotover-tighten the cable.

3. Loosen the cable by turning the wrenchcounterclockwise three or four turns.

4. If the spare tire has not lowered, tighten thecable all the way and then loosen it at leasttwo times.If the spare tire did lower to the ground,continue with Step 5 under “Removing theSpare Tire (Vehicles with the RearConvenience Center)” listed previously.

5. If you still cannot lower the spare tire to theground, see Secondary Latch System onpage 468.

462

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire1. It is recommended that you do a safety check

before preceding. See Changing a Flat Tireon page 458 for more information.

2. If the vehicle has a wheel cover, loosen theplastic nut caps with the wheel wrench.They will not come off. Then, using the flatend of the wheel wrench, pry along the edgeof the cover until it comes off. Be careful;the edges may be sharp. Do not try to removethe cover with your bare hands.Store the wheel cover securely in the rear ofthe vehicle until you have the flat tirerepaired or replaced.If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, removethe wheel nut caps using the wheel wrench.

3. Loosen the wheel nuts — but do notremove them — using the lug wrench.For wheels with a wheel lock key, use thewheel lock key between the lock nut andlug wrench. The key is supplied in the frontpassenger door pocket.

Notice: If your vehicle has wheel locks and animpact wrench is used to remove the wheelnuts, the lock nut or wheel lock key could bedamaged. Do not use an impact wrench toremove the wheel nuts if your vehicle haswheel locks.

463

4. To identify the appropriate jacking location,find the triangle about 12 inches (30.5 cm)from the front tire or about 10.5 inches(27 cm) from the rear tire.

The triangle is located near each wheel on thevehicle’s exterior.

Notice: If a jack is used to raise the vehiclewithout positioning it correctly, your vehiclecould be damaged. When raising your vehicleon a jack, avoid contact with the rear axlecontrol arms.

5. Do not raise the vehicle yet. Put the compactspare tire near you.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.

464

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall.To help avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lift headinto the proper location before raisingthe vehicle.

6. Attach the lug wrench to the jack, and turnthe wrench clockwise to raise the jack head3 inches (7.6 cm).

7. Place the jack under the vehicle as identifiedin Step 3. Raise the vehicle by turning thelug wrench clockwise in the jack. Raisethe vehicle far enough off the ground so thatthere is enough room for the spare tire tofit under the wheel well.

8. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off theflat tire.

9. Remove the plastic spare tire heat shield bypulling the rubber latch. Store the plasticspare tire heat shield. See Storing a Flat orSpare Tire and Tools on page 472 formore information.

465

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the partsto which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts become loose after time.The wheel could come off and cause anaccident. When changing a wheel, removeany rust or dirt from the places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. In anemergency, a cloth or a paper towel canbe used to do this; but be sure to use ascraper or wire brush later, if needed,to get all the rust or dirt off.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.Because the nuts might come loose.The vehicle’s wheel could fall off, causinga serious accident.

10. Remove any rust ordirt from the wheelbolts, mountingsurfaces, and sparewheel.

11. Install the compact spare tire.

12. Lower the vehicle by attaching the lug wrenchto the jack and turning the wrenchcounterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

466

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause thewheel to come loose and even come off.This could lead to an accident. Be sure touse the correct wheel nuts. If you haveto replace them, be sure to get newGM original equipment wheel nuts.Stop somewhere as soon as you can andhave the nuts tightened with a torquewrench to the proper torque specification.See Capacities and Specifications onpage 497 for wheel nut torque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification.See Capacities and Specifications on page 497for the wheel nut torque specification.

13. Tighten the wheelnuts firmly in acrisscross sequence,as shown.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on yourvehicle’s compact spare. If you try to put awheel cover on the compact spare, the cover orthe spare could be damaged.

467

Secondary Latch SystemYour vehicle has an underbody mounted tirehoist assembly that has a secondary latchsystem. It is designed to stop the compactspare tire from suddenly falling off your vehicleif the cable holding the spare tire is damaged.For the secondary latch to work, the tire must bestowed with the valve stem pointing down.See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Toolson page 472 for instructions on storing thespare tire correctly.

{CAUTION:

Before beginning this procedure read allthe instructions. Failure to read and followthe instructions could damage the hoistassembly and you and others could gethurt. Read and follow the instructionslisted next.

468

To release the spare tire from the secondary latch:

{CAUTION:

Someone standing too close during theprocedure could be injured by the jack.If the spare tire does not slide off the jackcompletely, make sure no one is behindyou or on either side of you as you pullthe jack out from the under spare.

1. If the cable is not visible, start this procedureat Step 3. 2. Turn the lug wrench counterclockwise until

approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable isexposed.

All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle shown

469

3. Attach the lug wrench to the jack and raisethe jack at least 10 turns.

4. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of therear bumper. Position the center lift point ofthe jack under the center of the spare tire.

5. Turn the lug wrench clockwise to raise thejack until it lifts the secondary latch spring.

6. Keep raising the jack until the spare tire stopsmoving upward and is held firmly in place.This lets you know that the secondarylatch has released and the spare tire isbalancing on the jack.

7. Lower the jack by turning the lug wrenchcounterclockwise. Keep lowering the jackuntil the spare tire slides off the jack.

Front-Wheel-Drive Vehicle shown

470

8. Disconnect the lug wrench from the jack andcarefully remove the jack. Use one hand topush against the spare tire while firmly pullingthe jack out from under the spare tire withthe other hand.

9. Tilt the retainer and slip it through the wheelopening when the spare tire has beencompletely lowered.

10. Turn the lug wrench clockwise to raise thecable back up if the cable is hanging.

Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon asyou can. You will not be able to store a spare tireusing the hoist assembly until it has beenrepaired or replaced.

471

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

Storing the Spare Tire

{CAUTION:

The underbody-mounted spare tire needsto be stored with the valve stem pointingdown. If the spare tire is stored with thevalve stem pointing upwards, itssecondary latch will not work properlyand the spare tire could loosen andsuddenly fall from your vehicle. If thishappened when your vehicle was beingdriven, the tire might contact a person oranother vehicle, causing injury and, ofcourse, damage to itself as well. Be surethe underbody-mounted spare tire isstored with its valve stem pointing down.

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these in theproper place.

To store the spare tire:

1. Lay the compact spare tire near the rear ofthe vehicle with the valve stem down.

2. Reinstall the plastic spare tire heat shield onthe compact spare tire.

3. If the vehicle has aluminum wheels, removethe small center cap by tapping the back ofthe cap with the extension of the shaft.

472

4. Slide the cable retainer through the center ofthe wheel and start to raise the compactspare tire.Make sure the retainer is fully seated acrossthe underside of the wheel.

5. When the compact spare tire is almost in thestored position, turn the tire so the valve istoward the rear of the vehicle.This position helps when checking the airpressure in the compact spare tire.

6. Raise the tire fully against the underside ofthe vehicle. Continue turning the lug wrenchuntil you feel more than two clicks. Thisindicates that the compact spare tire is secureand the cable is tight. The spare tire hoistcannot be overtightened. 7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push,

pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the tire. If thetire moves, use the lug wrench to tightenthe cable.

473

Storing the Flat Tire

Notice: Storing the full-size flat tire in theunderbody hoist system can expose it to heatfrom the exhaust system. This can damagethe tire and underbody hoist system. Do notstore the full-size flat tire in the underbodyhoist system.

1. Remove the cable package from the jackstorage area.

2. Remove the small center cap by tapping theback of the cap with the extension of theshaft, if the vehicle has aluminum wheels.

3. Put the flat tire in the rear storage area withthe valve stem pointing toward the rear of thevehicle.

4. Hook on end of the cable onto the outsideportion of the liftgate hinge opposite (B).

5. Pull the cable (A) through the door striker (E),the center of the wheel (D), and the plasticspare tire heat shield (C), as shown.

474

6. Hook the other endof the cable onto theoutside portion ofthe liftgatehinge (B).

7. Pull on the cable to make sure it is secure.

8. Make sure the metal tube is centered atthe striker.

9. Push the tubetoward the front ofthe vehicle.

10. Close the liftgate and make sure it is latchedproperly.

475

Storing the Tools

A. Tool BagB. Wing BoltC. Jack

Put back all tools as they were stored in the jackstorage compartment and put the compartmentcover back on.

1. Make that the bottom of the jack is facingtoward you.

2. Turn the jack (C) on its side and place it downon the holding bracket.

3. Reinstall the wing bolt (B) by turning itclockwise.

4. To replace the cover, line up the tabs on thebottom of the cover with the slots in the coveropening. Push the cover in place, insuringthat the upper front and rear tabs are inthe opening and push the cover closed. Makesure that the center latch is fully engaged.This secures the cover in place.

Store the center cap or the plastic bolt-on wheelcovers until a full size tire is put back on thevehicle. When you replace the compact spare witha full-size tire, reinstall the bolt-on wheel coversor the center cap. Hand-tighten them overthe wheel nuts, using the lug wrench.

476

Compact Spare TireAlthough the compact spare tire was fully inflatedwhen the vehicle was new, it can lose air aftera time. Check the inflation pressure regularly.It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,stop as soon as possible and make sure thespare tire is correctly inflated. The compactspare is made to perform well at speeds up to65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles(5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and havethe full-size tire repaired or replaced at yourconvenience. Of course, it is best to replace thespare with a full-size tire as soon as possible.The spare tire will last longer and be in goodshape in case it is needed again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed,do not take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the rails. That candamage the tire and wheel, and maybeother parts of your vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.

And do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit.Keep the spare tire and its wheel together.

The All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system will beautomatically disabled when you use the compactspare. To restore the AWD and preventexcessive wear on the clutch in your AWD,replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tireas soon as possible.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compactspare. Using them can damage your vehicleand can damage the chains too. Do not use tirechains on your compact spare.

477

Appearance Care

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Although not alwaysvisible, dust and dirt can accumulate on yourupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles from yourupholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes ofheat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequentcleaning. Use care because newspapers andgarments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may resultfrom using cleaners on surfaces for whichthey were not intended. Use glass cleaner only onglass. Remove any accidental over-spray fromother surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damageto the rear window defogger. When cleaningthe glass on your vehicle, use only a soft clothand glass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere toall safety instructions on the label. While cleaningyour vehicle’s interior, maintain adequateventilation by opening your vehicle’s doors andwindows.

478

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, youcan also obtain a product from your dealer/retailerto remove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interior anddoes not improve the effectiveness of soilremoval.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundrydetergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leave aresidue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per gallon(3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents such asnaptha, alcohol, etc.

479

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brushattachment frequently to remove dust and loosedirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar inthe nozzle may only be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to removethem first with plain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soilwith a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb intothe paper towel until no more can beremoved.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much aspossible and then vacuum.

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gentlyrub toward the center. Continue cleaning,using a clean area of the cloth each time itbecomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result, cleanthe entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, apaper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.

480

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soapsolution can be used. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steamto clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spotremovers on leather. Many commercial leathercleaners and coatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather may permanently changethe appearance and feel of your leather and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never useshoe polish on your leather.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with amild soap solution can be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removerson plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces may permanently change theappearance and feel of your interior and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss onyour instrument panel. The increase in glossmay cause annoying reflections in the windshieldand even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

481

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent application maybe required. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 511.

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm orcold water.Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of thesun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use strongsoaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse thevehicle well, removing all soap residue completely.Approved cleaning products can be obtained fromyour dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/AppearanceMaterials on page 487. Do not use cleaning agentsthat are petroleum based, or that contain acid orabrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushedpromptly and not allowed to dry on the surface, orthey could stain. Avoid using hard brushes duringcleaning. It may damage your vehicle’s finish. Drythe finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cottontowel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water toenter the vehicle. Avoid using high pressurewashes closer than 12 inches (30 cm) to thesurface of the vehicle.

482

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 482.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of yourvehicle by hand may be necessary to removeresidue from the paint finish. You can get approvedcleaning products from your dealer/retailer. SeeVehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 487.

If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish, the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss tothe colored basecoat. Always use waxes andpolishes that are non-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrialchimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish ifthey remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicleas soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe for painted surfacesto remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather and chemical fallout that can take their tollover a period of years. You can help to keepthe paint finish looking new by keeping yourvehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal PartsBright metal parts should be cleaned regularly tokeep their luster. Washing with water is allthat is usually needed. However, you may usechrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim,if necessary.

Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoiddamaging protective trim, never use auto orchrome polish, steam or caustic soap to cleanaluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish,is recommended for all bright metal parts.

483

Windshield, Backglass, andWiper BladesClean the outside of the windshield and backglasswith glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth orpaper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid ora mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughlywhen you clean the blades. Bugs, road grime,sap and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatmentsmay cause wiper streaking. Replace the wiperblades if they are worn or damaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:

• Extreme dusty conditions

• Sand and salt

• Heat and sun

• Snow and ice, without proper removal

Aluminum or Chrome-PlatedWheels and TrimYour vehicle may have either aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trimmay be damaged if you do not wash yourvehicle after driving on roads that have beensprayed with magnesium, calcium or sodiumchloride. These chlorides are used on roads forconditions such as ice and dust. Always washyour vehicle’s chrome with soap and waterafter exposure.

484

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damage thesurface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Useonly approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because you could damagethe surface. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, andbuff off immediately after application.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, you could damagethe aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Never drive a vehicle equipped withaluminum or chrome-plated wheels throughan automatic car wash that uses siliconecarbide tire cleaning brushes.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tirecleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

485

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the body repairshop applies anti-corrosion material to partsrepaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratchesin the finish should be repaired right away.Bare metal will corrode quickly and may developinto major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger areas of finish damage canbe corrected in your dealer’s/retailer’s body andpaint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal and dustcontrol can collect on the underbody. If these arenot removed, corrosion and rust can develop on theunderbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even though they havecorrosion protection.At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in closeareas of the frame should be loosened before beingflushed. Your dealer/retailer or an underbody carwashing system can do this for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaces on thevehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.Although no defect in the paint job causes this,we will repair, at no charge to the owner, thesurfaces of new vehicles damaged by this falloutcondition within 12 months or 12,000 miles(20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first.

486

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description Usage

Polishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and RoadOil Remover

Removes tar, road oil,and asphalt.

Chrome Cleanerand Polish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White Sidewall TireCleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and WireWheel Cleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onand wipe off.

Description Usage

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches, and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines, andprotects in one step.No wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly removes spotsand stains from carpets,vinyl, and clothupholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.

487

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle.It appears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver side. You can seeit if you look through the windshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on theCertification/Tire and Service Parts labels and thecertificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the enginecode. This code helps you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelThis label is on the inside of the glove box.It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.The label has the following information:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

488

Electrical System

High Voltage Devices and Wiring

{CAUTION:

Exposure to high voltage can causeshock, burns, and even death. The highvoltage systems in your vehicle can onlybe serviced by technicians with specialtraining.

High voltage devices are identified bylabels. Do not remove, open, take apart, ormodify these devices. High voltage cableor wiring has orange covering. Do notprobe, tamper with, cut, or modify highvoltage cable or wiring.

Add-On Electrical Equipment

Notice: Do not add anything electrical toyour vehicle unless you check with yourdealer/retailer first. Some electrical equipmentcan damage your vehicle and the damagewould not be covered by your warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,even if your vehicle is not operating.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 90.

489

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by acircuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheatsdue to heavy snow or ice, the wiper will stopuntil the motor cools. If the overload is caused bysome electrical problem, have it fixed.

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsCircuit breakers in the fuse panel protect thepower windows and other power accessories.When the current load is too heavy, the circuitbreaker opens and closes, protecting the circuituntil the problem is fixed.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by a combination of fuses,circuit breakers and fusible thermal links.This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused byelectrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

If you ever have a problem on the road and do nothave a spare fuse, you can borrow one that hasthe same amperage. Just pick some featureof your vehicle that you can get along without, likethe radio or cigarette lighter, and use its fuse ifit is the correct amperage. Replace it as soon asyou can.

Instrument Panel Fuse BlockThe instrument panel fuse block is located underthe instrument panel on the passenger side ofthe vehicle. Pull down on the cover to access thefuse block.

490

Fuses Usage

FRT/WSW Front Windshield Wiper

SPARE Spare

HTD/SEAT Front Heated Seats

STR/WHL/ILLUM Steering Wheel Illumination

MSM Memory Seat Module

PWR/MIRRORS Power Mirrors

DR/LCK Door Locks

AIRBAG Airbag System

LT/TRN/SIG Driver’s Side Turn Signal

REAR WIPER Rear Window Wiper

PWR MOD PassKey Module, Body ControlModule

BCK/UP/STOP Back-up Lamps, Stoplamps

HVAC Climate Control System

DISPLAY Display

RT/TRN/SIG Passenger’s Side Turn Signal

Fuse Side

491

Fuses Usage

DRL* Daytime Running Lamps

RADIO Radio

PDM Power Mirrors, Liftgate Release

DRL 2** Daytime Running Lamps 2

INFOTAINMENT Infotainment System

BCM Body Control Module

SPARE Spare

CTSY Dome Lamps

INADV/PWR/LED Interior Lamps

ONSTR/VENT Emissions

AMP Audio Amplifier

HarnessConnector Usage

BODY Harness Connector

Relay Side

492

Relays Usage

LT/PWR/SEAT Driver’s Side Power Seat Relay

RT/PWR/SEAT Passenger’s Side Power Seat Relay

PWR/WNDW Power Windows Relay

PWR/COLUMN Power Steering Column Relay

L/GATE Liftgate Relay

LCK Power Lock Relay

REAR/WSW Rear Window Washer Relay

UNLCK Power Unlock Relay

DRL2 Daytime Running Lamps 2 Relay

LT/UNLCK Driver’s Side Unlock Relay

DRL Daytime Running Lamps Relay

SPARE Spare

FRT/WSW Front Windshield Washer Relay

Underhood Fuse BlockThe underhood fuse block is located in the enginecompartment, on the passenger’s side of thevehicle.

Lift the cover for accessto the fuse/relay block.

493

To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out.

494

Fuses UsageLT PRK Left Parking LampRT PRK Right Parking Lamp

TRLR PRKLAMP Trailer Parking Lamps

AIRBAG Airbag SystemPCM IGN Powertrain Control Module Ignition

AFS Adaptive Forward Lighting SystemTRANS TransmissionREAR

CAMERA Rear Camera

EMISSION 1 Anti-lock Brakes System 2TRLR BRK Trailer Brake

AWD All-Wheel-Drive SystemTRLR PWR Trailer Power

EVEN COILS Even Injector CoilsRR HVAC Rear Climate Control System

SPARE SpareODD COILS Odd Injector Coils

SPARE SpareLT HI BEAM Left High-Beam Headlamp

SPARE SpareLT TRLR

STOP/TRNTrailer Left Stoplamp and TurnSignal

EMISSION 2 Emission 2

Fuses UsageECM Engine Control Module

RT HI BEAM Right High-Beam HeadlampRVC SNSR Regulated Voltage Control SensorRT TRLR

STOP/TRNTrailer Right Stoplamp and TurnSignal

ECM 1 Engine Control Module 1SPARE Spare

WPR/WSW Windshield Wiper/WasherSPARE Spare

PWR OUTLET Power OutletAUX POWER Auxiliary PowerRT LO BEAM Right Low-Beam Headlamp

RR APO Rear Accessory Power OutletLT LO BEAM Left Low-Beam Headlamp

TCM Transmission Control ModuleTRLR BCK/UP Trailer Back-up Lamps

HTD MIR Heated Outside Rearview MirrorABS MTR Anti-lock Brake System Motor

FOG LAMP Fog LampsHORN Horn

A/C CLTCH Air Conditioning ClutchFUEL PUMP Fuel Pump

SPARE Spare

495

J-Case Fuses UsageFAN 2 Cooling Fan 2

PWR L/GATE Power Liftgate

FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1

HVAC BLWR Climate Control System Blower

STRTR Starter

BATT 2 Battery 2

HTD WASH Heated Windshield Washer System

BATT 1 Battery 1

BATT 3 Battery 3

ABS MTR Anti-lock Brake System Motor

RR DEFOG Rear Defogger

S/ROOF/SUNSHADE Sunroof, Sunshade

Relays UsageFAN 3 Cooling Fan 3

FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2

PRK LAMP Park Lamp

FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1

Relays UsageRT TRLR

STOP/TRNTrailer Right Stoplamp andTurn Signal

LT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer Left Stoplamp andTurn Signal

IGN Ignition Main

CRNK Switched Power

PWR/TRN Powertrain

HI BEAM High-Beam Headlamps

WPR Windshield Wiper

WPR HI Windshield Wiper High Speed

RR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger

HID/LO BEAM High Intensity Discharge (HID)Low-Beam Headlamps

SPARE Spare

FOG LAMP Fog Lamps

HORN Horn

A/C CMPRSRCLTCH Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch

FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump

TRLR BCK/UP Trailer Back-up Lamps

496

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 511 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label locatedunder the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more

information.

Cooling System 12.0 qt 11.4 L

Engine Oil with Filter 5.5 qt 5.2 L

Fuel Tank 22.0 gal 83.3 L

Transmission Fluid 9.5 qt 9.0 L

Wheel Nut Torque 140 lb ft 190 YAll capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

3.6L V6 7 Automatic 0.043 inches (1.10 mm)

497

✍ NOTES

498

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 500Introduction ............................................... 500Maintenance Requirements ........................ 500Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 500Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 501Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 502Additional Required Services ..................... 504Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 506

Owner Checks and Services ..................... 507At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 508At Least Once a Month ............................. 508At Least Once a Year ............................... 509Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 511Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 512Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 513Maintenance Record .................................. 514

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

499

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? ThePlan supplements your new vehicle warranties.See your Warranty and Owner Assistance bookletor your dealer/retailer for details.

Maintenance Requirements

Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, replacement parts, andrecommended fluids and lubricants asprescribed in this manual are necessary to keepyour vehicle in good working condition. Anydamage caused by failure to follow scheduledmaintenance might not be covered by warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keepyour vehicle in good working condition, but alsohelps the environment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom your vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition, besure to maintain your vehicle properly.

500

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe want to help you keep your vehicle ingood working condition. But we do not knowexactly how you will drive it. You may drive veryshort distances only a few times a week. Oryou may drive long distances all the time in veryhot, dusty weather. You may use your vehiclein making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work,to do errands, or in many other ways.Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may needmore frequent checks and replacements. So pleaseread the following and note how you drive. If youhave any questions on how to keep your vehicle ingood condition, see your dealer/retailer.This schedule is for vehicles that:• carry passengers and cargo within

recommended limits. You will find these limitson the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 361.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 388.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 502 should be performed when indicated.See Additional Required Services on page 504 andMaintenance Footnotes on page 506 for furtherinformation.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on a vehiclecan be dangerous. In trying to do somejobs, you can be seriously injured. Do yourown maintenance work only if you have therequired know-how and the proper toolsand equipment for the job. If you have anydoubt, see your dealer/retailer to have aqualified technician do the work. See DoingYour Own Service Work on page 386.

Some maintenance services can be complex. So,unless you are technically qualified and havethe necessary equipment, you should have yourdealer/retailer do these jobs.

501

When you go to your dealer/retailer for yourservice needs, you will know that trained andsupported service technicians will perform the workusing genuine parts.

If you want to purchase service information, seeService Publications Ordering Information onpage 535.

Owner Checks and Services on page 507 tells youwhat should be checked, when to check it, andwhat you can easily do to help keep your vehicle ingood condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids, andlubricants to use are listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 511 and NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 512.When your vehicle is serviced, make sure theseare used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle. We recommend the use ofgenuine parts from your dealer/retailer.

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messagecomes on, it means that service is required for yourvehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon aspossible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It ispossible that, if you are driving under the bestconditions, the engine oil life system might notindicate that vehicle service is necessary for over ayear. However, the engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and at this time thesystem must be reset. Your dealer/retailer hastrained service technicians who will perform thiswork using genuine parts and reset the system.

If the engine oil life system is ever resetaccidentally, you must service your vehicle within3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 400 for information on the Engine Oil LifeSystem and resetting the system.

502

When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messageappears, certain services, checks, and inspectionsare required. Required services are describedin the following for “Maintenance I” and“Maintenance II.” Generally, it is recommendedthat your first service be Maintenance I, yoursecond service be Maintenance II, and that youalternate Maintenance I and Maintenance IIthereafter. However, in some cases,Maintenance II may be required more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes onwithin 10 months since the vehicle was purchasedor Maintenance II was performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if theprevious service performed was Maintenance I.Always use Maintenance II whenever the messagecomes on 10 months or more since the lastservice or if the message has not come on at allfor one year.

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 397. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil Life System on page 400. An Emission Control Service. • •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (g). • •Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 402. See footnote (l). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 448 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month onpage 508.

• •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid asneeded. • •

503

Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)Service Maintenance I Maintenance II

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” inthis section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed. •Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j). •

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicatedmiles (kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • • • • •Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

504

Additional Required Services (cont’d)

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 402. • • •

Change automatic transmission fluid(severe service). See footnote (h). • • •

Change automatic transmission fluid(normal service). •

Replace spark plugs and inspect sparkplug wires. An Emission ControlService.

•

Engine cooling system service(or every five years, whichever occursfirst). An Emission Control Service.See footnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service.See footnote (k).

•

505

Maintenance Footnotes(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors forsurface condition. Inspect other brake parts,including calipers, parking brake, etc. Checkparking brake adjustment.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear. Inspect power steering linesand hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,cracks, chafing, etc.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace withgenuine parts as needed. To help ensureproper operation, a pressure test of the coolingsystem and pressure cap and cleaning the outsideof the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, orcontamination. Clean the windshield andwiper blades, if contaminated. Replace wiperblades that are worn or damaged. See WindshieldWiper Blade Replacement on page 434 andWindshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades onpage 484 for more information.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and allbelts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly. Look for anyother loose or damaged safety belt system parts.If you see anything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job, have it repaired.Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Alsolook for any opened or broken airbag coverings,and have them repaired or replaced. The airbagsystem does not need regular maintenance.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latchassemblies, secondary latches, pivots, springanchor and release pawl, hood and door hinges,rear folding seats, and liftgate hinges. Morefrequent lubrication may be required whenexposed to a corrosive environment. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean clothwill make them last longer, seal better, and notstick or squeak.

506

(g) A fluid loss in any vehicle system couldindicate a problem. Have the system inspectedand repaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluidif needed.

(h) Change automatic transmission fluid if thevehicle is mainly driven under one or moreof these conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F(32°C) or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or

delivery service.

(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system.This service can be complex; you should haveyour dealer/retailer perform this service. SeeEngine Coolant on page 406 for what to use.Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressurecap, and filler neck. Pressure test the coolingsystem and pressure cap.

(j) Check system for interference or binding andfor damaged or missing parts. Replace partsas needed. Replace any components that havehigh effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricateaccelerator or cruise control cables.

(k) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt ifnecessary.

(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should beperformed at the intervals specified to help ensurethe safety, dependability, and emission controlperformance of your vehicle. Your dealer/retailercan assist you with these checks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completedat once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants areadded to your vehicle, make sure they arethe proper ones, as shown in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 511.

507

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checksat each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oilif necessary. See Engine Oil on page 397 forfurther details.

Notice: It is important to check the engine oilregularly and keep it at the proper level.Failure to keep the engine oil at the properlevel can cause damage to the engine notcovered by your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. SeeEngine Coolant on page 406 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level inthe windshield washer fluid reservoir and add theproper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckInspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure theyare inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forgetto check the spare tire. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 442. Check to make sure thespare tire is stored securely. See Changing a FlatTire on page 458.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required for high mileagehighway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life Systemservice notification. Check the tires for wearand, if necessary, rotate the tires. See TireInspection and Rotation on page 448.

508

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection,the vehicle could move suddenly. If thevehicle moves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake on page 134.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and beready to turn off the engine immediately ifit starts.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear. Thevehicle should start only in PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in anyother position, contact your dealer/retailer forservice.

Automatic Transmission Shift LockControl System Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection,the vehicle could move suddenly. If thevehicle moves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 134.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON,but do not start the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move the shift leverout of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shiftlever moves out of PARK (P), contact yourdealer/retailer for service.

509

Ignition Transmission Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set,try to turn the ignition to OFF in each shift leverposition.

• The ignition should turn to OFF only when theshift lever is in PARK (P).

• The ignition key should come out only in OFF.

Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.

Parking Brake and AutomaticTransmission Park (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured and propertycould be damaged. Make sure there isroom in front of your vehicle in case itbegins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and the transmission inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flushany corrosive materials from the underbody.Take care to clean thoroughly any areas wheremud and other debris can collect.

510

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification can be obtained fromyour dealer/retailer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GMStandard GM6094M and displaysthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. To determine theproper viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see Engine Oil on page 397.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 406.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Power SteeringSystem

GM Power Steering Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,in Canada 89021186).

AutomaticTransmission

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

CarrierAssembly —Differential(Rear DriveModule) and

TransferCase (PowerTransfer Unit)

SAE 75W-90 SyntheticAxle Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,in Canada 89021678) meetingGM Specification 9986115.

Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch, Pivots,Spring

Anchor, andRelease Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood andDoor Hinges

and RearFolding Seat

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

511

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from yourdealer/retailer.

Part Part Number ACDelco® Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15278634 —

Engine Oil Filter 89017524 PF48

Spark Plugs 12611882 41-107

Windshield Wiper Blades

Right – 20.8 inches (53. cm) 15254804 —

Left – 24.6 inches (62.5 cm) 15254805 —

Rear–11.6 inches (30.0 cm) 15276259 —

512

Engine Drive Belt Routing

3.6L V6 Engine

513

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed theservice, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements onpage 500. Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 507 can be added on thefollowing record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

514

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



515

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



516

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 518Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 518Online Owner Center ................................. 521Customer Assistance for Text Telephone

(TTY) Users ........................................... 522Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 522GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 523Roadside Assistance Program ................... 524Courtesy Transportation ............................. 527Collision Damage Repair ........................... 530

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 533Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..................... 533

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian Government ............................ 534

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors ...................................... 534

Service Publications OrderingInformation ............................................. 535

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ......... 536Event Data Recorders ............................... 537OnStar ...................................................... 538Navigation System ..................................... 538Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ........ 538

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

517

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are importantto your dealer and to GMC. Normally, anyconcerns with the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will be resolved by yourdealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentions of allconcerned, misunderstandings can occur. If yourconcern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a memberof dealership management. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level. If the matterhas already been reviewed with the sales,service or parts manager, contact the owner of thedealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member ofdealership management, it appears your concerncannot be resolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., contact the GMCConsumer Relations Manager by calling1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782, CustomerAssistance prompt). In Canada, contact GeneralMotors of Canada Customer Communicationby calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following information available to givethe Customer Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This isavailable from the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visible through thewindshield.

• Dealership name and location.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.

518

When contacting GMC, please remember thatyour concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’sfacility. That is why we suggest you followStep One first if you have a concern.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both GeneralMotors and your dealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfied with yournew vehicle. However, if you continue to remainunsatisfied after following the procedure outlined inSteps One and Two, you should file with theBetter Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretationof the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although youmay be required to resort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filling out a courtaction, use of the program is free of charge and

your case will generally be heard within 40 days.If you do not agree with the decision given inyour case, you may reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Programusing the toll-free telephone number or write themat the following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and theDistrict of Columbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and other factors. GeneralMotors reserves the right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue its participation inthis program.

519

STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the eventthat you do not feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following the procedure outlined inSteps 1 and 2, General Motors of Canada Limitedwants you to be aware of its participation in ano-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limited has committedto binding arbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims. The programprovides for the review of the facts involved by animpartial third party arbiter, and may include aninformal hearing before the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire dispute settlementprocess, from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should be completed inapproximately 70 days. We believe our impartialprogram offers advantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and freeof charge.

For further information concerning eligibility in theCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively, you can call the General MotorsCustomer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

Your inquiry should be accompanied by yourVehicle Identification Number (VIN).

520

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for your GMownership needs. Specific vehicle information canbe found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers/retailers for servicenationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privilegesonly available to members.

Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web forupdated information and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each ofyour preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GMCanada section within www.gmcanada.com.

521

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard ofhearing, or speech-impaired and who use theText Telephones (TTYs), GMC has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer Assistance Center.Any TTY user can communicate with GMCby dialing: 1-800-GMC-8583 (462-8583).(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesGMC encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail GMC, the letter should beaddressed to:

United StatesGMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

www.GMC.com1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782)1-800-GMC-8583 (462-8583)(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-GMC-8782(462-8782)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

CanadaGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

522

All Overseas LocationsPlease contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico andU.S. Virgin Islands)

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L.de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants, canreimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipment required foryour vehicle, such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period oftime from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GMMobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has a MobilityProgram. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

523

Roadside Assistance ProgramIn the U.S. call, 1-800-GMC-8782(1-800-462-8782).

In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 daysa year.

As the owner of a new GMC vehicle, you areautomatically enrolled in the GMC RoadsideAssistance program. This value-added service isintended to provide you with peace of mind as youdrive in the city or travel the open road.

Who is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. A person drivingthis vehicle without the consent of the owner isnot eligible for coverage.

The following services are provided in the U.S.during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and,in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverageperiod of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up toa maximum coverage of $100.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thecustomer to get to the nearest service station(approximately $5 in the U.S. and 10 litresin Canada). Service to provide diesel may berestricted. For safety reasons, propaneand other alternative fuels will not be providedthrough this service.

• Lock-out Service: To ensure security, thedriver must present the vehicle registrationand personal ID before lock-out serviceis provided. Lock-out service will be coveredat no charge if you are unable to gainentry into your vehicle.

524

• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway orHighway: Tow to the nearest dealership/retailer for warranty service or in the event ofa vehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tirein good condition, when equipped andproperly inflated, will be covered at no charge.The customer is responsible for the repairor replacement of the tire if not covered by awarrantable failure.

• Jump Start: No-start occurrences whichrequire a battery jump start will be covered atno charge.

• Trip Routing: Your Roadside AssistanceRepresentative can provide you withspecific information regarding this feature.

• Trip Interruption Expense Benefits: YourRoadside Assistance Representative canprovide you with specific information regardingthis feature.

Additional Services for CanadianCustomers• Trip Routing Service: Upon request,

Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,computer- personalized maps, highlightingyour choice of either the most direct route orthe most scenic route to your destination,anywhere in North America, along withany helpful travel information we may havepertaining to your trip. To request this service,please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.We will make every attempt to send yourpersonalized trip routing as quickly aspossible, but it is best to allow three weeksbefore your planned departure date.Trip routing requests will be limited tosix per calendar year.

525

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:In the event of a warranty related vehicledisablement, while en route and over250 kilometres from original point of departure,you may qualify for trip interruption expenseassistance. This assistance covers reasonablereimbursement of up to a maximum of $500 for(A) meals (maximum of $50/day), (B) lodging(maximum of $100/night) and (C) alternateground transportation (maximum of $40/day).This benefit is to assist you with some of theunplanned expense you may incur whilewaiting for your vehicle to be repaired.Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts,and a copy of the repair order are required.Once authorization has been given, youradvisor will help you make any necessaryarrangements and explain how to claim for tripinterruption expense assistance.

• Alternative Service: There may be times,when Roadside Assistance cannot providetimely assistance, your advisor may authorizeyou to secure local emergency road service,and you will be reimbursed up to $100 uponsubmission of the original receipt to RoadsideAssistance.

In many instances, mechanical failures are coveredunder GMC’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty.However, when other services are utilized, ourRoadside Assistance Representatives will explainany payment obligations you might incur.

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideAssistance Representative:

• Your name, home address, and hometelephone number.

• Telephone number of your location.

• Location of the vehicle.

• Model, year, color, and license plate numberof the vehicle.

• Odometer reading, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) and delivery date of the vehicle.

• Description of the problem.

While we hope you never have the occasion touse our service, it is added security while travelingfor you and your family. Remember, we areonly a phone call away. U.S. customers callGMC Roadside Assistance: 1-800-462-8782,text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438.Canadian customers call 1-800-268-6800.

526

GMC and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursementto an owner or driver when, in their solediscretion, the claims become excessive infrequency or type of occurrence.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included inthe coverage provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. GMC and General Motors of Canadareserve the right to make any changes ordiscontinue the Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Assistancecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we andour participating dealers are proud to offerCourtesy Transportation, a customer supportprogram for new vehicles.

For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper(U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, interim transportation may be availableunder the Courtesy Transportation program.Several courtesy transportation options areavailable to assist in reducing your inconveniencewhen warranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty and is available onlyat participating dealers. A separate booklet entitled“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicle provides detailedwarranty coverage information.

527

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service,contact your dealer and request an appointment.By scheduling a service appointment andadvising your service consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealer can helpminimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into theservice department immediately, keep driving ituntil it can be scheduled for service, unless,of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,please call your dealership, let them know this, andask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop thevehicle off for service, you are urged to do so asearly in the work day as possible to allow forthe same day repair.

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completedwhile you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,GM helps to minimize your inconvenience byproviding several transportation options.Depending on the circumstances, your dealer canoffer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceShuttle service is the preferred means of offeringCourtesy Transportation and participatingdealers can provide you with shuttle service to getyou to your destination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includes one-wayor round trip shuttle service within reasonable timeand distance parameters for the dealer’s area.

528

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,and public transportation is used as “shuttleservice”, the reimbursement is limited to theassociated shuttle allowance and must besupported by original receipts. In addition, forU.S. customers, should you arrange transportationthrough a friend or relative, limited reimbursementfor reasonable fuel expenses may be available.Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and besupported by original receipts.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with acourtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you fora rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle iskept for an overnight warranty repair. Rentalreimbursement will be limited and must besupported by original receipts. This requires thatyou sign and complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements. Requirements vary and

may include minimum age requirements, insurancecoverage, credit card, etc. You are responsiblefor fuel usage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond thecompletion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicleas a courtesy rental.

Additional Program InformationAll program options, such as shuttle service, maynot be available at every dealer. Please contactyour dealer for specific information aboutavailability. All Courtesy Transportationarrangements will be administered by appropriatedealer personnel.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterallymodify, change or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibility pursuant to the termsand conditions described herein at its solediscretion.

529

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment andquality replacement parts. Poorly performedcollision repairs diminish your vehicle’s resalevalue, and safety performance can becompromised in subsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GM Collision parts areyour best choice to assure that your vehicle’sdesigned appearance, durability, and safety arepreserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may also beused for repair. These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total losses in prioraccidents. In most cases, the parts being recycledare from undamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GM part, may

be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’soriginally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these partsis not known. Such parts are not covered byyour GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available. Theseare made by companies other than GM and maynot have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,these parts may fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket partsare not covered by your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failure related to suchparts are not covered by that warranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. Your dealer/retailermay have a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, orbe able to recommend a collision repair center thathas GM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

530

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the qualityof coverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repairedwith GM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from yourcurrent insurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company mayrequire you to have insurance that assuresrepairs with Genuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Read your leasecarefully, as you may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved inan accident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure youare all right. If you are uninjured, make surethat no one else in your vehicle, or theother vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accident untilall matters have been taken care of.Move your vehicle only if its position puts youin danger or you are instructed to move itby a police officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This will help guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, callGM Roadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 524 for moreinformation.

531

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service will be taking it. Get acard from the tow truck operator or write downthe driver’s name, the service’s name, andthe phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehicle beforeit is towed away. Make sure this includes yourinsurance information and registration if youkeep these items in your vehicle.

• Gather the important information you will needfrom the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company and policynumber, and a general description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they will need. If theyask for a police report, phone or go to the policedepartment headquarters the next day and youcan get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. Insome states/provinces with “no fault” insurancelaws, a report may not be necessary. This isespecially true if there are no injuries and bothvehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility foryour vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a private collision repair facility to fixthe damage, make sure you are comfortablewith them. Remember, you will have to feelcomfortable with their work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what work willbe performed on your vehicle. If you have aquestion, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

532

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair ProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determined repairfacility of choice, take your vehicle there, or have ittowed there. Specify to the facility that any requiredreplacement collision parts be original equipmentparts, either new Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember, recycled parts willnot be covered by your GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policylimits, your insurance company may initially valuethe repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss thiswith your repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicle isleased you may be obligated to have thevehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even ifyour insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.

If another party’s insurance company is payingfor the repairs, you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on that insurancecompany’s collision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with that company.

In such cases, you can have control of the repairand parts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying General Motors.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your dealer/retailer,or General Motors.

533

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects tothe Canadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that yourvehicle has a safety defect, you shouldimmediately notify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainly hopeyou will notify us. Please call us at1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782), or write:

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

534

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axlesuspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unit repairservice procedures, adjustments, andspecifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,and transfer cases.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service GeneralMotors cars and trucks. Each bulletin containsinstructions to assist in the diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.

In Canada, the service bulletin reference numbercan be obtained by contacting your GeneralMotors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE(1-800-463-7483). This reference number isneeded to order the service bulletin fromHelm, Inc.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US + Processing Fee

Owner InformationOwner publications are written specifically forowners and intended to provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. The ownermanual includes the Maintenance Schedule forall models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,and Warranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 US+ Processing Fee

Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 US+ Processing Fee

535

Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals areavailable for current and past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, specify year andmodel name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. onthe World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice andwithout incurring obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents areto make checks payable in U.S. funds.

Vehicle Data Recordingand PrivacyYour GM vehicle has a number of sophisticatedcomputers that record information about thevehicle’s performance and how it is driven.For example, your vehicle uses computer modulesto monitor and control engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor the conditions forairbag deployment and deploy airbags in a crashand, if so equipped, to provide anti-lock brakingto help the driver control the vehicle. Thesemodules may store data to help your dealer/retailertechnician service your vehicle. Some modulesmay also store data about how you operatethe vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules may alsoretain the owner’s personal preferences, such asradio pre-sets, seat positions, and temperaturesettings.

536

Event Data RecordersSome information about your vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven may be recordedon various modules if a crash occurs. Somepeople refer to these modules as event datarecorders (EDRs). These modules may recordseveral seconds of pre-crash and crash data, suchas data related to engine speed, brakeapplication, throttle position, vehicle speed,yaw rate, steering wheel angle, lateralacceleration, safety belt usage, airbagreadiness, airbag performance and the severityof the collision. Unlike the flight data recorderson airplanes, these modules do not record soundsor conversations.

To retrieve this data, special equipment andaccess to the vehicle or the module that storesthe data are required. Certain data may alsobe sent to or retrieved by OnStar® (see below).GM will not access this information or share it withothers except: with the consent of the vehicleowner or, if the vehicle is leased, with the consentof the lessee; in response to an official requestof police or similar government office; as partof GM’s defense of litigation through the discoveryprocess; or, as required by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also be used forGM research needs or may be made available toothers for research purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to a specific vehicleor vehicle owner.

Others may be able to retrieve this data if theyhave access to the vehicle and have the specialequipment necessary to download the data.

537

OnStarIf your vehicle has OnStar® and you subscribeto the OnStar® services, please refer to theOnStar® Terms and Conditions for informationon data collection and use. See also OnStar®


Navigation SystemIf your vehicle has a navigation system,use of the system may result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephone numbers,and other trip information. Please refer tothe navigation system operating manual forinformation on stored data and for deletioninstructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in some vehicles forfunctions such as tire pressure monitoringand ignition system security, as well as inconnection with conveniences such as key fobsfor remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garage door openers.RFID technology in GM vehicles does notuse or record personal information or link with anyother GM system containing personal information.

538

AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 385Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ............................ 91Additives, Fuel ............................................ 389Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 489Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 402Air Conditioning .................................. 199, 203Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 218Readiness Light ....................................... 217

Airbag System ............................................... 76What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ...................................... 84When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 81Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 79

Airbag SystemsAdding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 91How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 83Passenger Sensing System ....................... 85Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 90What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 83

All-Wheel Drive ........................................... 430All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System .................... 339Anti-Lock Brake System .............................. 335Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 223Appearance Care

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 484Care of Safety Belts ................................ 482Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 486Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 483Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 478Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 480Finish Care .............................................. 483Finish Damage ......................................... 486Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and

Other Plastic Surfaces .......................... 481Leather .................................................... 481Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 486Tires ........................................................ 485Underbody Maintenance ........................... 486Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 487Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 482Weatherstrips ........................................... 482Windshield, Backglass,

and Wiper Blades ................................. 484

539

Audio System .............................................. 264Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 325Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............ 328Care of Your CDs and DVDs ................... 328Navigation/Radio System,

see Navigation Manual ......................... 311Radio with CD ......................................... 268Rear Audio Controller (RAC) .................... 324Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................ 322Setting the Time ...................................... 266Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 325Understanding Radio Reception ............... 326

Audio System(s)Radio with CD and DVD .......................... 278

Automatic TransmissionFluid ........................................................ 404Operation ................................................. 129

BBattery ........................................................ 424

Electric Power Management ..................... 188Run-Down Protection ............................... 189

Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 352Brake

Emergencies ............................................ 336Parking .................................................... 134

Brakes ........................................................ 421System Warning Light .............................. 222

Braking ....................................................... 334Braking in Emergencies ............................... 336Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 123Bulb Replacement ....................................... 432

Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 432Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 431High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting .... 432License Plate Lamps ................................ 433Replacement Bulbs .................................. 433

Buying New Tires ........................................ 450

540

CCalibration ................................................... 140California Fuel ............................................. 388California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 386Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 497Carbon Monoxide .............. 110, 138, 356, 371Care of

Safety Belts ............................................. 482Your CD and DVD Player ........................ 328Your CDs and DVDs ................................ 328

Cargo Cover ............................................... 163Cargo Management System ........................ 164Cargo Tie Downs ........................................ 163CD, MP3 ............................................ 295, 301Center Console Storage Area ...................... 161Chains, Tire ................................................. 456Charging System Light ................................ 220Check

Engine Light ............................................ 226Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 394Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 486

Child RestraintsChild Restraint Systems ............................. 55Infants and Young Children ........................ 51Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 61Older Children ........................................... 48Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................. 69Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ........................ 72Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 60

CleaningAluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 484Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 483Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 480Finish Care .............................................. 483Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 478Instrument Panel, Vinyl,

and Other Plastic Surfaces ................... 481Leather .................................................... 481Tires ........................................................ 485Underbody Maintenance ........................... 486Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 482Weatherstrips ........................................... 482Windshield, Backglass,

and Wiper Blades ................................. 484

541

Climate Control System ............................... 199Dual Automatic ......................................... 203Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 210Rear Air Conditioning and

Heating System .................................... 211Rear Air Conditioning and

Heating System, Electronic ................... 212Clock .......................................................... 266Collision Damage Repair ............................. 530Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 43Compact Spare Tire .................................... 477Compass ..................................................... 140Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 118Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 334Convenience Net ......................................... 163Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 225Engine Temperature Warning Light ........... 224Heater, Engine ......................................... 127

Cooling System ........................................... 413

Courtesy Lamps .......................................... 186Cruise Control ............................................. 180Cruise Control Light .................................... 230Cupholder(s) ................................................ 161Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy Transportation ........................... 527Customer Assistance for

Text Telephone (TTY) Users ................. 522Customer Assistance Offices .................... 522Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 518GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 523Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ..................................... 534Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 534Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .................... 533Roadside Assistance Program .................. 524Service Publications

Ordering Information ............................. 535

542

DDaytime Running Lamps/Automatic

Headlamp System .................................... 185Defensive Driving ........................................ 330Delayed Entry Lighting ................................ 187Delayed Exit Lighting ................................... 188Delayed Headlamps .................................... 184Delayed Locking .......................................... 107Disc, MP3 .......................................... 295, 301Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 386Door

Delayed Locking ...................................... 107Locks ....................................................... 106Power Door Locks ................................... 107Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 107Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 108

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 30Seat Height Adjuster .................................. 10

Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 232DIC Operation and Displays ............ 233, 239DIC Vehicle Customization ....................... 255DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 244

DrivingAt Night ................................................... 346City .......................................................... 350Defensive ................................................. 330Drunken ................................................... 331Freeway ................................................... 351Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 354In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 347Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 361Winter ...................................................... 356

Dual Automatic Climate Control System ....... 203DVD

Rear Seat Entertainment System ............. 311

EEDR ............................................................ 536Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 489Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 490Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 490Power Windows and Other

Power Options ...................................... 490Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 493Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 490

543

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 402Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 226Coolant .................................................... 406Coolant Heater ......................................... 127Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 225Coolant Temperature Warning Light .......... 224Drive Belt Routing .................................... 513Engine Compartment Overview ................ 396Exhaust ................................................... 138Oil ........................................................... 397Oil Life System ........................................ 400Overheated Protection Operating Mode .... 412Overheating ............................................. 410Running While Parked ............................. 139Starting .................................................... 126

Entry Lighting .............................................. 187Event Data Recorders ................................. 537Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 47Exterior Lamps ............................................ 183

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 402Finish Damage ............................................ 486Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 172

Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 176Flat Tire ...................................................... 457Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 458Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 472Floor Mats ................................................... 162Fluid

Automatic Transmission ............................ 404Power Steering ........................................ 419Windshield Washer .................................. 420

Fog LampFog .......................................................... 186

Fog Lamp Light ........................................... 230Fuel ............................................................ 387

Additives .................................................. 389California Fuel .......................................... 388Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 393Filling Your Tank ...................................... 390Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 390Gage ....................................................... 231Gasoline Octane ...................................... 388Gasoline Specifications ............................ 388

FusesFuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 490Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 490Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 493Windshield Wiper ..................................... 490

544

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 225Fuel ......................................................... 231Speedometer ........................................... 216Tachometer .............................................. 216Voltmeter Gage ........................................ 221

Garage Door Opener ................................... 150Gasoline

Octane ..................................................... 388Specifications ........................................... 388

Glove Box ................................................... 161GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 523

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 172Head Restraints ............................................ 17Headlamp

Aiming ..................................................... 431Headlamps

Bulb Replacement .................................... 432Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic

Headlamp System ................................ 185

Headlamps (cont.)Delayed ................................................... 184Exterior Lamps ......................................... 183Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 176Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 432High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting .... 432High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 176

Head-Up Display (HUD) .............................. 190Heated Seats ................................................ 12Heater ......................................................... 199Heater ......................................................... 203Height Adjuster, Driver Seat .......................... 10High Voltage Devices and Wiring ................ 489Highbeam On Light ..................................... 230Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 353Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 354Hood

Checking Things Under ............................ 394Release ................................................... 395

Horn ............................................................ 173How to Use This Manual ................................ 4How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 29

545

IIgnition Positions ......................................... 124Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 51Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 442Instrument Panel

Overview .................................................. 170Storage Area ............................................ 161

Instrument Panel (I/P)Brightness ................................................ 186Cluster ..................................................... 215

JJump Starting .............................................. 425

KKeyless Entry System ................................... 98Keys ............................................................. 97

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 436Lamps

Courtesy .................................................. 186Reading ................................................... 188

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 61

License Plate Lamps ................................... 433Liftgate

Carbon Monoxide ..................................... 109Liftgate, Power ............................................ 110Light

Airbag Readiness ..................................... 217Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 223Brake System Warning ............................. 222Charging System ..................................... 220Cruise Control .......................................... 230Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ....... 224Fog Lamp ................................................ 230

546

Light (cont.)Highbeam On .......................................... 230Malfunction Indicator ................................ 226Oil Pressure ............................................. 229Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 218Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 217Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 216Security ................................................... 229StabiliTrak® Indicator ................................ 224Tire Pressure ........................................... 225Tow/Haul Mode ........................................ 230

LightingDelayed Entry .......................................... 187Delayed Exit ............................................ 188Entry ........................................................ 187Parade Dimming ...................................... 188

LightsExterior Lamps ......................................... 183Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 176High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 176

Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 361Lockout Protection ....................................... 108

LocksDelayed Locking ...................................... 107Door ........................................................ 106Lockout Protection ................................... 108Power Door ............................................. 107Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 107Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 108

Loss of Control ........................................... 344Luggage Carrier .......................................... 162Lumbar

Manual Controls ......................................... 11Power Controls .......................................... 12

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services .................... 504At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 508At Least Once a Month ............................ 508At Least Once a Year .............................. 509Introduction .............................................. 500Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 506

547

Maintenance Schedule (cont.)Maintenance Record ................................ 514Maintenance Requirements ...................... 500Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ... 512Owner Checks and Services .................... 507Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 511Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 502Using ....................................................... 501Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 500

Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 226Manual Lumbar Controls ............................... 11Manual Seats .................................................. 9Memory Seat and Mirrors .............................. 13Message

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 244Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview withOnStar® and Compass ......................... 140

Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...... 140Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 144Outside Heated Mirrors ............................ 145Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors .............. 143Outside Power Mirrors ............................. 142

MP3 ................................................... 295, 301MyGMLink.com ............................................ 521

NNavigation System, Privacy ......................... 538Navigation/Radio System,

see Navigation Manual ............................. 311New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 123Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 512

OOdometer .................................................... 216Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 342Oil

Engine ..................................................... 397Pressure Light .......................................... 229

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 400Older Children, Restraints ............................. 48Online Owner Center ................................... 521OnStar, Privacy ........................................... 538OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 145Operation, Universal Home

Remote System .............................. 150, 154Orange Covered Wiring ............................... 489Other Warning Devices ................................ 173Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 210

548

OutletsAccessory Power ..................................... 197

OutsideConvex Mirror .......................................... 144Heated Mirrors ......................................... 145Power Foldaway Mirrors ........................... 143Power Mirrors .......................................... 142

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode ....................................... 412

Owner Checks and Services ....................... 507Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 486Parade Dimming .......................................... 188Park Aid ...................................................... 194Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................. 135Shifting Out of ......................................... 137

ParkingAssist ....................................................... 194Brake ....................................................... 134Over Things That Burn ............................ 137

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 218Passenger Sensing System ........................... 85Passing ....................................................... 342PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 120PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................... 121Power

Door Locks .............................................. 107Electrical System ..................................... 490Liftgate ..................................................... 110Lumbar Controls ........................................ 12Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current ........... 198Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 125Seat .......................................................... 10Steering Fluid .......................................... 419Tilt Wheel and Telescopic

Steering Column ................................... 174Windows .................................................. 115

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 47Privacy ........................................................ 536

Event Data Recorders .............................. 537Navigation System ................................... 538OnStar ..................................................... 538Radio Frequency Identification .................. 538

Programmable Automatic Door Locks .......... 107

549

QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts .... 28

RRadiator Pressure Cap ................................ 410Radio Frequency Identification (RFID),

Privacy ..................................................... 538Radios ........................................................ 264

Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............ 328Care of Your CDs and DVDs ................... 328Navigation/Radio System,

see Navigation Manual ......................... 311Radio with CD ......................................... 268Radio with CD and DVD .......................... 278Rear Audio Controller (RAC) .................... 324Rear Seat Audio ...................................... 322Setting the Time ...................................... 266Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 325Understanding Reception ......................... 326

Reading Lamps ........................................... 188Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System ... 211Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System

and Electronic Climate Controls ............... 212Rear Audio Controller (RAC) ....................... 324

Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 108Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 43Rear Seat Armrest ...................................... 163Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................... 322Rear Seat Entertainment System ................. 311Rear Seat Operation ..................................... 18Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 40Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper .................... 179Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming

with OnStar® and Compass ..................... 140Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...................... 140Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 15Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 511Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 367Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............ 98Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,

Operation ................................................. 100Removing the Flat Tire and

Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 463Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 459Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 433Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ............................. 534General Motors ........................................ 534United States Government ....................... 533

550

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................. 92Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ......................................... 93Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 125Right Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 39Roadside

Assistance Program ................................. 524Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 361Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 513Running the Engine While Parked ............... 139

SSafety Belt

Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 217Pretensioners ............................................. 47Reminder Light ........................................ 216

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 482Driver Position ........................................... 30How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 29Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................ 28Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 43

Safety Belts (cont.)Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 40Right Front Passenger Position .................. 39Safety Belt Extender .................................. 47Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 39Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 24Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 38

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 502Seats

Driver Seat Height Adjuster ........................ 10Head Restraints ......................................... 17Heated Seats ............................................. 12Manual ........................................................ 9Manual Lumbar .......................................... 11Memory, Mirrors ......................................... 13Power Lumbar ........................................... 12Power Seats .............................................. 10Rear Seat Operation .................................. 18Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 15Third Row Seat ......................................... 21

Secondary Latch System ............................. 468Securing a Child Restraint

Rear Seat Position ..................................... 69Right Front Seat Position ........................... 72

Security Light .............................................. 229

551

Service ........................................................ 385Accessories and Modifications .................. 385Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle ......................................... 387California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 386Doing Your Own Work ............................. 386Engine Soon Light ................................... 226Publications Ordering Information ............. 535

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 90Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 486Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 135Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 137Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 38Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 175Spare Tire

Compact .................................................. 477Installing .................................................. 463Removing ................................................ 459Storing ..................................................... 472

Specifications, Capacities ............................ 497Speedometer ............................................... 216StabiliTrak® System ..................................... 337StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ........................... 224Starting Your Engine ................................... 126Steering ...................................................... 340Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 325Steering Wheel, Power Tilt Wheel and

Telescopic Steering Column ..................... 174

Storage AreasCargo Management System ..................... 164Center Console Storage Area ................... 161Convenience Net ..................................... 163Cupholder(s) ............................................ 161Glove Box ................................................ 161Instrument Panel Storage Area ................. 161Luggage Carrier ....................................... 162Rear Seat Armrest ................................... 163

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 360Sun Visors .................................................. 117Sunroof ....................................................... 164System Identification, Universal Home

Remote System ....................................... 149

TTachometer ................................................. 216Telescopic Steering Column,

Power Tilt Wheel ...................................... 174Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 325Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 118

Content Theft-Deterrent ............................ 118PASS-Key® III+ ........................................ 120PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................ 121

Time, Setting ............................................... 266

552

TirePressure Light .......................................... 225

Tires ........................................................... 435Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,

Cleaning ............................................... 484Buying New Tires ..................................... 450Chains ..................................................... 456Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 458Cleaning .................................................. 485Compact Spare Tire ................................. 477Different Size ........................................... 452If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 457Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 442Inspection and Rotation ............................ 448Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 463Pressure Monitor System ......................... 444Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 463Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 459Secondary Latch System ......................... 468Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 472Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 436Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 439Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 453Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 454

Tires (cont.)Wheel Replacement ................................. 454When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 450

Tow/Haul Mode ........................................... 133Tow/Haul Mode Light ................................... 230Towing

Recreational Vehicle ................................. 367Towing a Trailer ....................................... 371Your Vehicle ............................................. 367

TractionStabiliTrak® System ................................. 337

TransmissionFluid, Automatic ....................................... 404

Transmission Operation, Automatic .............. 129Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 175Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 174

UUltrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ........ 194Understanding Radio Reception ................... 326Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 453Universal Home Remote System ................. 150

Operation ........................................ 150, 154System Identification ................................ 149

553

VVehicle

Control ..................................................... 334Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Loading .................................................... 361Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Customization, DIC ......................... 255Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ............ 536Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) .......................................... 488Service Parts Identification Label .............. 488

Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 210Visors .......................................................... 117Voltage Devices, High and Wiring ............... 489Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 221

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 214Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 244Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 172Other Warning Devices ............................ 173Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 454Different Size ........................................... 452Replacement ............................................ 454

Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 60Windows ..................................................... 114

Power ...................................................... 115Windshield

Backglass, and Wiper Blades, Cleaning .... 484Washer .................................................... 177Washer Fluid ........................................... 420Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 434Wiper Fuses ............................................ 490Wipers ..................................................... 176

Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ................... 179Winter Driving ............................................. 356Wiring, High Voltage Devices ...................... 489

XXM Radio Messages ................................... 309

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 500

554

2007 gmc acadia owner manual m - gm extended warranty the

Documents